Table of Contents
- GS2210 Series
- User’s Guide
- Technical Reference
- The Web Configurator
- Initial Setup Example
- Tutorials
- Status and ZON
- Basic Setting
- VLAN
- Static MAC Forward Setup
- Static Multicast Forward Setup
- Filtering
- Spanning Tree Protocol
- 13.1 Spanning Tree Protocol Overview
- 13.2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen
- 13.3 Spanning Tree Configuration
- 13.4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
- 13.5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status
- 13.6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
- 13.7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status
- 13.8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
- 13.9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status
- 13.10 Technical Reference
- Bandwidth Control
- Broadcast Storm Control
- Mirroring
- Link Aggregation
- Port Authentication
- Port Security
- Time Range
- Classifier
- Policy Rule
- Queuing Method
- Multicast
- AAA
- IP Source Guard
- 26.1 IP Source Guard Overview
- 26.2 IP Source Guard Screen
- 26.3 IPv4 Source Guard Setup
- 26.4 IPv4 Source Guard Static Binding
- 26.5 DHCP Snooping
- 26.6 DHCP Snooping Configure
- 26.7 ARP Inspection Status
- 26.8 ARP Inspection VLAN Status
- 26.9 ARP Inspection Log Status
- 26.10 ARP Inspection Configure
- 26.11 IPv6 Source Guard Overview
- 26.12 IPv6 Source Binding Status
- 26.13 IPv6 Static Binding Setup
- 26.14 IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup
- 26.15 IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup
- 26.16 IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup
- 26.17 IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup
- 26.18 IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup
- 26.19 Technical Reference
- Loop Guard
- Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
- PPPoE
- Error Disable
- Private VLAN
- Green Ethernet
- Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
- Anti-Arpscan
- BPDU Guard
- OAM
- ZULD
- Static Route
- Differentiated Services
- DHCP
- 40.1 DHCP Overview
- 40.2 DHCP Configuration
- 40.3 DHCPv4 Status
- 40.4 DHCPv4 Relay
- 40.4.1 DHCPv4 Relay Agent Information
- 40.4.2 DHCPv4 Option 82 Profile
- 40.4.3 Configuring DHCPv4 Global Relay
- 40.4.4 DHCPv4 Global Relay Port Configure
- 40.4.5 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example
- 40.4.6 Configuring DHCPv4 VLAN Settings
- 40.4.7 DHCPv4 VLAN Port Configure
- 40.4.8 Example: DHCP Relay for Two VLANs
- 40.5 DHCPv6 Relay
- ARP Setup
- Maintenance
- Access Control
- Diagnostic
- System Log
- Syslog Setup
- Cluster Management
- MAC Table
- ARP Table
- Path MTU Table
- Configure Clone
- IPv6 Neighbor Table
- Troubleshooting
- Customer Support
- Common Services
- IPv6
- Legal Information
- Index
Zyxel GS2210-8 User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for GS2210-8 by Zyxel which is a product in the Network Switches category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
Quick Start Guide
www.zyxel.com
GS2210 Series
Intelligent Layer 2 GbE Switch
Ve rsion 4.30
Edition 1, 10/2015
Copyright © 2015 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
User’s Guide
Default Login Details
LAN IP Address http://192.168.1.1
User Name admin
Password 1234
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
2
IMPORTANT!
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.
KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
This is a User’s Guide for a series of products. Not all products support all firmware features.
Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in
your product firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure
that the information in this manual is accurate.
Related Documentation
• CLI Reference Guide
The CLI Reference Guide explains how to use the Command-Line Interface (CLI) to configure the
Switch.
Note: It is recommended you use the Web Configurator to configure the Switch.
• Web Configurator Online Help
Click the help icon in any screen for help in configuring that screen and supplementary
information.
•More Information
Go to support.zyxel.com to find other information on the Switch.
Contents Overview
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
3
Contents Overview
User’s Guide .................................................................... .......... .........................................................18
Getting to Know Your Switch ...................................................................................................................19
Hardware Installation and Connection ....................................................................................................24
Hardware Panels .....................................................................................................................................27
Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................33
The Web Configurator .............................................................................................................................34
Initial Setup Example ..............................................................................................................................42
Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................................46
Status and ZON .......................................................................................................................................55
Basic Setting ...........................................................................................................................................64
VLAN .......................................................................................................................................................93
Static MAC Forward Setup .................................................................................................................... 114
Static Multicast Forward Setup .............................................................................................................. 116
Filtering ................................................................................................................................................. 119
Spanning Tree Protocol .........................................................................................................................121
Bandwidth Control .................................................................................................................................142
Broadcast Storm Control .......................................................................................................................144
Mirroring ................................................................................................................................................146
Link Aggregation ...................................................................................................................................148
Port Authentication ................................................................................................................................157
Port Security ..........................................................................................................................................165
Time Range ...........................................................................................................................................168
Classifier ...............................................................................................................................................170
Policy Rule ............................................................................................................................................179
Queuing Method ....................................................................................................................................183
Multicast ................................................................................................................................................186
AAA ....................................................................................................................................................... 211
IP Source Guard ...................................................................................................................................222
Loop Guard ...........................................................................................................................................257
Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling ...................................................................................................................261
PPPoE ...................................................................................................................................................265
Error Disable .........................................................................................................................................273
Private VLAN .........................................................................................................................................280
Green Ethernet ......................................................................................................................................282
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) ..................................................................................................284
Anti-Arpscan ..........................................................................................................................................309
BPDU Guard .........................................................................................................................................315
Contents Overview
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
4
OAM ......................................................................................................................................................318
ZULD .....................................................................................................................................................326
Static Route ...........................................................................................................................................330
Differentiated Services ..........................................................................................................................333
DHCP ....................................................................................................................................................337
ARP Setup ............................................................................................................................................349
Maintenance ..........................................................................................................................................353
Access Control ......................................................................................................................................362
Diagnostic .............................................................................................................................................385
System Log ...........................................................................................................................................388
Syslog Setup .........................................................................................................................................389
Cluster Management .............................................................................................................................392
MAC Table .............................................................................................................................................398
ARP Table .............................................................................................................................................401
Path MTU Table ....................................................................................................................................403
Configure Clone ....................................................................................................................................404
IPv6 Neighbor Table ..............................................................................................................................407
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................409
Table of Contents
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
5
Table of Contents
Contents Overview ...............................................................................................................................3
Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................5
Part I: User’s Guide .........................................................................................18
Chapter 1
Getting to Know Your Switch.............................................................................................................19
1.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................19
1.1.1 Backbone Application ..............................................................................................................20
1.1.2 Bridging Example ....................................................................................................................21
1.1.3 High Performance Switching Example ....................................................................................21
1.1.4 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Application Examples ..............................................................................22
1.2 Ways to Manage the Switch ..............................................................................................................23
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Switch ...............................................................................................23
Chapter 2
Hardware Installation and Connection .............................................................................................24
2.1 Installation Scenarios ........................................................................................................................24
2.2 Desktop Installation Procedure ........................................................................................................24
2.3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack ........................................................................................................24
2.3.1 Rack-mounted Installation Requirements ................................................................................24
2.3.2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch .......................................................................25
2.3.3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack ...............................................................................................25
Chapter 3
Hardware Panels.................................................................................................................................27
3.1 Front Panel ........................................................................................................................................27
3.1.1 Gigabit Ethernet Ports ............................................................................................................27
3.1.2 Mini-GBIC Slots .......................................................................................................................28
3.1.3 LED Mode (only available for GS2210-48HP) .........................................................................30
3.2 Rear Panel ........................................................................................................................................30
3.2.1 Console Port ............................................................................................................................31
3.2.2 Power Connector .....................................................................................................................31
3.3 LEDs ...............................................................................................................................................31
Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................33
Table of Contents
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
6
Chapter 4
The Web Configurator........................................................................................................................34
4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................34
4.2 System Login ...................................................................................................................................34
4.3 The Status Screen ............................................................................................................................35
4.3.1 Change Your Password ..........................................................................................................39
4.4 Saving Your Configuration ................................................................................................................39
4.5 Switch Lockout .................................................................................................................................40
4.6 Resetting the Switch ........................................................................................................................40
4.6.1 Reload the Configuration File .................................................................................................40
4.7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator ..............................................................................................41
4.8 Help ..................................................................................................................................................41
Chapter 5
Initial Setup Example..........................................................................................................................42
5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................42
5.1.1 Creating a VLAN ......................................................................................................................42
5.1.2 Setting Port VID .......................................................................................................................43
5.2 Configuring Switch Management IP Address ....................................................................................44
Chapter 6
Tutorials...............................................................................................................................................46
6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................46
6.2 How to Use DHCPv4 Snooping on the Switch ..................................................................................46
6.3 How to Use DHCPv4 Relay on the Switch ........................................................................................49
6.3.1 DHCP Relay Tutorial Introduction ............................................................................................50
6.3.2 Creating a VLAN ......................................................................................................................50
6.3.3 Configuring DHCPv4 Relay .....................................................................................................53
6.3.4 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................54
Chapter 7
Status and ZON...................................................................................................................................55
7.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................55
7.1.1 What You Can Do ....................................................................................................................55
7.2 Status ................................................................................................................................................55
7.3 ZyXEL One Network (ZON) Utility Screen ........................................................................................57
7.4 ZON Neighbor Management Screen ................................................................................................58
7.5 Port Status .......................................................................................................................................59
7.5.1 Port Details ...........................................................................................................................61
Chapter 8
Basic Setting.......................................................................................................................................64
8.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................64
Table of Contents
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
7
8.1.1 What You Can Do ....................................................................................................................64
8.2 System Information ........................................................................................................................64
8.3 General Setup .................................................................................................................................66
8.4 Introduction to VLANs ......................................................................................................................68
8.5 Switch Setup ....................................................................................................................................69
8.6 IP Setup ...........................................................................................................................................70
8.6.1 Management IP Addresses .....................................................................................................71
8.7 Port Setup ........................................................................................................................................72
8.8 PoE Status .......................................................................................................................................74
8.8.1 PoE Time Range Status ..........................................................................................................76
8.8.2 PoE Setup ..............................................................................................................................77
8.9 Interface Setup ..................................................................................................................................79
8.10 IPv6 .................................................................................................................................................80
8.10.1 IPv6 Interface Status .............................................................................................................81
8.10.2 IPv6 Configuration .................................................................................................................84
8.10.3 IPv6 Global Setup ..................................................................................................................84
8.10.4 IPv6 Interface Setup ..............................................................................................................85
8.10.5 IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup .............................................................................................86
8.10.6 IPv6 Global Address Setup ...................................................................................................87
8.10.7 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup .............................................................................................88
8.10.8 IPv6 Neighbor Setup .............................................................................................................89
8.10.9 DHCPv6 Client Setup ............................................................................................................90
8.11 DNS .................................................................................................................................................92
Chapter 9
VLAN....................................................................................................................................................93
9.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................93
9.1.1 What You Can Do ....................................................................................................................93
9.1.2 What You Need to Know ..........................................................................................................93
9.2 VLAN Status .....................................................................................................................................96
9.2.1 VLAN Details ..........................................................................................................................97
9.3 VLAN Configuration .........................................................................................................................98
9.4 Configure a Static VLAN .................................................................................................................98
9.5 Configure VLAN Port Settings .......................................................................................................100
9.6 Subnet Based VLANs ....................................................................................................................101
9.6.1 Configuring Subnet Based VLAN ........................................................................................102
9.7 Protocol Based VLANs ...................................................................................................................104
9.7.1 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN ........................................................................................104
9.8 Voice VLAN .....................................................................................................................................106
9.9 MAC Based VLAN ...........................................................................................................................107
9.10 Port-Based VLAN Setup .............................................................................................................109
9.10.1 Configure a Port-Based VLAN .............................................................................................109
9.11 Technical Reference ...................................................................................................................... 112
Table of Contents
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
8
9.11.1 Create an IP-based VLAN Example .................................................................................... 112
Chapter 10
Static MAC Forward Setup...............................................................................................................114
10.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 114
10.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................ 114
10.2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding ............................................................................................. 114
Chapter 11
Static Multicast Forward Setup .......................................................................................................116
11.1 Static Multicast Forward Setup Overview ..................................................................................... 116
11.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................ 116
11.1.2 What You Need To Know ..................................................................................................... 116
11.2 Configuring Static Multicast Forwarding ........................................................................................ 117
Chapter 12
Filtering..............................................................................................................................................119
12.1 Filtering Overview ........................................................................................................................ 119
12.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................ 119
12.2 Configure a Filtering Rule ............................................................................................................. 119
Chapter 13
Spanning Tree Protocol ....................................................................................................................121
13.1 Spanning Tree Protocol Overview ................................................................................................121
13.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................121
13.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................121
13.2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen .........................................................................................124
13.3 Spanning Tree Configuration .......................................................................................................124
13.4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol ...................................................................................125
13.5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status ..........................................................................................127
13.6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol .....................................................................129
13.7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status .............................................................................131
13.8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol ................................................................................132
13.8.1 MSTP Port Configuration ....................................................................................................135
13.9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status .......................................................................................137
13.10 Technical Reference ....................................................................................................................139
13.10.1 MSTP Network Example ...................................................................................................139
13.10.2 MST Region .......................................................................................................................140
13.10.3 MST Instance ....................................................................................................................141
13.10.4 Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) ....................................................................141
Chapter 14
Bandwid th Control........................................................... .......... ........... ........... .......... .......................142
Table of Contents
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
9
14.1 Bandwidth Control Overview ........................................................................................................142
14.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................142
14.2 Bandwidth Control Setup ..............................................................................................................142
Chapter 15
Broadcast Storm Control.................................................................................................................144
15.1 Broadcast Storm Control Overview ..............................................................................................144
15.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................144
15.2 Broadcast Storm Control Setup .....................................................................................................144
Chapter 16
Mirroring............................................................................................................................................146
16.1 Mirroring Overview .......................................................................................................................146
16.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................146
16.2 Port Mirroring Setup ......................................................................................................................146
Chapter 17
Link Aggregation ..............................................................................................................................148
17.1 Link Aggregation Overview ..........................................................................................................148
17.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................148
17.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................148
17.2 Link Aggregation Status ................................................................................................................149
17.3 Link Aggregation Setting ..............................................................................................................151
17.3.1 Link Aggregation Control Protocol ....................................................................................153
17.4 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................155
17.4.1 Static Trunking Example ......................................................................................................155
Chapter 18
Port Authentication ..........................................................................................................................157
18.1 Port Authentication Overview .......................................................................................................157
18.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................157
18.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................157
18.1.3 MAC Authentication .............................................................................................................158
18.2 Port Authentication Configuration .................................................................................................159
18.3 Activate IEEE 802.1x Security ....................................................................................................159
18.3.1 Guest VLAN ........................................................................................................................160
18.4 Activate MAC Authentication ........................................................................................................162
Chapter 19
Port Security .....................................................................................................................................165
19.1 Port Security Overview .................................................................................................................165
19.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................165
19.2 Port Security Setup .......................................................................................................................165
Table of Contents
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
10
Chapter 20
Time Range .......................................................................................................................................168
20.1 Time Range Overview ..................................................................................................................168
20.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................168
20.2 Configuring Time Range ...............................................................................................................168
Chapter 21
Classifier............................................................................................................................................170
21.1 Classifier Overview .......................................................................................................................170
21.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................170
21.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................170
21.2 Classifier Status ............................................................................................................................170
21.3 Classifier Configuration ................................................................................................................171
21.3.1 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration Summary .......................................................175
21.4 Classifier Global Setting ................................................................................................................176
21.5 Classifier Example ........................................................................................................................177
Chapter 22
Policy Rule ........................................................................................................................................179
22.1 Policy Rules Overview .................................................................................................................179
22.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................179
22.2 Configuring Policy Rules ...............................................................................................................179
22.3 Policy Example ..............................................................................................................................182
Chapter 23
Queuing Method ...............................................................................................................................183
23.1 Queuing Method Overview ...........................................................................................................183
23.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................183
23.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................183
23.2 Configuring Queuing .....................................................................................................................184
Chapter 24
Multicast ............................................................................................................................................186
24.1 Multicast Overview ........................................................................................................................186
24.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................186
24.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................186
24.2 Multicast Setup ..............................................................................................................................190
24.3 IPv4 Multicast Status ....................................................................................................................190
24.3.1 IGMP Snooping ..................................................................................................................191
24.3.2 IGMP Snooping VLAN ........................................................................................................193
24.3.3 IGMP Filtering Profile .........................................................................................................195
24.4 IPv6 Multicast Status ....................................................................................................................196
24.4.1 MLD Snooping-proxy ...........................................................................................................197
Table of Contents
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
11
24.4.2 MLD Snooping-proxy VLAN ................................................................................................197
24.4.3 MLD Snooping-proxy VLAN Port Role Setting ....................................................................199
24.4.4 MLD Snooping-proxy Filtering .............................................................................................201
24.4.5 MLD Snooping-proxy Filtering Profile ..................................................................................203
24.5 General MVR Configuration .........................................................................................................204
24.5.1 MVR Group Configuration ..................................................................................................206
24.5.2 MVR Configuration Example ...............................................................................................208
Chapter 25
AAA....................................................................................................................................................211
25.1 AAA Overview .............................................................................................................................. 211
25.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................ 211
25.1.2 What You Need to Know ...................................................................................................... 211
25.2 AAA Screens .................................................................................................................................212
25.3 RADIUS Server Setup ..................................................................................................................213
25.4 TACACS+ Server Setup ...............................................................................................................214
25.5 AAA Setup ....................................................................................................................................216
25.6 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................219
25.6.1 Vendor Specific Attribute .....................................................................................................219
25.6.2 Supported RADIUS Attributes .............................................................................................220
25.6.3 Attributes Used for Authentication .......................................................................................221
Chapter 26
IP Source Guard................................................................................................................................222
26.1 IP Source Guard Overview ..........................................................................................................222
26.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................222
26.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................223
26.2 IP Source Guard Screen ...............................................................................................................223
26.3 IPv4 Source Guard Setup ............................................................................................................224
26.4 IPv4 Source Guard Static Binding ................................................................................................225
26.5 DHCP Snooping ...........................................................................................................................227
26.6 DHCP Snooping Configure ..........................................................................................................230
26.6.1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure .........................................................................................232
26.6.2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure ......................................................................................234
26.6.3 DHCP Snooping VLAN Port Configure ................................................................................235
26.7 ARP Inspection Status .................................................................................................................236
26.8 ARP Inspection VLAN Status ........................................................................................................237
26.9 ARP Inspection Log Status ...........................................................................................................238
26.10 ARP Inspection Configure ...........................................................................................................240
26.10.1 ARP Inspection Port Configure ..........................................................................................241
26.10.2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure .......................................................................................243
26.11 IPv6 Source Guard Overview .....................................................................................................244
26.12 IPv6 Source Binding Status .........................................................................................................244
Table of Contents
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
12
26.13 IPv6 Static Binding Setup ...........................................................................................................245
26.14 IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup ................................................................................................247
26.15 IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup ...................................................................................................248
26.16 IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup .......................................................................................................249
26.17 IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup .......................................................................................................251
26.18 IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup .............................................................................................................252
26.19 Technical Reference ....................................................................................................................253
26.19.1 DHCP Snooping Overview ................................................................................................253
26.19.2 ARP Inspection Overview ..................................................................................................255
Chapter 27
Loop Guard .......................................................................................................................................257
27.1 Loop Guard Overview ..................................................................................................................257
27.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................257
27.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................257
27.2 Loop Guard Setup .........................................................................................................................259
Chapter 28
Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling..............................................................................................................261
28.1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Overview ..........................................................................................261
28.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................261
28.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................261
28.2 Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling ........................................................................................262
Chapter 29
PPPoE................................................................................................................................................265
29.1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Overview ..........................................................................................265
29.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................265
29.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................265
29.2 PPPoE Screen ..............................................................................................................................267
29.3 PPPoE Intermediate Agent ..........................................................................................................268
29.3.1 PPPoE IA Per-Port .............................................................................................................269
29.3.2 PPPoE IA Per-Port Per-VLAN ............................................................................................270
29.3.3 PPPoE IA for VLAN ............................................................................................................271
Chapter 30
Error Disable .....................................................................................................................................273
30.1 Error Disable Overview ................................................................................................................273
30.1.1 CPU Protection Overview ....................................................................................................273
30.1.2 Error-Disable Recovery Overview .......................................................................................273
30.1.3 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................273
30.2 Error Disable Screen .....................................................................................................................274
30.3 Error-Disable Status .....................................................................................................................274
Table of Contents
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
13
30.4 CPU Protection Configuration ......................................................................................................276
30.5 Error-Disable Detect Configuration ..............................................................................................278
30.6 Error-Disable Recovery Configuration .........................................................................................278
Chapter 31
Private VLAN.....................................................................................................................................280
31.1 Private VLAN Overview ................................................................................................................280
31.2 Configuring Private VLAN .............................................................................................................280
Chapter 32
Green Ethernet..................................................................................................................................282
32.1 Green Ethernet Overview .............................................................................................................282
32.2 Configuring Green Ethernet ..........................................................................................................282
Chapter 33
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) ...........................................................................................284
33.1 LLDP Overview .............................................................................................................................284
33.2 LLDP-MED Overview ....................................................................................................................285
33.3 LLDP Screens ...............................................................................................................................286
33.4 LLDP Local Status ........................................................................................................................287
33.4.1 LLDP Local Port Status Detail ............................................................................................288
33.5 LLDP Remote Status ....................................................................................................................291
33.5.1 LLDP Remote Port Status Detail ........................................................................................292
33.6 LLDP Configuration ......................................................................................................................298
33.6.1 LLDP Configuration Basic TLV Setting ...............................................................................300
33.6.2 LLDP Configuration Org-specific TLV Setting .....................................................................301
33.7 LLDP-MED Configuration .............................................................................................................303
33.8 LLDP-MED Network Policy ..........................................................................................................304
33.9 LLDP-MED Location ....................................................................................................................305
Chapter 34
Anti-Arpscan .....................................................................................................................................309
34.1 Anti-Arpscan Overview .................................................................................................................309
34.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................309
34.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................309
34.2 Anti-Arpscan Status ......................................................................................................................310
34.3 Anti-Arpscan Host Status .............................................................................................................310
34.4 Anti-Arpscan Trust Host ............................................................................................................... 311
34.5 Anti-Arpscan Configure ................................................................................................................312
Chapter 35
BPDU Guard.......................................................... ........... .......... ........... ........................... .................315
35.1 BPDU Guard Overview ................................................................................................................315
Table of Contents
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
14
35.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................315
35.2 BPDU Guard Status ......................................................................................................................315
35.3 BPDU Guard Configuration ...........................................................................................................316
Chapter 36
OAM ...................................................................................................................................................318
36.1 OAM Overview .............................................................................................................................318
36.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................318
36.2 OAM Status ...................................................................................................................................318
36.2.1 OAM Details ........................................................................................................................320
36.3 OAM Configuration ........................................................................................................................323
36.4 OAM Remote Loopback ................................................................................................................324
Chapter 37
ZULD ..................................................................................................................................................326
37.1 ZULD Overview ............................................................................................................................326
37.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................326
37.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................326
37.2 ZULD Status ..................................................................................................................................327
37.3 ZULD Configuration .....................................................................................................................328
Chapter 38
Static Route.......................................................................................................................................330
38.1 Static Route Overview .................................................................................................................330
38.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................330
38.2 Static Routing ................................................................................................................................331
38.3 IPv4 Static Route ..........................................................................................................................331
Chapter 39
Differentiated Services.....................................................................................................................333
39.1 Differentiated Services Overview .................................................................................................333
39.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................333
39.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................333
39.2 Activating DiffServ ........................................................................................................................334
39.3 DSCP-to-IEEE 802.1p Priority Settings ......................................................................................335
39.3.1 Configuring DSCP Settings .................................................................................................336
Chapter 40
DHCP..................................................................................................................................................337
40.1 DHCP Overview ............................................................................................................................337
40.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................337
40.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................337
40.2 DHCP Configuration ......................................................................................................................338
Table of Contents
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
15
40.3 DHCPv4 Status ............................................................................................................................338
40.4 DHCPv4 Relay .............................................................................................................................338
40.4.1 DHCPv4 Relay Agent Information .......................................................................................339
40.4.2 DHCPv4 Option 82 Profile ...................................................................................................340
40.4.3 Configuring DHCPv4 Global Relay ......................................................................................341
40.4.4 DHCPv4 Global Relay Port Configure ................................................................................342
40.4.5 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example .......................................................................343
40.4.6 Configuring DHCPv4 VLAN Settings ................................................................................344
40.4.7 DHCPv4 VLAN Port Configure ...........................................................................................345
40.4.8 Example: DHCP Relay for Two VLANs ...............................................................................346
40.5 DHCPv6 Relay ..............................................................................................................................347
Chapter 41
ARP Setup .........................................................................................................................................349
41.1 ARP Overview ..............................................................................................................................349
41.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................349
41.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................349
41.2 ARP Setup ....................................................................................................................................351
41.2.1 ARP Learning .....................................................................................................................351
Chapter 42
Maintenance......................................................................................................................................353
42.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................353
42.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................353
42.2 The Maintenance Screen ............................................................................................................353
42.2.1 Erase Running-Configuration .............................................................................................354
42.2.2 Save Configuration ..............................................................................................................355
42.2.3 Reboot System ....................................................................................................................355
42.3 Firmware Upgrade .....................................................................................................................355
42.4 Restore a Configuration File ......................................................................................................357
42.5 Backup a Configuration File ........................................................................................................357
42.6 Tech-Support ................................................................................................................................358
42.7 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................359
42.7.1 FTP Command Line ............................................................................................................359
42.7.2 Filename Conventions ........................................................................................................360
42.7.3 FTP Command Line Procedure ..........................................................................................360
42.7.4 GUI-based FTP Clients ........................................................................................................361
42.7.5 FTP Restrictions .................................................................................................................361
Chapter 43
Access Control .................................................................................................................................362
43.1 Access Control Overview .............................................................................................................362
43.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................362
Table of Contents
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
16
43.2 The Access Control Main Screen ..................................................................................................362
43.3 Configuring SNMP .....................................................................................................................363
43.3.1 Configuring SNMP Trap Group .........................................................................................364
43.3.2 Enabling/Disabling Sending of SNMP Traps on a Port ........................................................365
43.3.3 Configuring SNMP User ...................................................................................................366
43.4 Setting Up Login Accounts ...........................................................................................................368
43.5 Service Access Control ...............................................................................................................369
43.6 Remote Management ..............................................................................................................370
43.7 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................371
43.7.1 About SNMP .......................................................................................................................372
43.7.2 SSH Overview .....................................................................................................................378
43.7.3 Introduction to HTTPS .........................................................................................................380
Chapter 44
Diagnostic .........................................................................................................................................385
44.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................385
44.2 Diagnostic ....................................................................................................................................385
Chapter 45
System Log .......................................................................................................................................388
45.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................388
45.2 System Log ...................................................................................................................................388
Chapter 46
Syslog Setup.....................................................................................................................................389
46.1 Syslog Overview ...........................................................................................................................389
46.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................389
46.2 Syslog Setup .................................................................................................................................389
Chapter 47
Cluster Management ........................................................................................................................392
47.1 Cluster Management Overview ....................................................................................................392
47.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................393
47.2 Cluster Management Status ..........................................................................................................393
47.3 Clustering Management Configuration ........................................................................................394
47.4 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................396
47.4.1 Cluster Member Switch Management ................................................................................396
Chapter 48
MAC Table .........................................................................................................................................398
48.1 MAC Table Overview ....................................................................................................................398
48.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................398
48.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................398
Table of Contents
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
17
48.2 Viewing the MAC Table ................................................................................................................399
Chapter 49
ARP Table..........................................................................................................................................401
49.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................401
49.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................401
49.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................401
49.2 Viewing the ARP Table ..................................................................................................................401
Chapter 50
Path MTU Table .................................................................................................................................403
50.1 Path MTU Overview ....................................................................................................................403
50.2 Viewing the Path MTU Table .........................................................................................................403
Chapter 51
Configure Clone................................................................................................................................404
51.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................404
51.2 Configure Clone ...........................................................................................................................404
Chapter 52
IPv6 Neighbor Table..........................................................................................................................407
52.1 IPv6 Neighbor Table Overview .....................................................................................................407
52.2 Viewing the IPv6 Neighbor Table ..................................................................................................407
Chapter 53
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................409
53.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................409
53.2 Switch Access and Login ..............................................................................................................410
53.3 Switch Configuration .....................................................................................................................412
Appendix A Customer Support ........................................................................................................413
Appendix B Common Services ........................................................................................................419
Appendix C IPv6 ..............................................................................................................................422
Appendix D Legal Information .........................................................................................................430
Index ..................................................................................................................................................435
18
PART I
User’s Guide
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
19
CHAPTER 1
Getting to Know Your Switch
1.1 Introduction
This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the Switch. The GS2210 Series
consists of the following models:
• GS2210-8
• GS2210-8HP
• GS2210-24
• GS2210-24HP
• GS2210-48
• GS2210-48HP
Referring to PoE model(s) in this Use r 's Guide only applies to GS2210-8HP, GS2210-24HP and
GS2210-48HP.
The Switch is a layer-2 standalone Ethernet switch with additional features suitable for Ethernet.
With its built-in web configurator, including the ZyXEL One Network (ZON) Neighbor Management
feature (Section 7.4 on page 58), viewing, managing and configuring the Switch and its
neighboring devices is easy. The Switch can also be managed via Telnet, any terminal emulator
program on the console port, or third-party SNMP management.
In addition, Z yXEL offers a proprietary software program called Z yXEL One Network (Z ON) Utility, it
is a utility tool that assists you to set up and maintain network devices in a more simple and
efficient way. You can download the ZON Utility at www.zyxel.com and install it on a PC. For more
information on ZON Utility see Section 7.3 on page 57.
The following table describes the port features of the S witch by model.
The following table shows which firmware version supports ZON and Smart Conn ect for each
Switch. The firmware on each Switch is identified by the firmware trunk version, followed by a
unique model code and release number in brackets. For example, 4.10(AASP.0) is a firmware
Table 1 Models and Port Features
SWITCH MODEL PORT FEATURES
GS2210-8 and GS2210-
8HP • 8 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports
• 2 GbE dual personality interfaces
GS2210-24 and GS2210-
24HP • 24 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports
• 4 GbE dual personality interfaces
GS2210-48 and GS2210-
48HP • 44 100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports
• 4 GbE dual personality interfaces
• 2 SFP interfaces
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
20
version for GS2210-8 where 4.10 is the firmware trunk version, AASP identifies the GS2210-8 and
.0 is the first release of trunk version 4.10.
The GS2210-8HP, GS2210-24HP and GS2210-4 8HP come with a Power-over-Ethernet (PoE)
feature. The GS2210-8HP, GS2210-24HP and 48HP supports the IEEE 802.3at High Power over
Ethernet (PoE) standard and IEEE 802.3af PoE standard.
Key feature differences between Switch models are as follows. Other features are common to all
models
The following table describes the PoE features of the Switch by model.
This section shows a few examples of using the Switch in various network environments.
1.1.1 Backbone Application
The Switch is an ideal solution for small networks where rapid growth can be expected in the near
future. The Switch can be used standalone for a group of heavy traffic users. You can connect
computers and servers directly to the Switch’s port or connect other switches to the Switch.
In this example, all computers can share high-speed applications on the server. To expand the
network, simply add more networking devices such as switches, routers, computers, print servers
etc.
Table 2 Models and Port Features
SWITCH MODEL FIRMWARE VERSION
GS2210-8 4.10(AASP.0) and later
GS2210-8HP 4.10(AASQ.0) and later
GS2210-24 4.10(AAND.2) and later
GS2210-24HP 4.10(AANE.2) and later
GS2210-48 4.10(AAHV.2) and later
GS2210-48HP 4.10(AAHW.2) and later
Table 3 Models and PoE Features
SWITCH MODEL POE FEATURES
GS2210-8HP
GS2210-24HP
GS2210-48HP
IEEE 802.3af PoE
IEEE 802.3 at High Power over Ethernet (PoE)
Power management mode - Classification
Power management mode - Consumption
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
21
Figure 1 Backbone Application
1.1.2 Bridging Example
In this example, the Switch connects different company departments (RD and Sales) to the
corporate backbone. It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network
bottlenecks. All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high-speed department servers via
the Switch. You can provide a super-fast uplink connection by using a Gigabit Ethernet/mini-GBIC
port on the Switch.
Moreover, the Switch eases supervision and maintenance by allowing network managers to
centralize multiple servers at a single location.
Figure 2 Bridging Application
1.1.3 High Performance Switching Example
The Switch is ideal for connecting two networks that need high bandwidth. In the following
example, use trunking to connect these two networks.
Switching to higher-speed LANs such as ATM (Asynchronous Transmission Mode) is not feasible for
most people due to the expense of replacing all existing Ethernet cables and adapter cards,
restructuring your network and complex maintenance. The Switch can provide the same bandwidth
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
22
as ATM at much lower cost while still being able to use existing adapters and switches. Moreover,
the current LAN structure can be retained as all ports can freely communicate with each other.
Figure 3 High Performance Switched Workgroup Application
1.1.4 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Application Examples
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a ph ysical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Stations on a logical network belong to one group. A station can belong to more than one
group. With VLAN, a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same
group(s) unless such traffic first goes through a router.
For more information on VLANs, refer to Chapter 9 on page 93.
1.1.4.1 Tag-based VLAN Example
Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increase network
performance through reduced broadcast traffic. VLAN groups can be modified at any time by
adding, moving or changing ports without any re-cabling.
Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server. In the
following figure only ports that need access to the server need to be part of VLAN 1. Ports can
belong to other VLAN groups too.
Figure 4 Shared Server Using VLAN Example
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
23
1.2 Ways to Manage the Switch
Use any of the following methods to manage the Switch.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the Switch using a
(supported) web browser. See Chapter 4 on page 34.
• Command Line Interface. Line commands offer an alternative to the web configurator and in
some cases are necessary to configure advanced features. See the CLI Reference Guide.
• FTP. Use FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore. See Section 42.7.1 on
page 359.
• SNMP. The Switch can be monitored by an SNMP manager. See Section 42.5 on page 357.
• Cluster Management. Cluster Management allows you to manage multiple switches through one
switch, called the cluster manager. See Chapter 46 on page 389.
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Switch
Do the following things regularly to make the Switch more secure and to manage the Switch more
effectively.
• Change the password . Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different
types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier
working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you
forget your password, you will have to reset the Switch to its factory default settings. If you
backed up an earlier configur ation file, you would not have to totally re-configure the S witch. You
could simply restore your last configuration.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
24
CHAPTER 2
Hardware Installation and Connection
2.1 Installation Scenarios
This chapter shows you how to install and connect the Switch.
The Switch can be placed on a desktop or rack-mounted on a standard EIA rack. Use the rubber
feet in a desktop installation and the brackets in a rack-mounted installation.
Note: For proper ventilation, allow at least 4 inches (10 cm) of clearance at the front and
3.4 inches (8 cm) at the back of the Switch. This is espec ial l y important for
enclosed rack installations.
2.2 Desktop Installation Procedure
1Make sure the Switch is clean and dry.
2Set the Switch on a smooth, level surface strong enough to support the weight of the Switch and
the connected cables. Make sure there is a power outlet nearby.
3Make sure there is enough clearance around the Switch to allow air circulation and the attachment
of cables and the power cord.
2.3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
The Switch can be mounted on an EIA standard size, 19-inch rack or in a wiring closet with other
equipment. Follow the steps below to mount your Switch on a standard EIA rack using a rack-
mounting kit.
2.3.1 Rack-mounted Installation Requirements
• Two mounting brackets.
• Eight M3 flat head screws and a #2 Philips screwdriver.
• Four M5 flat head screws and a #2 Philips screwdriver.
Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit.
2.3.1.1 Precautions
• Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
25
• Make sure the position of the Switch does not make the rack unstable or top-heavy. Take all
necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit.
2.3.2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch
1Po sition a mounting bracket on one side of the Switch, lining up the four screw holes on the brack et
with the screw holes on the side of the Switch.
Figure 5 Attaching the Mounting Brackets
2Using a #2 Philips screwdriver, install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes
into the Switch.
3Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the Switch.
4You may now mount the Switch on a rack. Proceed to the next section.
2.3.3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
1Position a mounting bracket (that is already attached to the Switch) on one side of the rack, lining
up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
26
Figure 6 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
2Using a #2 Philips screwdriver, install the M5 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes
into the rack.
3Repeat steps 1 and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
27
CHAPTER 3
Hardware Panels
This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the Switch and shows you how to make the
hardware connections.
3.1 Front Panel
The following figures show the front panels of the Switch.
Figure 7 Front Panel: GS2210-8
Figure 8 Front Panel: GS2210-8HP
Figure 9 Front Panel: GS2210-24
Figure 10 Front Panel: GS2210-24HP
Figure 11 Front Panel: GS2210-48
Figure 12 Front Panel: GS2210-48HP
3.1.1 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
The Switch has 1000Base-T auto-negotiating, auto-crossover Ethernet ports. In 10/100/1000 Mbps
Gigabit, the speed can be 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps and the duplex mode can be half
duplex or full duplex.
Chapter 3 Hardware Panels
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
28
An auto-negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed (10/100/1000
Mbps) and duplex mode (full duplex or half duplex) of the connected device.
An auto-crossover (auto-MDI/MDI - X) port automatically works with a str aight-through or crossover
Ethernet cable.
Four 1000Base-T Ethernet ports are paired with a mini-GBIC slot to create a dual personality
interface. The Switch uses up to one connection for each mini-GBIC and 1000Base-T Ethernet pair.
The mini-GBIC slots have priority over the Gigabit ports. This means that if a mini-GBIC slot and
the corresponding GbE port are connected at the same time, the GbE port will be disabled.
Note: The dual personality ports change to fiber mode directly when inserting the fiber
module.
When auto-negotiation is turned on, an Ethernet port negotiates with the peer automatically to
determine th e con nection spee d and d upl ex mod e. If the peer Ethernet port does not support auto-
negotiation or turns off this feature, the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the
signal on the cable and using half duplex mode. When the Switch’s auto-negotiation is turned off,
an Ethernet port uses the pre-configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection, thus
requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer Ethernet port are the same in order to
connect.
3.1.1.1 Default Ethernet Negotiation Settings
The factory default negotiation settings for the Gigabit ports on the Switch are:
• Speed: Auto
•Duplex: Auto
• Flow control: Off
• Link Aggregation: Disabled
3.1.1.2 Auto-crossover
All ports are auto-crossover, that is auto-MDIX ports (Media Dependent Interface Crossover), so
you may use either a straight -through Ethernet cable or crossover Ethernet cable for all Gigabit port
connections. Auto-crossover ports automatically sense whether they need to function as crossover
or straight ports, so crossover cables can connect both computers and switches/hubs.
3.1.2 Mini-GBIC Slots
These are slots for mini-GBIC (Gigabit Interface Converter) transceivers. A transceiver is a single
unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver. The Switch does not come with transceivers. You
must use transceivers that comply with the Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) Transceiver
MultiSource Agreement (MSA). See the SFF committee’ s INF-8074i specification Rev 1.0 for details.
You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating. You can use different transceivers to
connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber-optic or even copper cable connectors.
To avoid possible eye injury, do not look into an operating fiber-optic
module’s connectors.
Chapter 3 Hardware Panels
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
29
• Type: SFP connection interface
• Connection speed: 1 Gigabit per second (Gbps)
3.1.2.1 Transceiver Installation
Use the following steps to install a mini-GBIC transceiver (SFP module).
1Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down.
2Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place.
3The Switch automatically detects the installed transceiver. Check the LEDs to verify that it is
functioning properly.
4Close the transceiver’s latch (latch styles v ary).
5Connect the fiber optic cables to the transceiver.
Figure 13 Transceiver Installation Example
Figure 14 Connecting the Fiber Optic Cables
3.1.2.2 Transceiver Removal
Use the following steps to remove a mini-GBIC transceiver (SFP module).
1Remove the fiber optic cables from the transceiver.
2Open the transceiver’s latch (latch styles vary).
3Pull the transceiver out of the slot.
Figure 15 Removing the Fiber Optic Cables
Chapter 3 Hardware Panels
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
30
Figure 16 Opening the Transceiver’s Latch Example
Figure 17 Transceiver Removal Example
3.1.3 LED Mode (only available for GS2210-48HP)
After you push this button (see Section Figure 12 on page 27) to active PoE on the Switch, view the
LEDs to ensure proper functioning of the Switch and as an aid in troubleshooting (see Section 3.3
on page 31).
3.2 Rear Panel
The following figures show the rear panels of the Switch.
Figure 18 Rear Panel: GS2210-8
Figure 19 Rear Panel: GS2210-8HP
Figure 20 Rear Panel: GS2210-24
Figure 21 Rear Panel: GS2210-24HP
Figure 22 Rear Panel: GS2210-48
Chapter 3 Hardware Panels
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
31
Figure 23 Rear Panel: GS2210-48HP
3.2.1 Console Port
For local management, y ou can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the
following parameters:
• VT100
• Terminal emulation
• 9600 bps
• No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
• No flow control
Connect the male 9-pin end of the console cable to the console port of the Switch. Connect the
female end to a serial port (COM1, COM2 or other COM port) of your computer.
3.2.2 Power Connector
Note: Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel.
To connect power to the Switch, insert the female end of the power cord to the AC power receptacle
on the rear panel. Connect the other end of the supplied power cord to a power outlet. Make sure
that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans (located on the side of the unit).
See Chapter 53 on page 409 for information on the Switch’s power supply requirements.
3.3 LEDs
After you connect the power to the Switch, view the LEDs to ensure proper functioning of the
Switch and as an aid in troubleshooting.
Table 4 LED Descriptions
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
PoE
(GS2210 48HP
only)
Green On Each Ethe rnet port’ s LED i s changed to act as a P oE LED by using the LED
MODE button on the front panel.
Off Each Ethernet port’s LED is changed back to act as a LNK/ACT LED by
releasi ng the LED MODE button on the front panel.
PWR Green On The system is turn ed on.
Off The system is off or has failed.
SYS Green On The system is on and funct ioni ng properly.
Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self-diagnostic tes ts.
Off The power is off or the system is not ready/malfunctioning.
Chapter 3 Hardware Panels
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
32
ALM Red On A hardware failure is detected.
Off The system is functioning normally.
LOCATOR Blue Blinking Shows the actual l ocation of the S witch between sev era l devices in a r ack.
Ethernet Ports and PoE
1-8 (GS2210-8/
8HP)
1-24 (GS2210-
24/24HP) and
1-48 (GS2210-
48/48HP)
LNK/ACT
Green Blinking The system is transmitting/receiving to/from a 10 Mbps or a 1000 Mbps
Ethernet network.
On The link to a 10 Mbps or a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
Amber Blinking The system is transmitting/receiving to/from a 100 Mbps Ethernet
network.
On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
Off The link to an Ethernet network is down.
PoE
(GS2210-8HP,
GS2210-24HP
and GS2210-
48HP only)
Green On Power supplied to all PoE Ethernet ports meets the IEEE 802.3at
standard.
Amber On Power supplied to all P oE Ethernet ports meets the IEEE 802.3af standard.
Off There is no power supplied.
Mini-GB I C Slots
9-10 (GS2210-
8/8HP0
25-28
(GS2210-24/
24HP)
45-50
(GS2210-48/
48HP)
SFP
Green On The uplink port is linking at 1000 Mbps.
Blinking The system activity is transmitting/receiving data 1000 Mbps.
Amber On The uplink port is linking at 100 Mbps.
Blinking The system activity is transmitting/receiving data 100 Mbps.
Off There is no link or port, the uplink port is shut down.
Table 4 LED Descriptions (continued)
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
33
PART II
Technical Reference
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
34
CHAPTER 4
The Web Configurator
4.1 Overview
This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator.
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy Switch setup and
management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 9.0 and later versions, Mozilla Firefox 21
and later versions, Safari 6.0 and later versions or Google Chrome 26.0 and later versions. The
recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default i n
Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Jav a pe rmission s (en a bled by default).
4.2 System Login
1Start your web browser.
2Type “http://” and the IP address of the Switch (for example, the default management IP address is
192.168.1.1) in the Location or Address field. Press [ENTER]. Y our computer must be in the same
subnet in order to access this website address.
3The login screen appears. The default username is admin and associated default password is
1234. The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually
entered a time and date in the General Setup screen.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
35
Figure 24 Web Configurator: Login
4Click OK to view the first web configurator screen.
4.3 The Status Screen
The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator.
This guide uses PoE model(s) screens as an example. The screens may very slightly for different
models.
The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen.
Figure 25 Web Configurator Home Screen for PoE model(s) (Status)
A - Click the menu items to open submenu links, and then click on a submenu link to open the
screen in the main window.
B, C, D, E, F - These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which
screen you are currently working in.
A
B
G
CD E F
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
36
B - Click this link to update the information in the screen you are viewing currently.
C - Click this link to save your configuration into the Switch’s nonvolatile memory. Nonvolatile
memory is the configur ation of your Switch that stays the same even if the S witch’s power is turned
off.
D - Click this link to go to the status page of the Switch.
E - Click this link to log out of the web configurator.
F - Click this link to display web help pages. The help pages provide descriptions for all of the
configuration screens.
G - Click this link to go to the ZON Neighbor Management screen where y ou can see and man age
neighbor devices learned by the Switch.
In the navigation panel, click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links.
Table 5 Navigation Panel Sub-links Overview
BASIC SETTING ADVANCED APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
37
The following table describes the links in the navigation panel.
Table 6 Navigation Panel Links
LINK DESCRIPTION
Basic Settings
System Info This link takes you to a screen that displays general system inf ormation.
General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information
about the Switch .
Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global Switch parameters such as
VLAN type, GARP and priority queues.
IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP address and subnet ma sk
(necessary for Switch management) and set up to 64 IP routing domains.
Port Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure settings for individual Switch ports.
PoE Setup For PoE model(s).
This link takes you to a screen where you can set priorities, PoE power-up settings and
schedule so that the Switch is able to reserve and allocate power to certain PDs.
Interface Setup This link takes you to a screen where you ca n configure settings for individual interface
type and ID.
IPv6 This link takes you to a screen where you can view IPv6 status and configure IPv6 settings.
DNS This link takes you to a screen where you can configure DNS (domain name server) IP
addresses.
Advanced Application
VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port-based or 802.1Q VLAN
(depending on what you configur ed in the Switch Setup menu). You can also configure a
protocol based VLAN or a subnet based VLAN in these screens.
Static MAC
Forwarding This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static MAC addresses for a port.
These static MAC addresses do not age out.
Static Multicast
Forwarding This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static multicast MAC addresses for
port(s). These static multicast MAC addresses do not age out.
Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules.
Spanning Tree
Protocol This link takes you to screens where you can configure the RSTP/MRSTP/MSTP to prevent
network loops.
Bandwidth
Control This link takes you to a screen where you can configure bandwidth limits on the Switch.
Broadcast Storm
Control This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters.
Mirroring This link tak es yo u to sc reens where y ou ca n copy traffi c from one port or ports to another
port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference.
Link Aggregation This link takes you to screens where you can logically aggregate physical links to form one
logical, higher-bandwidth link.
Port
Authentication This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IEEE 802.1x port authentication for
clients com municating via the Switch.
Port Security This link takes you to screens where you can activate MAC address learning and set the
maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port.
Time Range This link takes you to a screen where you can define different schedules.
Classifier This link takes you to screens where you can configure the Switch to group packets based
on the specified criteria.
Policy Rule This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to perform special
treatment on the grouped packets.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
38
Queuing Method This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with asso ciated queue
weights for each port.
Multicast This link takes you to screens where you can configure various multicast features, IGMP
snooping, MLD snooping-proxy and create multicast VLANs.
AAA This link takes you to a screen where you can configure authentication, authorization and
accounting services via external servers. The external servers can be either RADIUS
(Re mot e A u th entication Dial- I n Us er Servic e ) or TACACS+ (Terminal Access Controller
Access-Control System Plus).
IP Source Guard This link takes you to screens where you can configure fil ter in g of unauthorized DHCP and
ARP packets in your network.
Loop Guard This link takes you to a screen where you can configure protection against network loops
that occur on the edge of your network.
Layer 2 Protocol
Tunneling This link t a kes you to a screen where you can configure L2PT (Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling)
settings on th e Switch.
PPPoE This link takes you to screens where you can configure intermediate agent settings in port,
VLAN, and PPPoE.
Errdisable This link takes you to screens where you can view errdisable status and configure
errdisable settings in CPU protection, errdisable detect, and errdisable recovery.
Private VLAN This link takes you to a screen where you can configure private VLANs.
Green Ethernet This link takes you to a screen where you can configure green Ethernet settings in EEE,
auto power down, and short reach for each port.
LLDP This link takes you to screens where you can configure LLDP settings.
Anti-Arpscan This link takes you to screens where you can enable anti-arpscan on the Switch and ports,
and view the port state. Y ou can also create trusted hosts, view blocked hosts and unblock
them.
BPDU Guard This link takes you to screens where you can enable BPDU guard on the Switch and ports,
and view the port state
OAM This link takes you to screens where you can enable Ethernet OAM on the Switch, view the
configuration of ports on which Ethernet OAM is enabled and perform remote-loopback
tests.
ZULD This link takes you to screens where you can enable ZULD on a port and configure related
settigns.
IP Application
Static Routing This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IPv4 static routes. A static route
defines how the Switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP/IP parameters
manually.
DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ, configure marking rules and
set DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p mappings.
DHCP This link takes you to screens where you can configure the DHCP settings.
ARP Setup This link takes you to screens where you can configure the ARP learning settings for each
port.
Management
Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file
maintenance as well as reboot the system.
Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and
configure SNMP and remote manageme nt.
Diagnostic This link takes you to a screen where you can ping IP addresse s, run traceroute, test
port(s) and show the Switch’s location.
System Log This link takes you to a screen where you ca n view system logs.
Table 6 Navigation Panel Links (continued)
LINK DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
39
4.3.1 Change Your Password
After you log in for the first time, it is recommended you change the default administrator
password. Click Management > Access Control > Logins to display the next screen.
Figure 26 Change Administrator Login Password
4.4 Saving Your Configuration
When you are done modifying the settings in a screen, click Apply to save your changes back to
the run-time memory. Settings in the run-time memory are lost w hen th e S wi tch’s power is turned
off.
Syslog Setup T his link takes you to a screen where you can setup syst em logs and a system log server.
Cluster
Management This link tak es you to s creens where y ou can config ure clustering management and view its
status.
MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses (and types) of
devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs.
ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses – IP address
resolution table.
Path MTU Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the path MTU aging time, index,
destination address, MTU, and expire settings.
Configure Clone This link takes you to a screen where you can copy attributes of one port to other ports.
IPv6 Neighbor
Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the IPv6 neighbor table which includes
index, interface, neighbor address, MAC address, status and type.
Port Status This link takes you to a screen where you can view the port statistics.
Table 6 Navigation Panel Links (continued)
LINK DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
40
Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your
configuration to nonvolatile memory. Nonvolatile memory refers to the Switch’s storage that
remains even if the Switch’s power is turned off .
Note: Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session.
4.5 Switch Lockout
You could block yourself (and all others) from managing the Switch if you do one of the following:
1Delete the management VLAN (default is VLAN 1).
2Delete all port-based VLANs with the CPU port as a member. The “CPU port” is the management
port of the Switch.
3Filter all traffic to the CPU port.
4Disable all ports.
5Misconfigure the text configuration file.
6F orge t the passw ord and/or IP address.
7Prevent all services from accessing the Switch.
8Change a service port number but forget it.
Note: Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the Switch.
4.6 Resetting the Switch
If you lock yourself (and others) from the Switch or forget the administrator password, you will
need to reload the factory -def ault configur ation file or reset the S w itch back to the factory defaults.
4.6.1 Reload the Configuration File
Uploading the factory-default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the
factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the
speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600 bps with 8 data bits, no parity, one
stop bit and flow control set to none. The password will also be reset to “1234” and the IP address
to 192.168.1.1.
To upload the configuration file, do the following:
1Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software.
2Disconnect and reconnect the Switch’s power to begin a session. When you reconnect the Switch’s
power, you will see the initial screen.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
41
3When you see the message “Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds...” press
any key to enter debug mode.
4Type atlc after the “Enter Debug Mode” message.
5Wait for the “Starting XMODEM upload” message before activating XMODEM upload on your
terminal.
6After a configuration file upload, type atgo to restart the Switch.
The Switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of
“1234”.
4.7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator
Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator. You have to log in with your password again
after you log out. This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons.
Figure 27 Web Configurator: Logout Screen
4.8 Help
The web configurator’s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary
information.
Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
42
CHAPTER 5
Initial Setup Example
5.1 Overview
This chapter shows how to set up the Switch for an example network.
The following lists the configuration steps for the initial setup:
• Create a VLAN
• Set port VLAN ID
• Configure the Switch IP management address
5.1.1 Creating a VLAN
VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port(s) belongs. You can do this
with port-based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members.
In this example, you want to configure port 1 as a member of VLAN 2.
Figure 28 Initial Setup Network Example: VLAN
1Click Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration in the navigation panel and click the
Static VLAN Setup link.
Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
43
2In the Static VLAN screen, select ACTIVE, enter
a descriptive name in the Name field and enter 2
in the VLAN Group ID field for the VLAN2
network.
Note: The VLAN Group ID field in this screen and the VID field in the IP Setup screen
refer to the same VLAN ID.
3Since the VLAN2 network is connected to port 1 on the Switch, select Fixed to configure port 1 to
be a permanent member of the VLAN only.
4To ensure that VLAN-unaware devices (such as computers and hubs) can receive frames properly,
clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending.
5Click Add to save the settings to the run-time memory. Settings in the run-time memory are lost
when the Switch’s power is turned off.
5.1.2 Setting Port VID
Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are
forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines.
In the example netw ork, conf igure 2 as the port VID on port 1 so that any untagged frames
received on that port get sent to VLAN 2.
Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
44
Figure 29 Initial Setup Network Example: Port VID
1Click Advanced Applications > VLAN >
VLAN Configuration in the navigation
panel. Then click the VLAN Port Setup link.
2Enter 2 in the PVID field for port 2 and click
Apply to save your changes back to the run-
time memory. Settings in the run-time
memory are lost when the Switch’s power is
turned off.
5.2 Configuring Switch Management IP Address
The default management IP address of the Switch is 192.168.1.1. You can configure another IP
address in a different subnet for management purposes. The following figure shows an example.
Figure 30 Initial Setup Example: Management IP Address
Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
45
1Connect your computer to any Ethernet port on the Switch. Mak e sure your computer is in the same
subnet as the Switch.
2Open your web browser and enter 192.168.1.1 (the default IP address) in the address bar to access
the web configurator. See Section 4.2 on page 34 for more information.
3Click Basic Setting > IP Setup in the
navigation panel.
4Configure the related fields in the IP Setup
screen.
5For the VLAN2 network, enter 192.168.2.1 as
the IP address and 255.255.25 5.0 as the
subnet mask.
6In the VID field, enter the ID of the VLAN group
to which you want this management IP address
to belong. This is the same as the VLAN ID you
configure in the Static VLAN screen.
7Click Add to sav e your changes back to the run-
time memory. Settings in the run-time memory
are lost when the Switch’s power is turned off.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
46
CHAPTER 6
Tutorials
6.1 Overview
This chapter provides some examples of using the web configurator to set up and use the Switch.
The tutorials include:
•How to Use DHCPv4 Snooping on the Switch
•How to Use DHCPv4 Relay on the Switch
6.2 How to Use DHCPv4 Snooping on the Switch
You only want DHCP server A connected to port 5 to assign IP addresses to all devices in VLAN
network (V). Create a VLAN containing ports 5, 6 and 7. Connect a computer M to the Switch for
management.
Figure 31 Tutorial: DHCP Snooping Tutorial Overview
Note: For related inform at ion about DHCP snoopi ng, see Section 26.1 on page 222.
The settings in this tutorial are as the following.
1Access the Switch through http://192.168.1.1 by default. Log into the Switch by entering the
username (default: admin) and password (default: 1234).
Table 7 Tutorial: Settings in this Tutorial
HOST PORT CONNECTED VLAN PVID DHCP SNOOPING PORT TRUSTED
DHCP Server (A) 5 1 and 100 100 Yes
DHCP Client (B) 6 1 and 100 100 No
DHCP Client (C) 7 1 and 100 100 No
V
A
B
M
C
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
47
2Go to Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup, and create
a VLAN with ID of 100. Add ports 5, 6 and 7 in the VLAN by selecting Fixed in the Control field as
shown.
Deselect Tx Tagging because you don’t want outgoing traffic to contain this VLAN tag.
Click Add.
Figure 32 Tutorial: Create a VLAN and Add Ports to It
3Go to Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > VLAN Port Setup, and set the
PVID of the ports 5, 6 and 7 to 100. This tags untagged incoming frames on ports 5, 6 and 7 with
the tag 100.
Figure 33 Tutorial: Tag Untagged Frames
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
48
4Go to Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP
Snooping > Configure, activate and specify VLAN 100 as the DHCP VLAN as shown. Click Apply.
Figure 34 Tutorial: Specify DHCP VLAN
5Click the Port link at the top right corner.
6The DHCP Snooping Port Configure screen appears. Select Trusted in the Server Trusted
state field for port 5 because the DHCP server is connected to port 5. Keep ports 6 and 7
Untrusted because they are conne cted to DHCP clients. Click Apply.
Figure 35 Tutorial: Set the DHCP Server Port to Trusted
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
49
7Go to Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP
Snooping > Configure > VLAN, show VLAN 100 by entering 100 in the Start VID and End VID
fields and click Apply. Then select Yes in the Enabled field of the VLAN 100 entry shown at the
bottom section of the screen.
If you want to add more information in the DHCP request packets such as source VLAN ID or
system name, you can also select an Option82 Profile in the entry . See Section 26.19.1.3 on page
254.
Figure 36 Tutorial: Enable DHCP Snooping on this VLAN
8Click Save at the top right corner of the web configurator to
save the configuration permanently.
9Connect your DHCP server to port 5 and a computer (as DHCP client) to either port 6 or 7. The
computer should be able to get an IP address from the DHCP server. If you put the DHCP server on
port 6 or 7, the computer will not able to get an IP address.
10 To check if DHCP snooping works, go to Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4
Source Guard Setup, you should see an IP assignment with the type DHCP-Snooping as shown.
Figure 37 Tutorial: Check the Binding If DHCP Snooping Works
You can also telnet or log into the Switch’s console. Use the command “show dhcp snooping
binding” to see the DHCP snooping binding table as shown next.
6.3 How to Use DHCPv4 Relay on the Switch
This tutorial describes how to configure your Switch to forward DHCP client requests to a specific
DHCP server. The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the information in the
DHCP requests.
sysname# show dhcp snooping binding
MacAddress IpAddress Lease Type VLAN Port
----------------- --------------- ------------ ------------- ---- -----
00:02:00:00:00:1c 10.10.1.16 6d23h59m20s dhcp-snooping 100 7
Total number of bindings: 1
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
50
6.3.1 DHCP Relay Tutorial Introduction
In this example, you have configured your DHCP server (192.168.2.3) and want to have it assign a
specific IP address (say 172.16.1.18) to DHCP client A based on the system name, VLAN ID and
port number in the DHCP request. Client A connects to the Switch’s port 2 in VLAN 102.
Figure 38 Tutorial: DHCP Relay Scenario
6.3.2 Creating a VLAN
Follow the steps below to configure port 2 as a member of VLAN 10 2.
1Access the web configurator through the Switch’ s management port.
2Go to Basic Setting > Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802.1Q. Click Apply to save the
settings to the run-time memory.
VLAN 102
DHCP Server Port 2
PVID=102
172.16.1.18
A
192.168.2.3
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
51
Figure 39 Tutorial: Set VLAN Type to 802.1Q
3Click Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup.
4In the Static VLAN screen, select ACTIVE, enter a descriptiv e na me (VLAN 10 2 for examp l e) in
the Name field and enter 102 in the VLAN Group ID field.
5Select Fixed to configure port 2 to be a permanent member of this VLAN.
6Clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending.
7Click Add to save the settings to the run-time memory. Settings in the run-time memory are lost
when the Switch’s power is turned off.
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
52
Figure 40 Tutorial: Create a Static VLAN
8Click the VLAN Configuration link in the Static VLAN Setup screen and then the VLAN Port
Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen.
Figure 41 Tutorial: Click the VLAN Port Setting Link
9Enter 102 in the PVID field for port 2 to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that
port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines.
10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run-time memory.
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
53
Figure 42 Tutorial: Add Tag for Frames Received on Port 2
11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration
permanently.
6.3.3 Configuring DHCPv4 Relay
Follow the steps below to enable DHCP relay on the Switch and allow the Switch to add relay agent
information (such as the VLAN ID) to DHCP requests.
1Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 and then the Global link to open the DHCP Relay
screen.
2Select the Active check box.
3Enter the DHCP server’s IP address (192.168.2.3 in this example) in the Remote DHCP Server 1
field.
4Select default1 or default2 in the Option 82 Profile field.
5Click Apply to save your changes back to the run-time memory.
Chapter 6 Tutorials
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
54
Figure 43 Tutorial: Set DHCP Server and Relay Information
6Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration
permanently.
7The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the DHCP request.
6.3.4 Troubleshooting
Check the client A’s IP address. If it did not receive the IP address 172.16.1.18, make sure:
1Client A is connected to the Switch’s port 2 in VLAN 102.
2You configured the correct VLAN ID, port number and system name for DHCP relay on both the
DHCP server and the Switch.
3You clicked the Save link on the Switch to have your settings take effect.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
55
CHAPTER 7
Status and ZON
7.1 Overview
This chapter describes the screens for System St atus, ZON Utility, ZON Neighbor Management, Port
Status, and Port Details.
7.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the Status screen (Section 7.2 on page 55) to see the Switch’s general device information,
system status, and IP addresses. You can also display other status screens for more information.
•Use the ZON Utility screen (Section 7.3 on page 57) to deploy and manage network device s.
•Use the Neighbor screen (Section 7.4 on page 58) to view and manage Switch’s neighbor
devices.
•Use the Port Status Summary screen (Sec t ion 7.5 on page 59) to view the port statistics.
•Use the Port Details screen (Section 7.5.1 on page 61) to display individual port statistics.
7.2 Status
The Status screen displays when you log into the Switch or click Status at the top right corner of
the web configurator. The Status screen displays general device information, system status, and its
IP addresses.
Chapter 7 Status and ZON
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
56
Figure 44 Status (for PoE model(s))
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 8 Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Device Information
Device Type This field displays the model name of this Switch.
System Name This field displays the name used to identify the Switch on any network.
Boot Version This field displays the version number and date of the boot module that is currently on the
Switch.
System
Location This field displays the geogr aphic location of your Switch. You can change the setting in the
Basic Setting > General Setup sc ree n .
Firmware
Version This field displays the version number and date of the firmware the Switch is currently
running.
System Time This field displays the current date and time in the UAG. The format is mm-dd-yyyy
hh:mm:ss.
Serial Number This field displays the serial number of this Switch. The serial number is used for device
tracking and control.
System Up
Time This field displays how long the Switch has been running since it last restarted or was turned
on.
MAC Address This field displays the MAC addresses of the Switch.
Login Timeout This field displays how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the
session ti mes out. After it tim es out you have to log in with your password again.
Detail Click this link to go to the Basic Setting > System Info screen to check other detai led
information, such as system resource usage and the Switch temperature, fan speeds or
voltage.
IP Address Information
Chapter 7 Status and ZON
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
57
7.3 ZyXEL One Network (ZON) Utility Screen
ZON Utility is a program designed to help you deploy and manage a network more efficiently. It
detects devices automatically and allows you to do basic settings on devices in the network without
having to be near it.
The ZON Utility issues requests via ZyXEL Discovery Protocol (ZDP) and in response to the query,
the device responds back with basic information including IP address, firmware version, location,
system and model name in the same broadcast domain. The information is then displayed in the
ZON Utility screen and you can perform tasks like basic configuration of the devices and batch
firmware upgrade in it. You can download the ZON Utility at www.zyxel.com and install it on a PC.
The following figure shows the ZON Utility screen.
IPv4 Address This field displays the Switch’s current IPv4 address.
Subnet Mask This field displays the Switch’s subnet mask.
Default
Gateway This field displays the IP address of the Switch’s default gateway.
IP Setup Click the link to go to the Basic Setting > IP Setup screen.
IPV6 Global
Unicast Address This field displays the Switch’s IPv6 global unicast address
IPV6 Lin k-Local
Address This field displays the Switch’s IPv6 link-local address.
IPv6
configuration Click the link to go to the Basic Setting > IPv6 screen.
Device Status
and Quick
Configuration
This section shows whether a feature is enabled or not on the Switch. You can click a
feature’s Setting link to go to the configuration screen for the feature.
Hover your cursor over a red exclamation mark to display information about the feature.
Quick Links This section provides the shortcut link to a specific cofiguration screen.
Table 8 Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Status and ZON
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
58
Figure 45 ZON Utility Screen
7.4 ZON Neighbor Management Screen
The ZON neighbor management screen allows you to view and manage the Switch’s neighboring
devices more conveniently. It uses Layer Link Discovery Protocol (LLDP) to discover all neighbor
devices connected to the Switch including non-ZyXEL devices. You can perform tasks on the
neighboring devices like login, reboot (turn the power off and then back on again), and reset to
factory default settings in the Neighbor Management screen. For more information on LLDP, see
(Section 33.1 on page 284).
Click Status > Neighbor to see the following screen.
Figure 46 Status > Neighbor
Chapter 7 Status and ZON
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
59
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
7.5 Port Status
This screen displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details. To
view the port statistics, click Status in all web configurator screens and then the Port Status link
Table 9 Status > Neighbor
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Local
Port This shows the port of the Switch, on which the neighboring device is discovered.
Desc. This shows the port description of the Switch.
PoE Draw This shows the consumption that the neighboring device connected to this port dr aws
from the Switch. This allows you to plan and use within the power budget of the
Switch.
Remote
Port This show the number of the neighbor device’s port which is connected to the Switch.
Desc. Th is shows the description of the nei g hbor device’s port which is connected to the
Switch.
Model This shows the model name of the neighbor device. This field will show “-” for non-
ZyXEL devices.
System Name This shows the system name of the neighbor device.
Location This shows the geographic location of the neighbor device.
Firmware This shows the firmware version of the neighbor device. This field will show “-” for
non-ZyXEL devices.
IP This shows the IP address of the neighbor device. The IP address is a hyper link that
you can click to log into and manage the neighbor device through its web
configurator. This field will show “-” for non-ZyXEL devices.
MAC This shows the MAC address of the neighbor device. This field will show “-” for non-
ZyXEL devices.
PWR Cycle Click the Cycle button to turn OFF the power of the neighbor device and turn it back
ON again. A count down button (from 5 to 0) starts.
Note:
• The Switch must support power sourcing (PSE) or the network device is a
powered device (PD).
• If multiple neighbor devices use the same port, the Cycle button is displayed only
on the first device, others will show “-” in stead.
Reset to Default Click the Reset button to reset the neighbor device to its factory default settings. A
warning message “Are you sure you want to load factory default?” appears
prompting you to confirm the action. After confirming the action a count down button
(from 5 to 0) starts.
Note:
• The Switch must support power sourcing (PSE) or the network device is a
powered device (PD).
• If multiple neighbo r device s use th e same port, the Reset button is not available
and will show “-” instead.
• You can only reset ZyXEL products.
Chapter 7 Status and ZON
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
60
in the Quick Links section of the Status screen to display the Port Status screen as shown next.
You can also click Management > Port Status to see the following screen.
Figure 47 Port Status (for PoE model(s))
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 10 Port Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This identifies the Ethernet port. Click a port number to display the Port Details screen
(refer to Figure 48 on page 61).
Name Th is is the name you assigned to this port in the Basic Setting > Port Setup screen.
Link This field displays the speed (either 10M for 10Mbps, 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for
1000Mbps) and the duplex (F for full duplex or H for half). It also shows the cable type
(Copper or Fiber) for the combo ports.
State If STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) is enabled, this field displays the STP state of the port. See
Section 13.1 on page 121 for more information.
If STP is disabled, this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up, otherwise, it displays
STOP.
PD For PoE model(s) only.
This field displays whether or not a powered device (PD) is allowed to receive power from
the Switch on this port.
LACP This fields displays whether LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) has been enabled on
the port.
TxPkts This field sh ows the number of transmitted frames on this port.
RxPkts This field sh ows the number of received frames on this port.
Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port.
Tx KB/s This field sh ows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port.
Chapter 7 Status and ZON
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
61
7.5.1 Port Details
Click a number in the Port column in the Port Status screen to display individual port statistics.
Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the
Switch.
Figure 48 Port Status > Port Details
Rx KB/s Th is field shows th e number of kilobytes per second received on this port.
Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours, minutes and seconds the port has been
up.
Clear Counter Select Port, enter a port number and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded
statistical information for that port, or select Any to clear statistics for all ports.
Ta ble 10 Port Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Status and ZON
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
62
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 11 Port Status: Port Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Info
Port NO. This field displays the port number you are viewing.
Name This field displays the name of the port.
Link This field displays the speed (either 10M for 10Mbps, 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for
1000Mbps) and the duplex (F for full duplex or H for half duplex). It also shows the cable type
(Copper or Fiber) for the combo ports.
Status If STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) is enabled, this field disp lays the STP state of the port. See
Section 13.1 on page 121 for more information.
If STP is disabled, this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up, otherwise, it displays
STOP.
LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not.
TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port
RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port
Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port.
Tx KB/s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port.
Rx KB/s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port.
Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up.
Tx Packet
The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted.
Unicast This field shows the number of good unicast packets transmitted.
Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted.
Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted.
Pause This field shows the number of 802.3x Pause packets transmitted.
Rx Packet
The following fields display detailed information about packets received.
Unicast This field shows the number of good unicast packets received.
Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received.
Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received.
Pause This field shows the number of 802.3x Pause packets received.
TX Collision
The following fields display information o n collisions while transmitting.
Single This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by
exactly one collision.
Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by
more than one collision.
Excessive This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions. Excessive
collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is
reset.
Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected, that is, after 512 bits of the packets
have already been transmitted.
Error Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in error.
RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC (Cyclic Redundant Check) error(s).
Chapter 7 Status and ZON
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
63
Length This field shows the number of packets received with a length that was out of range.
Runt This field shows the n umber of pac ket s receiv ed that were too sh ort (short er than 64 octets) ,
including the ones with CRC errors.
Distribution
64 This field sh ows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets
in length.
65-127 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
65 and 127 octets in length.
128-255 This field shows the n umber of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
128 and 255 octets in length.
256-511 This field shows the n umber of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
256 and 511 octets in length.
512-1023 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
512 and 1023 octets in length.
1024-
1518 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
1024 and 1518 octets in length.
Giant This field shows t he number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
1519 octets and the maximum frame size.
The maximum frame size varies depending on your switch model.
Table 11 Port Status: Port Details (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
64
CHAPTER 8
Basic Setting
8.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to configure the System Info, General Setup, Switch Setup, IP
Setup, Port Setup, PoE, Interface Setup and IPv6 screens.
8.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the System Info screen (Section 8.2 on page 64) to check the firmware version number.
•Use the General Setup screen (Section 8.3 on page 66) to configure general settings such as
the system name and time.
•Use the Switch Setup screen (Section 8.5 on pag e 69) to choose y our VLAN type, set the GARP
timers and assign priorities to queues.
•Use the IP Setup screen (Section 8.6 on page 70) to configure the Switch IP address, default
gateway device, and the management VLAN ID.
•Use the Port Setup screen (Section 8.7 on page 72) to configure Switch port settings.
•Use the PoE Status screens (Section 8.8 on pag e 74) to view the current amount of power that
PDs are receiving from the Switch and set the priority levels for the Switch in distributing power
to PDs. This screen is available for PoE model(s) only.
•Use the Interface Setup screens (Section 8.9 on page 79) to configure Switch interface type
and interface ID settings.
•Use the IPv6 screens (Section 8.10 on page 80) to view IPv6 status and IPv6 configuration.
•Use the DNS screen (Section 8.11 on page 92) to configure the default domain name server.
8.2 System Information
In the navigation panel, click Basic Setting > System Info to display the screen as shown. Use
this screen to view general system information. You can check the firmware version number.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
65
Figure 49 Basic Setting > System Info (for PoE model(s) only)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 12 Basic Setting > System Info
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification purposes.
Product Model This field displays the product model of the Switch. Use this infor mation when searching for
firmware upgrade or looking for other support information in the website.
ZyNOS F/W
Version This field displays the version number of the Switch 's current firmware including the date
created.
Ethernet
Address This field refers to the Ethernet MAC (Media Access Control) address of the Switch.
CPU Utilization CPU utilization quantifies how busy the system is. Current (%) displays the current
percentage of CPU utilization.
Memory
Utilization Memory utilization shows how much DRAM memory is available and in use. It also displays
the current percentage of memory utilization.
Hardware Monitor
Temperature
Unit The Switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the
temperature rises above the threshold. Y ou may choose the temperature unit (Centigrade or
Fa hrenheit) in this field.
Temperature BOARD, MAC and PHY refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the Switch
printed circuit board.
Current This shows the current temperature at this sensor.
MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor.
MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
66
8.3 General Setup
Use this screen to configure general settings such as the system name and time. Click Basic
Setting > General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor.
Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above.
Fan Speed
(RPM) A properly functioning fan is an es sential component (along with a sufficiently ventilated,
cool oper ating environmen t) in order for the device to stay within the te mperature thre shold.
Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed fa lls below
the threshold shown.
Current This field displays this fan's current speed in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
MAX This field displays this fan's maxim um speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
MIN This field displays this fan's minimum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
"<41" is displayed for speeds too small to measure (under 2000 RPM).
Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work.
Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning abo ve th e minimum speed. Error indicates that
this fan is functi oning below the minimum speed.
Voltage(V) The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if
the voltage fall s out of the tol erance range.
Current This is the current voltage reading.
MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point.
MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point.
Threshold This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the Switch still works.
Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point;
otherwise Error is displayed.
Ta ble 12 Basic Setting > System Info (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
67
Figure 50 Basic Setting > General Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 13 Basic Setting > General Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes. This name consists of up to 64
printable characters; spaces are allowed.
Location Enter the geographic location of your Switch. You can use up to 32 printable ASCII
characters; spaces are allowed.
Contact Person's
Name Enter the name of the person in charge of this Switch. You ca n use up to 32 printable
ASCII characters; spaces are allowed.
Use Time Server
when Bootup Enter the time service protocol that your time server uses. Not all time servers support all
protocols, so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works. The main
differences betw een them are the time format.
When you select the Daytime (RFC 867) format, the Switch displays the day, month,
year and time with no time zone adjustment. When you use this format it is recommended
that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone.
Time (RFC-868) format displays a 4-byte integer giving the total number of seconds
since 1970/1/1 at 0:0:0.
NTP (RFC-1305) is similar to Time (RFC-868).
None is the default value. Enter the time manually. Each time you turn on the Switch, the
time and date will be reset to 1970-1-1 0:0:0.
Time Server IP
Address Enter the IP address of your timeserver. The Switch searches for the timeserver for up to
60 seconds. If you select a timeserver that is unreachable, then this screen will appear
locked for 60 seconds. Please wait.
Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu (or refresh the menu).
New Time
(hh:min:ss) Enter the new time in hour, minute and second format. The new time then appears in th e
Current Time field after you click Apply.
Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu.
New Date (yyyy-
mm-dd) Enter the new date in year, month and day format. The new date then appears in the
Current Date field after you click Apply.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
68
8.4 Introduction to VLANs
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a ph ysical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one
group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same
group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
In MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the
subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network
resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of
another user in the same building.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more
manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets
go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast
domain.
Note: VLAN is unidirecti onal; it only governs outgoing traffic.
Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC (Universal Time Coordinated, formerly known as
GMT, Greenwich Mean Time) and your time zone from the drop-down list box.
Daylight Saving
Time Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their
clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening.
Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight
Saving Time. The time is displayed in the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of
March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M.
local time. So in the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and 2:00.
Daylight Saving Time starts in the E uropean Uni on on th e las t Sunday of March. All of the
time zones in the European Union start u sing D aylight Saving Time at the same moment
(1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March
and the last field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select
2:00 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight
Saving Time. The time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each
time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in
the United States you would select First, Sunday, November and 2:00.
Daylight Saving Time ends in t he European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the
time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Sa ving Time at the same moment (1
A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October
and the last field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select
2:00 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. Th e Switch loses
these changes if it is turn ed off or lose s power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 13 Basic Setting > General Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
69
See Chapter 9 on page 93 for information on port-based and 802.1Q tagged VLANs.
8.5 Switch Setup
Click Basic Setting > Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. The
VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802.1Q or Port Based in the VLAN
Type field in this screen. Refer to Chapter 9 on page 93 for more information on VLAN.
Figure 51 Basic Setting > Switch Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 14 Basic Setting > Switch Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Type Choose 802.1Q or Port Based. The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether
you choose 802.1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen. See Chapter 9 on
page 93 for more information.
MAC Address Learning
MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts. For MAC address learning to occur on a port, the
port must be active.
Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 1000000 seconds. This is how long all dynamically learned MAC
addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out (and must be relearned).
ARP Aging Time
Aging Time Enter a time from 60 to 1000000 seconds. This is how long dynamicall y learned ARP entries
remain in the ARP table before they age out (and must be relearned). The setting here
applies to ARP entries which are newly added in the ARP table after you click Apply.
GARP Timer: Switches join VLANs by m a king a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join message
using GARP. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. A Leav e All message terminates all
registrations. GARP timers set declaration timeout values. See the chapter on VLAN setup for more
background information.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
70
8.6 IP Setup
Use the IP Setup screen to configure the Switch IP address, default gateway device, and the
management VLAN ID. The default gateway specifies the IP address of the default gateway (next
hop) for outgoing traffic.
Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join P eriod timer for GVRP in mi lliseconds. Each port has
a Join Period ti mer. The allowed Join Time r ange is between 100 and 65535 mi lliseconds;
the default is 200 milliseconds. See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background
information.
Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port
has a single Leave Period timer. Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer;
the default is 600 milliseconds.
Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds.
Each port has a single Leave All Period timer. Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave
Timer.
Priority Queue Assignment
IEEE 802.1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-la yer frame that contains
bits to define class of service. Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the
ingress port. Use the next fields to configure the priority level-to-physical queue mapping.
The Switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels. On the Switch, traffic assigned
to higher index queues gets through faster whil e traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is
congested.
Priority Level (The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard
(which incorporates the 802.1p).
Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.
Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in
delay).
Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitt er.
Level 4 Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems Network
Architecture) transactions.
Level 3 Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include important
business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
Level 2 This is for “spare bandwidth”.
Level 1 This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that are
allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.
Level 0 Typically used for best-effort traffic.
Apply Click Apply to sa ve yo ur ch anges t o the S wi tch ’s run-time memory. The Switch loses th ese
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to rese t the fields.
Ta ble 14 Basic Setting > Switch Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
71
8.6.1 Management IP Addresses
The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network. The factory default IP
address is 192.168.1.1. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address.
The factory default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
You can configure up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the S witch from the
ports belonging to the pre-defined VLAN(s).
Note: You must configure a VLAN first. Each VLAN can only have one management IP
address.
Figure 52 Basic Setting > IP Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 15 Basic Setting > IP Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Default Management IP Address
DHCP Client Select this option if you have a DHCP server that can assign the Switch an IP address,
subnet mask, a default gateway IP address and a domain name server IP address
automatically.
Static IP Address Select this option if you don’t have a DHCP server or if you wish to assign static IP
address information to the Switch. You need to fill in the following fields when you
select this option.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
72
8.7 Port Setup
Use this screen to configure Switch port settings. Click Basic Setting > Port Setup in the
navigation panel to display the configuration screen.
IP Address Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example
192.168.1.1.
IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example
255.255.255.0.
Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation, for
example 192.168.1.254.
VID Enter the VLAN identifica tion number assoc iated with the Switch IP address. Thi s is the
VLAN ID of the CPU and is used for management only. The default is "1". All ports, by
default, are fixed members of this "management VLAN" in order to manage the device
from any port. If a port is not a member of this VLAN, then users on that port cannot
access the dev ice. To access the Switch mak e sure the port that you are connected to is
a member of Management VLAN.
Management IP Addresses
You can cre a te up to 64 IP addresses, which are used to access and manage the Switch from the ports
belonging to the pre-defi ned VLAN(s). You must configure a VLAN first.
IP Address Enter the IP address for managing the Switch by the membe rs of the VLAN specif ied in
the VID field below.
IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation.
VID Type the VLAN group identification number.
Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation.
Add Click Add to insert the entry to the summary table below and save your changes to the
Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses
power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the
non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Index This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to edit the rule.
IP Address This field displays the IP address.
IP Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group.
Default Gateway This field displays the IP address of the default gateway.
Delete Check the management IP addresses that you want to remove in the Delete column,
then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes in the Delete column.
Ta ble 15 Basic Setting > IP Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
73
Figure 53 Basic Setting > Port Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 16 Basic Setting > Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This is the port index number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first
to set the common sett ings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable a port. The factory default for all ports is enabled. A port
must be enabled for data transmission to occur.
Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port. You can enter up to 64 alpha-numerical
characters.
Note: Due to space limitation, the port name may be truncated in some web configurator
screens.
Type This field displays the capacity that the port can support.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
74
8.8 PoE Status
Note: The following screens are available for the PoE model(s) only. Some features are
only available for the Ethernet ports (1 to 8 for GS2210-8HP, 1 to 24 for GS2210-
24HP and 1 to 48 for GS2210-48HP).
The PoE model(s) supports the IEEE 802.3at High Power over Ethernet (PoE) standard.
A powered device (PD) is a device such as an access point or a switch, that supports PoE (Power
over Ethernet) so that it can receive power from another device through an Ethernet port.
In the figure below, the IP camer a and IP phone get their power directly from the Switch. Aside
from minimizing the need for cables and wires, PoE removes the hassle of trying to find a nearby
electric outlet to power up devices.
Speed/Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port. Choices are
Auto-1000M, 10M/Half Duplex, 10M/Full Dupl ex, 100M/Half Duplex, 100M/Full
Duplex and 1000M/Full Duplex (Gigabit connec tions only).
Selecting Auto-1000M (auto-negotiation) allows one port to negotiate with a peer port
automatically to obtain the connection speed (of up to 1000M) and duplex mode that both
ends support. When auto-negotiation is turned on, a port on the Switch negotiates with the
peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode. If the peer port
does not support a uto-negotiatio n or turns off this feature, the Switch determines the
connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode. When the
Switch’s auto-negotiation is turned off, a port uses the pre-configured speed and duplex
mode when making a connection, thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the
peer port are the same in order to connect.
Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory
causing packet discards and frame losses. Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of
signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port.
The Switch uses IEEE802.3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in
half duplex mode.
IEEE802.3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending
port, causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers
fill.
Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a "collision" signal to
the sending port (mimicking a state of packet collision) causing the sending port to
temporarily stop sending signals and resend later. Select Flow Control to enable it.
802.1p
Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a (802.1p) priority q ueue tag. See
Priority Queue Assignment in Table 14 on page 69 for more information.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configurin g this screen afresh.
Ta ble 16 Basic Setting > Port Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
75
Figure 54 Powered Device Examples
You can also set priorities so that the Switch is able to reserve and allocate power to certain PDs.
Note: The POE (Power over Ethernet) devices that supply or receive power and their
connected Ethernet cables must all be completely indoors.
To view the current amount of power that PDs are receiving from the Switch, click Basic Setting >
PoE Setup.
Figure 55 Basic Setting > PoE Status
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
76
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.8.1 PoE Time Range Status
Use this screen to see whether PoE is scheduled to be enabled on a port.
Ta ble 17 Basic Setting > PoE Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PoE Status
PoE Mode This field displays the power management mode used by the Switch, whether it is in
Classification or Consumption mode.
Total Power (W) This field displays the total power the Switch can provide to the connected PoE-enabled
devices on the PoE ports.
Consuming
Power (W) This field displays the amount of power the Switch is currently supplying to the connected
PoE-enabled devices.
Allocated Power
(W) This field disp lays the total amo unt of power the Switch has reserved for PoE after
negotiating with the connected PoE device(s).
Consuming Power (W) can be less than or equal but not more than the Allocated Power
(W).
Remaining
Power (W) This field displays the amount of power the Switch can still provide for PoE.
Note: The Switch must have at least 16 W of remaining power in order to supply power to a
PoE device, even if the PoE device needs less than 16W.
Port This is the port index number.
State This field sh ows wh ic h port s c a n re ce ive power from the Switch. You can set this in Section
8.8.2 on page 77.
•Disable - The PD connected to this port cannot get power supply.
•Enable - The PD connected to this port can receive power.
Class This shows the power classification of the PD.
This is a number from 0 to 4, where each value represents a range of power (W) and power
current (mA) that the PD requires to function. The ranges are as follows.
•Class 0 - Default, 0.44 to 12.94
•Class 1 - Optional, 0.44 to 3.84
•Class 2 - Optional, 3.84 to 6.49
•Class 3 - Optional, 6.49 to 12.95
•Class 4 - Reserved (PSEs classify as Class 0) in a Switch that supports IEEE 802.3af
only. Optional, 12.95 to 25.50 in a Switch that supports IEEE 802.3at.
PD Priority When the total power requested by the PDs exceeds the total PoE power budget on the
Switch, you can set the PD priority to allow the Switch to provide power to ports with higher
priority first.
•Critical has the highest priority.
•High has the Switch assign p ower to the port after all critical priority ports are served.
•Low has the Switch assign power to the port after all critical and high priority ports are
served.
Power-Up This field displays the PoE standard the Switch uses to provide power on this port.
Consuming
Power (mW) This field displays the current amount of power consumed by the PD from the Switch on this
port.
Max Power
(mW) This field displays the maximum amount of power the PD could use from the Switch on this
port.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
77
Click the PoE Time Range Status link in the Basic Setting > PoE Status screen. The following
screen opens.
Figure 56 Basic Setting > PoE Setup > PoE Tim e Range Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.8.2 PoE Setup
Use this screen to set the priority levels, power-up mode and schedule for the Switch in distributing
power to PDs.
Click the PoE Setup link in the Basic Setting > PoE Status screen. The following screen opens.
Ta ble 18 Basic Setting > PoE Setup > PoE Time Range Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This is the number of the port on the Switch.
Time Range This field displays the name of the schedule which is applied to the port. PoE is enable d at the
specified time/date.
state This field displays whether the port can receive power from the Switch (In) or not (Out)
currently.
It shows - if there is no schedule applied to the port.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
78
Figure 57 Basic Setting > PoE Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 19 Basic Setting > PoE Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PoE Mode Select the power management mode you want the Switch to use .
•Classification - Select this if you want the Switch to reserve the Max Power (mW) to
each PD according to the priority level. If the total power supply runs out, PDs with lower
priority do not get power to function.
•Consumption - Select this if you want the Switch to manage the total power supply so
that each connected PD gets a resource. However, the power allocated by the Switch may
be less than the Max Power (mW) of the PD. PDs with higher priority also get more power
than those with lower priority levels.
Port This is the port index number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first
to set the common sett ings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
PD Select this to provide power to a PD connected to the port.
If left unchecked, the PD connected to the port cannot receive power from the Switch.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
79
8.9 Interface Setup
An IPv6 address is configured on a per-interface ba sis. The interface can be a physical interface (for
example, an Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, a VLAN). The Switch supports the
VLAN interface type for IPv6 at the time of writing.
Use this screen to set IPv6 interfaces on which you can configure an IPv6 address to access and
manage the Switch. Click Basic Setting > Interface Setup in the navigation panel to display the
configuration screen.
PD Priority When the total power requested by the PDs exceeds the total PoE power budget on the
Switch, you can set the PD priority to allow the Switch to provide power to ports with higher
priority.
Select Critical to give the highest PD priority on the port.
Select High to set the Swi tch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical
priority ports are served.
Select Low to set the Switch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical and
high priority ports are served.
Power-Up Set how the Switch provides power to a connected PD at power-up.
802.3af - the Swit ch follows the IEEE 802.3af P ower over Ethernet standard to supply power
to the connected PDs during power-up.
Legacy - the Switch can provide power to the connecte d PDs that require high inrush
currents at power -u p. Inru sh cur rent is th e maxim um, i nst antane ous i nput cu rrent dr a wn by
the PD when first turned on.
Pre-802.3at - the Switch initially offers power on the port according to the IEEE 802.3af
standard, and then switches to support the IEEE 802.3at standard within 75 milliseconds
after a PD is connected to the port. Select this option if the Switch is performing 2-event
Layer-1 classification (PoE+ hardware classification) or the connected PD is NOT performing
Layer 2 power classification using Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP).
802.3at - the Switch supports the IEEE 802.3at High Power over Ethernet standard and can
supply power of up to 30W per Ethernet port. IEEE 802.3at is also known as PoE+ or PoE
Plus. An IEEE 802.3at compatible device is referred to as Type 2. Power Class 4 (High Power)
can only be used by Type 2 devices. If the connected PD requires a Class 4 current when i t is
turned on, it will be powered up in this mode.
Max Power
(mW) Specify the maximum amount of power the PD could use from the Switch on this port.
Time Ra nge Select a pre-defined schedule (created using the Advanced Application > Time Range
screen) to control when the Switch enables PoE to provide power on the port.
If you leave this field blank, PoE is disabled on the port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 19 Basic Setting > PoE Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
80
Figure 58 Basic Setting > Interface Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.10 IPv6
Use this screen to view the IPv6 interface status and configure Switch’s management IPv6
addresses.
Click Basic Setting > IPv6 in the navigation panel to display the IPv6 status screen as shown
next.
Ta ble 20 Basic Setting > Interface Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Type Select the type of IPv6 interface for which you want to configure. The Switch supports the
VLAN interface type for IPv6 at the time of writing.
Interface ID Specify a unique identification number (from 1 to 4094) for the interface.
To have IPv6 function properly, you should configure a static VLAN with the same ID number
in the Advanced Application > VLAN screens.
Add Click this to create a new entry.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if
it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Index This field displays the index number of an entry.
Interface Type This field displays the type of interface.
Interface ID This field displays the identification number of the interface.
Interface This field displays the interface’s descriptive name which is generated automatically by the
Switch. The name is from a combination of the interface type and ID number.
Select an entry’s check box to select a sp ecific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
81
Figure 59 Basic Setting > IPv6
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.10.1 IPv6 Interface Status
Use this screen to view a specific IPv6 interface status and detailed information. Click an interface
index number in the Basic Setting > IPv6 screen. The following screen opens.
Ta ble 21 Basic Setting > IPv6
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number of an IPv6 interface. Click on an index number to view
more interface details.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you c reated.
Active This field displays whether the IPv6 interface is activated or not.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
82
Figure 60 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Interface Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 22 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Interface Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Active This field displays whether the IPv6 interface is activated or not.
MTU Size This field displays the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size for IPv6 packets on this
interface.
ICMPv6 Rate
Limit Bucket
Size
This field displays the maximum number of ICMPv6 error messages which are allowed to
transmit in a given time interval. If the bucket is full , subsequent error messages are
suppressed.
ICMPv6 Rate
Limit Error
Interval
This field displays the time period (in milliseconds) during which ICMPv6 error messages of
up to the bucket size can be transmitted. 0 means no limit.
Stateless
Address
Autoconfig
This field displays whether the Switch’s interface c a n automatically generate a link-local
address via stateless autoconfiguration.
Link Local
Address This field displays the Switch’s link-local IP address and prefix generated by the interface. It
also shows whether the IP address is preferred, which means it is a valid address and can be
used as a sender or receiver address.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
83
Global Unicast
Address(es) This field displays the Switch’s global unicast address to identify this interface.
Joined Group
Address(es) This field displays the IPv6 multicast addresses of groups the Switch’s interface joins.
ND DAD
Active This field displays whether Neighbor Discovery (ND) Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) is
enabled on the interface.
Number of
DAD Attempts This field displays the number of consecutive neighbor solicitations the Switch sends for this
interface.
NS-Interval
(millisecond) This field dis plays the time interval (in milliseconds) at which neighbor solicitations are re-
sent for this interface.
ND Reachable
Time
(millisecond)
This field disp lays how long (in mi lliseconds) a neighbor is considered reachable for this
interface.
DHCPv6 Client
Active This field displays whether the Switch acts as a DHCPv6 client to get an IPv6 address from a
DHCPv6 server.
Identity
Association An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through
which the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be
associated with exa ctly one interface.
IA Type The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA
means an identity association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity
association for temporary addresses.
IAID Each IA consists of a un ique IAID and associated IP information.
T1 This field displays the DHCPv6 T1 timer. After T1, the Switch sends the DHCPv6 server a
Re new message.
An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The DHCPv6
server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to
extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire.
T2 This field displays the DHCPv6 T2 timer. If the time T2 is reached and the server does not
respond, the Switch s ends a Rebind message to any available server.
State This field displays the state of the TA. It shows
Active when the Switch obtains addresses from a DHCpv6 server and the TA is created.
Renew when the TA’s address lifetime expires and the Switch sends out a Renew message.
Rebind when the Switch doesn’t receive a response from the original DHCPv6 server and
sends out a Rebind message to another DHCPv6 server.
SID This field displays the DHCPv6 server’s unique ID.
Address This field displays the Switch’s global address which is assigned by the DHCPv6 server.
Preferred
Lifetime This field displays how long (in seconds) that the global address remains preferred.
Valid
Lifetime This field displays how long (in seconds) that the global address is valid.
DNS This field displays the DNS server address assigned by the DHCPv6 server.
Domain List This field displays the address record when the Switch queries the DNS server to resolve
domain names.
Restart
DHCPv6 Client Click Click Here to send a new DHCP request to the DHCPv6 server and update the IPv6
address and DNS information for this interface.
Ta ble 22 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Interface Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
84
8.10.2 IPv6 Configuration
Use this screen to configure IPv6 settings on the Switch. Click the IPv6 Configuration link in the
Basic Setting > IPv6 screen. The following screen opens.
Figure 61 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.10.3 IPv6 Global Setup
Use this screen to configure the global IPv6 settings. Click the link next to IPv6 Global Setup in
the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Ta ble 23 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Co nfiguration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Global
Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the global IPv6 settings on the
Switch.
IPv6 Interface
Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can enable a n IPv6 interface on the Switch.
IPv6
Addressing
IPv6 Link-
Local
Address
Setup
Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the IPv6 link-local address for an
interface.
IPv6
Global
Address
Setup
Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the IPv6 global address for an
interface.
IPv6 Neighbor
Discovery
IPv6
Neighbor
Discovery
Setup
Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the IPv6 neighbor discovery settings.
IPv6 Neighbor
Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can create a static IPv6 neighbor entry in the
Switch’s IPv6 neighbor table.
DHCPv6 Client
Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the Switch DHCP settings.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
85
Figure 62 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Global Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.10.4 IPv6 Interface Setup
Use this screen to turn on or off an IPv6 interface and enable stateless autoconfiguration on it. Click
the link next to IPv6 Interface Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as
shown next.
Figure 63 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Interface Setup
Ta ble 24 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Global Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Hop Limit Specify the maximum number of hops (from 1 to 255) in router advertisements. This is the
maximum number of hops on which an IPv6 packet is allowed to transmit before it is
discarded by an IPv6 router, which is similar to the TTL field in IPv4.
ICMPv6 Rate
Limit Bucket
Size
Specify the maximum number of ICMPv6 error messages (from 1 to 200) which are allowed
to transmit in a given time interval. If the bucket is full, subsequent error messages are
suppressed.
ICMPv6 Rate
Limit Error
Interval
Specify the time period (from 0 to 2147483647 milliseconds) during which ICMPv6 error
messages of up to the bucket size can be transmitted. 0 means no limit.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
86
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.10.5 IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup
A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a
“private IP address” in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a
device. A link-local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10.
Use this screen to configure the interface’s link-local address and default gateway. Click the link
next to IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen
as shown next.
Figure 64 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Link-Local Ad dress Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 25 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Interface Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
Active Select this option to enable the interface.
Address
Autoconfig Select this option to allow the interface to automatically generate a link-local address via
stateless autoconfiguration.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface in dex number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
Active This field displays whether the IPv6 interface is activated or not.
Address
Autoconfig This field displays whet her stateless autoconfiguration is enabled on the interface.
Ta ble 26 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
Link-Local
Address Manually configure a static IPv6 link-local address for the interface.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
87
8.10.6 IPv6 Global Address Setup
Use this screen to configure the interface’s IPv6 global address. Click the link next to IPv6 Global
Address Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 65 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Global Address Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Default
Gateway Set the default gateway IPv6 address for the interface. When an interface cannot find a
routing information for a frame’s destination, it forwards the packet to the default gateway.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface in dex number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
IPv6 Link-
Local Address This is the static IPv6 link-local address for the interface.
IPv6 Default
Gateway This is the default gateway IPv6 address for the interface.
Ta ble 26 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 27 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Global Address Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
IPv6 Global
Address Manually configure a static IPv6 global address for the interface.
Prefix Length Specify an IPv6 prefix length that specifies how many most significant bits (start from the
left) in the address compose the network address.
EUI-64 Select this option to have the interface ID be generated automatically using the EUI-64
format.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
88
8.10.7 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup
Use this screen to configure neighbor discovery settings for each interface. Click the link next to
IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as
shown next.
Figure 66 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface in dex number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
IPv6 Global
Address/Prefix
Length
This field displays the IPv6 global address and prefix length for the interface.
EUI-64 This shows whether the interface ID of the global address is generated using the EUI-64
format.
Select an entry’s check box to select a sp ecific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click Delete to remove the selected
entry(ies) from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 27 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Global Address Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 28 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
DAD Attempts The Switch uses Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) with neighbor solicitation and
advertisement messages to check whether an IPv6 address is already in use before assigning
it to an interface, such as the link-local address it creates through stateless address
autoconfiguration.
Specify the number of consecutive neighbor solicitations (from 0 to 600) the Switch sends for
this interface. Enter 0 to turn off DAD.
NS Interval Specify the time interv al (from 1000 to 3600000 milliseconds) at which neighbor solic itations
are re-sent for this interface.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
89
8.10.8 IPv6 Neighbor Setup
Use this screen to create a static IPv6 neighbor entry in the Switch’s IPv6 neighbor table to store
the neighbor information permanently. Click the link next to IPv6 Neighbor Setup in the IPv6
Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 67 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Setup
Reachable
Time Specify how long (from 1000 to 3600000 milliseconds ) a neighbor is considered reachable for
this interface.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface in dex number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
DAD Attempts This field displays the number of consecutive neighbor solicitations the Switch sends for this
interface.
NS Interval This field displays the time interval (in milliseconds) at which neighbor solicitations are re-
sent for this interface.
Reachable
Time This field displays how long (in milliseconds) a neighbor is considered reachable for this
interface.
Ta ble 28 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
90
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.10.9 DHCPv6 Client Setup
Use this screen to configure the Switch’s DHCP settings when it is acting as a DHCPv6 client. Click
the link next to DHCPv6 Client Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as
shown next.
Ta ble 29 Bas ic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Type Select the type of IPv6 interface for which you want to configure. The Switch supports the
VLAN interface type for IPv6 at the time of writing.
Interface ID Specify a unique identification number (from 1 to 4094) for the interface.
A static IPv6 neighbor entry displays in the Management > Neighbor Table screen only
when the interface ID is also created in the Basic Setup > Interface Setup screen.
To have IPv6 function properly, you should configure a static VLAN with the same ID number
in the Advanced Application > VLAN screens.
Neighbor
Address Specify the IPv6 address of the neighboring device which can be reached through the
interface.
MAC Specify the MAC address of the neighboring device which can be reached through the
interface.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This save s yo ur chan ges to th e S witc h’s run-time memory. The Switch lo ses the se change s if
it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface in dex number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
Neighbor
Address This field displays the IPv6 address of the neighboring device which can be reached through
the interface
MAC This field displays the MAC address of the neighboring device which can be reached through
the interface.
Select an entry’s check box to select a sp ecific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click Delete to remove the selected
entry(ies) from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
91
Figure 68 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > DHCPv6 Client Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 30 Basic Setting > I P v6 > IPv6 Configuration > D HCPv6 Client Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
IA Type Select IA-NA to set the Switch to get a n on-temporary IP address from the DHCPv6 server
for this interface.
Optionally, you can also select Rapid-Commit to have the Switch send its DHCPv6 Solicit
message with a Rapid Commit option to obtain information from the DHCPv6 server by a
rapid two-message ex ch ange. T he Switch discards any Reply messages that do not include a
Rapid Commit option. The DHCPv6 server should also support the Rapid Commit option to
have it work well.
Options Select DNS to have the Switch obtain DNS serve r IPv6 addresses and/or select Domain-List
to have the Switch obtain a list of domain names from the DHCP server.
Information
Refresh
Minimum
Specify the time interval (from 600 to 4294967295 seconds) at which the Switch exchanges
other configuration information with a DHCPv6 server again.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface in dex number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
IA- NA This field displays whether the Sw i tc h obta ins a non-temporary IP address from the DHCPv6
server.
Rapid-Commit This field displays whether the Sw itch obtains information from the DHCPv6 server by a rapid
two-message exchange.
DNS This field displays whether the Switch obtains DNS server IPv6 addresses from the DHCPv6
server.
Domain-List This field displays whether the Switch obtains a list of domain names from the DHCP server.
Information
Refresh
Minimum
This field displays the time interval (in seconds) at which the Switch exchanges other
configuration information with a DHCPv6 server again.
Chapter 8 Basic Setting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
92
8.11 DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa. Use the DNS screen to configure and view the default DNS servers on the Switch.
Figure 69 Basic Setting > DNS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 31 Basic Setting > DNS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Static Domain Name Server
Preference This is the priority of the DNS server address.
Server Address Enter a domain name server IPv6/IPv4 address in order to be able to use a domain
name instead of an IP address.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Domain Name Server Table
Index This field displays priority of the DNS server address.
Server Address This field displays the IP address of th e DNS server.
Source This field displays whether the DNS server address is configured manually (Static) or
obtained automatically using DHCP/DHCPv 6 (Dynamic).
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
93
CHAPTER 9
VLAN
9.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure 802.1Q tagged and port-based VLANs. The type of screen
you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen.
9.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the VLAN Status screen (Section 9.2 on page 96) to view and search all VLAN groups.
•Use the VLAN Detail screen (Section 9.2.1 on page 97) to view detailed port settings and status
of the VLAN group.
•Use the Static VLAN screen (Section 9.4 on page 98) to configure and view 802.1Q VLAN
parameters for the Switch.
•Use the VLAN Port Setting screen (Section 9.5 on page 100) to configure the static VLAN (IEEE
802.1Q) settings on a port.
•Use the Subnet Based VLAN screen (Section 9.6 on page 101) to set up VLANs that allow you
to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the source IP subnet you specify.
•Use the Protocol Based VLAN screen (Section 9.7 on page 104) to set up VLANs that allow y ou
to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you specify.
•Use the Voice VLAN screen (Section 9.8 on page 106) to set up VLANs that allow you to group
voice traffic with defined priority and enable the switch port to carry the voice traffic separately
from data traffic to ensure the sound quality does not deteriorate.
•Use the MAC Based VLAN screen (Section 9. 9 on page 107 ) to set up VLANs that allow you to
group untagged packets into logical VLANs based on the source MAC address of the packet. This
eliminates the need to reconfigure the switch when you change ports. The switch will forward the
packets based on the source MAC address you setup previously.
•Use the Port-Based VLAN screen (Section 9.10 on pag e 109) to set up VLANs where the packet
forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port.
9.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read this section to know more about VLAN and how to configure the screens.
IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLANs
A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership
of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The
VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a
frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame
across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two
bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier, residing within the type/length field of the Ethernet frame)
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
94
and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information, starts after the source address field of th e Ethernet
frame).
The CFI (Canonical Form at Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If
a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that fr ame should not be forwarded as
it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum
number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A
frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priorit y frame, meaning that only the priorit y
level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the
4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved,
so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094.
Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames
Each port on the Switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames. To forward a frame from
an 802.1Q VLAN-aware switch to an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware switch, the Switch first decides where
to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag. To forward a frame from an 802.1Q VLAN-
unaware switch to an 802.1Q VLAN-aware switch, the Switch first decides where to forward the
frame, and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port's default VID. The default PVID is
VLAN 1 for all ports, but this can be changed.
A broadcast frame (or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system) is
duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID (except the ingress port itself), thus confining
the broadcast to a specific domain.
9.1.2.1 Automatic VLAN Registration
GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches.
GARP
GARP (Generic Attribute Registration Protocol) allows network switches to register and de-register
attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN. GARP is a protocol that provides
a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application, for example, GVRP.
GARP Timers
Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join message
using GARP. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. A Leave All message
terminates all registrations. GARP timers set declaration timeout values.
GVRP
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registr ation Protocol) is a registration protocol that defines a wa y for switches to
register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network. Enable this function to permit VLAN
groups beyond the local Switch.
TPID
2 Bytes
User Priority
3 Bits
CFI
1 Bit
VLAN ID
12 bits
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
95
Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802.1Q VLAN terminology.
9.1.2.2 Port VLAN Trunking
Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass
through that port. This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without ha ving to
configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices.
Refer to the following figure. Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 (V1 and V2) on
devices A and B. Without VLAN Trunking, you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all
intermediary switches C, D and E; otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags.
However, with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port(s) in each intermediary switch you only need to
create VLAN groups in the end devices (A and B). C, D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN
group tags 1 and 2 (VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches) to pass through their VLAN
trunking port(s).
Figure 70 Port VLAN Trunking
9.1.2.3 Select the VLAN Type
Select a VLAN type in the Basic Setting > Switch Setup screen.
Ta ble 32 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Terminology
VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION
VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually.
Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration/deregistration
process.
VLAN Administrative
Control Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members.
Registration
Forbidden Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the
specified VLAN.
Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP.
VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames
transmitted.
Untagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN don't tag all outgoing
frames transmitted.
VLAN Port Port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port
received.
Acceptable Frame
Type You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming
frames, just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming
frames on a port.
Ingress filtering If set, the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not
have this port as a member
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
96
Figure 71 Switch Setup > Select VLAN Type
Static VLAN
Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be
• sent to a VLAN group as normal depending on its VLAN tag.
• sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not.
• blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag.
You can also tag all outgoing frames (that were previously untagged) from a port with the specified
VID.
9.2 VLAN Status
Use this screen to to view and search all VLAN groups. Click Advanced Application > VLAN from
the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next.
Figure 72 Advanced Application > VLAN: VLAN Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 33 Advanced Application > VLAN: VLAN Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Search by
VID Enter an existing VLAN ID number(s) (separated by a comma) and click Search to display
only the specified VLAN(s) in the list below.
Leave this field blank and click Search to display all VLANs configured on the Switch.
The Number of
VLAN This is the number of VLANs configured on the Switch.
The Number of
Search Results This is the number of VLANs that match the searching criteria and display in the list below.
This field displays only when you use the Search button to look for certain VLANs.
Index This is the VLAN index num ber. Click on an index number to view more VLAN details.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
97
9.2.1 VLAN Details
Use this screen to view detailed port settings and status of the VLAN group. Click on an index
number in the VLAN Status screen to display VLAN details.
Figure 73 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Detail
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen.
Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN
was set up.
Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch.
Dynamic: using GVRP
Static: added as a permanent entry
Voice: manually added as a Voice VLAN
MVR: added via multicast VLAN registration
MAC-based: manually added as MAC-based VLAN
Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous/next screen if all status information cannot be
seen in one screen.
Ta ble 33 Advanced Application > VLAN: VLAN Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 34 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen.
VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen.
Port Number This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN. A tagged port is marked as
T, an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as “–“.
Elapsed Time This field shows ho w long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN
was set up.
Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch.
Dynamic: using GVRP
Static: added as a permanent entry
Voice: manually added as a Voice VLAN
MVR: added via multicast VLAN registration
MAC-based: manually added as MAC-based VLAN
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
98
9.3 VLAN Configuration
Use this screen to view IEEE 802.1Q VLAN parameters for the S witch. Click Advanced Application
> VLAN > VLAN Configuration to see the following screen.
Figure 74 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration
The following table describes the labels in the above screen.
9.4 Configure a Static VLAN
Use this screen to configure a static VLAN for the Switch. Click the Static VLAN Setup link in the
VLAN Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Ta ble 35 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Static VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure th e Static VLAN for the Switch.
VLAN Port Setup Click Click Here to configure the VLAN Port for the Switch.
Subnet Based VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure the Subnet Based VLAN for the Switch.
Protocol Based VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure the Protocol Based VLAN for the Switch.
Voice VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure the Voice VLAN for the Switch.
MAC Based VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure the MAC Based VLAN for the Switch.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
99
Figure 75 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Ta ble 36 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ACTIVE Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings.
Name Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes. This name consists
of up to 64 printable characters. Spaces are allowed.
VLAN Group ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry; the valid range is between 1 and 4094.
Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if y ou want to mak e some sett ings the same for all ports. Use this row first
to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP. This is the
default selection .
Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group.
Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group.
Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this
VLAN Group ID.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
100
9.5 Configure VLAN Port Settings
Use the VLAN Port Setup screen to configure the static VLAN (IEEE 802.1Q) settings on a port. Click
the VLAN Port Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen.
Figure 76 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > VLAN Port Setup
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to change the fields back to their last saved values.
Clear Click Clear to start con f iguring the screen again.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group. Click the number to edit the VLAN
settings.
Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled (Yes) or disabled (No).
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group.
Select an ent ry’s check box to s elect a spec ific entry. Otherwise, select th e ch eck bo x i n th e
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 36 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
101
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
9.6 Subnet Based VLANs
Subnet based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the source IP subnet you
specify. When a frame is received on a port, the Switch checks if a tag is added already and the IP
subnet it came from. The untagged packets from the same IP subnet are then placed in the same
subnet based VLAN. One advantage of using subnet based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to
traffic from the same IP subnet.
For example, an ISP (Internet Services Provider) may divide different types of services it provides
to customers into different IP subnets. Traffic for voice services is designated for IP subnet
Ta ble 37 Adva nced Application > VLAN > VLAN Confi guration> VLAN Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GVRP GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is a registration protocol that defines a way for
switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network.
Select th is check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Ingress Check If this check box is selected, the Switch discards incoming frames on a port for VLANs that
do not include this port in its member set.
Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering.
PVID A PVID (Port VLAN ID) is a tag that adds to incoming untagged frames received on a port
so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines.
Enter a number between 1and 4094 as the port VLAN ID.
GVRP Select this ch eck box to allow GVRP on this port.
Acceptable Frame
Type Specify the type of frames allowed on a port. Choices are All, Tag Only and Untag Only.
Select All from the drop-down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this
port. This is the default setting.
Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port. All untagged frames will be
dropped.
Select Untag Only to accept only untagged frames on this port. All tagged frames will be
dropped.
VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers (but not ports
directly connected to end users) to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to
pass through the Switch.
Isolation Select this to allows this port to communicate only with the CPU management port and
the ports on which the isolation feature is not enabled.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses po wer, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
102
172.16.1.0/24, video for 192.168.1.0/24 and data for 10.1.1.0/24. The Switch can then be
configured to group incoming traffic based on the source IP subnet of incoming frames.
Y ou configure a subnet based VLAN with priority 6 and VID of 100 for traffic received from IP subnet
172.16.1.0/24 (voice services). You also have a subnet based VLAN with priority 5 and VID of 200
for traffic received from IP subnet 192.168.1.0/24 (video services). Lastly, you configure VLAN with
priority 3 and VID of 300 for traffic received from IP subnet 10.1.1.0/24 (data services). All
untagged incoming frames will be classified based on their source IP subnet and prioritized
accordingly. That is video services receive the highest priority and data the lowest.
Figure 77 Subnet Based VLAN Application Example
9.6.1 Configuring Subnet Based VLAN
Click the Subnet Based VLAN Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen to display the
configuration screen as shown.
Note: Subnet based VLAN applies to un-tagged packets and is applicable only when you
use IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN.
10.1.1.0/24
192.168.1.0/24
172.16.1.0/24
Internet
VID = 100 VID = 200 VID = 300
Untagged
Frames
Tag ged Frames
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
103
Figure 78 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Subnet Based VLAN Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 38 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Subnet Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Check this box to acti vate th is subnet based VLANs on the Switch.
DHCP-Vlan
Override When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP clients can renew their IP address through the DHCP
VLAN or via another DHCP server on the subnet based VLAN.
Select this checkbox to force the DHCP clients in this IP subnet to obtain their IP addresses
through the DHCP VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done c o nfiguring.
Active Check this box to activate the IP subnet VLAN you are creating or editing.
Name Enter up to 32 alpha numeric characters to identify this subnet based VLAN.
IP Enter the IP address of the subnet for which you want to configure this subnet based VLAN.
Mask-Bits Enter the bit number of the subnet mask. To find the bit number, convert the subnet mask to
binary format and add all the 1’s together. Take “255.255.255.0” for example. 255 converts
to eight 1s in binary. There are three 255s, so add three eights together and you get the bit
number (24).
VID Enter the ID of a VLAN with which the untagge d frames from the IP subnet specified in this
subnet based VLAN are tagged. This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the
Advanced Applications > VLAN screens.
Priority Sele ct the priority level that the Switch assigns to frames belonging to this VLAN.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done c o nfiguring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Index This is the index number identifying this subnet based VLAN. Click on any of these numbers
to edit an existing subnet based VLAN.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
104
9.7 Protocol Based VLANs
Protocol based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you
specify. When an upstream frame is received on a port (configured for a protocol based VLAN), the
Switch checks if a tag is added already and its protocol. The untagged packets of the same protocol
are then placed in the same protocol based VLAN. O ne advantage of using protocol based VLANs is
that priority can be assigned to traffic of the same protocol.
Note: Protocol based VLAN applies to un-tagged pack ets and is app lic able only when you
use IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN.
For example, port 1, 2, 3 and 4 belong to static VLAN 100, and port 4, 5, 6, 7 belong to static VLAN
120. You configure a protocol based VLAN A with priority 3 for ARP traffic received on port 1, 2 and
3. You also have a protocol based VLAN B with priority 2 for Apple T alk traffic received on port 6 and
7. All upstream ARP traffic from port 1, 2 and 3 will be grouped together, and all upstream Apple
Talk traffic from port 6 and 7 will be in another group and have higher priority than ARP traffic,
when they go through the uplink port to a backbone switch C.
Figure 79 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example
9.7.1 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN
Click the Protocol Based VLAN Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen to display the
configuration screen as shown.
Active This field shows whether the subnet based VLAN is active or not.
Name This field shows the name the subnet based VLAN.
IP This field shows the IP address of the subnet for this subn et based VLAN.
Mask-Bits This fie ld shows the subnet mask in bit number format for this subnet based VLAN.
VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the frames which belong to this subnet based VLAN.
Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this subnet based VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click this to delete the subnet based VLANs which you marked for deletion.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 38 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Subnet Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
105
Note: Protocol-based VLAN applies to un-tagged packets and is applic able only when you
use IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN.
Figure 80 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Protocol Based VLAN Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 39 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Protocol Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Check this box to acti vate this protocol based VLAN.
Port Type a port to be included in this protocol based VLAN.
This port must belong to a static VLAN in order to participate in a protocol based VLAN. See
Chapter 9 on page 93 for more details on setting up VLANs.
Name Enter up to 32 alpha numeric characters to identify this protocol based VLAN.
Ethernet-type Use the drop down list box to select a predefined protocol to be included in this protocol based
VLAN or select Others and type the protocol number in hexadecimal notation. For example
the IP protocol in hexadecimal notation is 0800, and Novell IPX protocol is 8137.
Note: Protocols in the hexadecimal number range of 0x0000 to 0x05ff are not allowed to be
used for protocol based VLANs.
VID Enter the ID of a VLAN to which the po rt belongs. This must be an existing VLAN which you
defined in the Advanced Applications > VLAN screens.
Priority Sele ct the priority level that the Switch will assign to frames belonging to this VLAN.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done c o nfiguring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Index This is the index number identifying this protocol based VLAN. Click on any of these numbers
to edit an existing protocol based VLAN.
Active This field shows whether the protocol based VLAN is active or not.
Port This field shows which port belongs to this protocol based VLAN.
Name This field shows the name the protocol based VLAN.
Ethernet-type This field shows which Ethernet protocol is part of this protocol based VLAN.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
106
9.8 Voice VLAN
V oice VLAN ensures that the sound qualit y of an IP phone is preserved from deterior ating when the
data traffic on the Switch ports is high. It groups the voice traffic with defined priority into an
assigned VLAN which enables the separation of voice and data traffic coming onto the Switch port.
You can set priority level to the Voice VLAN and add MAC address of IP phones from specific
manufacturers by using its ID from the Organizationally Unique Identifiers (OUI).
Click the Voice VLAN Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen to display the configuration
screen as shown.
Figure 81 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Vo ice VLAN Setup
VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the port.
Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this protocol based
VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click this to delete the protoco l based VLANs which you marked for deletion.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 39 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Protocol Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
107
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
9.9 MAC Based VLAN
The MAC-based VLAN feature assigns incoming untagged packets to a VLAN and classifies the
traffic based on the source MAC address of the packet. When untagged pack ets arrive at the switch,
the source MAC address of the packet is looked up in a MAC to VLAN mapping table. If an entry is
found, the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the packet. The assigned VLAN ID is verified
against the VLAN table. If the VLAN is v alid, ingress processing on the packet continues; otherwise,
the packet is dropped.
This feature allows users to change ports without having to reconfigure the VLAN. You can assign
priority to the MAC-based VLAN and define a MAC to VLAN mapping table by entering a specified
Ta ble 40 Adva nced Application > VLAN > VLAN Confi guration > Vo ice VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Voice VLAN Global Setup
Voice VLAN Click the V oice VLAN r adio button if y ou want to enable the Voice VLAN feature. Type
a VLAN ID number in the box next to the radio button that is associated with the
Voice VLAN. Click Disable radio button if you do not want to enable th e Voice VLAN
feature.
Priority Select the priority level of the Voice VLAN from 0 to 7. Default sett ing is 5.The hi gher
the numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this Voice VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are
done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to default settings.
Voice VLAN OUI Setup
OUI address Type the IP Phone manu facturer’s OUI MAC address. The first three byes is the
manufacturer identifier, the last three bytes is a unique station ID.
OUI mask Type the IP Phone manufacturer's OUI mask address.
Description Type an description up to 32 characters for the Voice VLAN device. For example:
Siemens.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are
done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Index This field displays the index number of the Voice VLAN.
OUI address Th is field displays the OUI address of the Voice VLAN.
OUI mask This field displays the OUI mask address of the Voice VLAN.
Description This field displays the description of the Voice VLAN with OUI address.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box
in the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
108
source MAC address in the MAC-based VLAN setup screen. You can also delete a MAC-based VLAN
entry in the same screen.
Click the MAC Based VLAN Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen to see the following
screen.
Figure 82 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > MAC Based VLAN Setup
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Ta ble 41 Adva nced Application > VLAN > VLAN Confi guration > MAC Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Type a name up to 32 alpha numeric characters for the MAC-based VLAN entry.
MAC Address Type a MAC address that is bind to the MAC-based VLAN entry. This is the s o urce MAC
address of the data packet that is looked up when untagged packets arrive at the
Switch.
VID Type an ID (from 1 to 4094) for the VLAN ID that is associated with the MAC-based
VLAN entry.
Priority Type a priority (0-7) for the MAC-based VLAN entry.The higher the n umeric value you
assign, the higher the priority for this MAC-based VLAN entry.
Add Click Add to save the new MAC-based VLAN entry.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the fields in the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Index This field displays the index number of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Name This field displays the name of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address that is bind to the MAC-based VLAN entry.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Priority This field displays the priority level of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the chec k boxes.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
109
9.10 Port-Based VLAN Setup
Port -based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC
address and its associated port.
Port -based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port. Therefore, if you wish
to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, for example, between conference rooms in a
hotel, you must define the egress (an egress port is an outgoing port, that is, a port through which
a data packet leaves) for both ports.
Port-based VLANs are specific only to the Switch on which they were created.
Note: When you activate port-based VLAN, the Switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1. You
cannot change it.
Note: In screens ( s uch as IP Setup and Filtering) that require a VID, you must enter 1
as the VID.
The port-based VLAN setup screen is shown next. The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all
Ethernet ports.
9.10.1 Configure a Port-Based VLAN
Select Port Based as the VLAN Ty pe in the Basic Setting > Switch Setup screen and then click
Advanced Application > VLAN from the navigation panel to display the next screen.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
110
Figure 83 Advanced Application > VLAN: Port Based VLAN Setup (All Connected)
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
111
Figure 84 Advanced Application > VLAN: Port Based VLAN Setup (Port Isolation)
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
112
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
9.11 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
9.11.1 Create an IP-based VLAN Example
This example shows you how to create an IP VLAN which includes ports 1, 4 and 8. Follow these
steps:
1Activate this protocol based VLAN.
2Type the port number you want to include in this protocol based VLAN. Type 1.
3Give this protocol-based VLAN a descriptive name. Type IP-VLAN.
4Select the protocol. Leave the default value IP.
5Type the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN. In our example we already created a static VLAN with an ID
of 5. Type 5.
6Leave the priority set to 0 and click Add.
Ta ble 42 Advanced Application > VLAN: Port Based VLAN Setup
label Description
Setting
Wizard Choose All connected or Port isolation.
All connected means all ports can communicate with each other, that is, there are no virtual
LANs. All incoming and outgoing ports are selected. This option is the most flexible but also
the least secure.
Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port
and cannot communicate with each other. All incom ing ports are selected while only the CPU
outgoing port is selected. This option is the most limiting but also the most secure.
After you make your selection, click Apply (top right of screen) to display the screens as
mentioned above. You can still customize these settings by adding/deleting inco ming or
outgoing ports, but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen.
Incoming These are the ingress ports; an ingress port is an incoming port, that is, a port through which
a data packet enters. If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, you must
define the ingress port for both ports. The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port
for the corresponding port listed on the left (its outgoing port). CPU refers to the Switch
management port. By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports. If it does not form a
VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port.
Outgoing These are the egress ports; an egress port is an outgoing port, that is, a port through which a
data packet leaves. If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, you must
define the egress port for both ports. CPU refers to the Switch management port. By default
it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports. If it does not fo rm a VLAN with a particular port then
the Switch cannot be managed from that port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done c o nfiguring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 9 VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
113
Figure 85 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example
To add more ports to this protocol based VLAN.
1Click the index number of the protocol based VLAN entry. Click 1.
2Change the value in the Port field to the next port you want to add.
3Click Add.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
114
CHAPTER 10
Static MAC Forward Setup
10.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on MAC addresses of devices on
your network.
Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding.
10.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Static MAC Forwarding screen (Section 10.2 on page 114) to assign static MAC
addresses for a port.
10.2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding
A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table. Static
MAC addresses do not age out. When you set up static MAC address rules, you are setting static
MAC addresses for a port. This may reduce the need for broadcasting.
Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allow only computers in the MAC address
table on a port to access the Switch. See Chapter 19 on page 165 for more information on port
security.
Click Advanced Application > Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the
configuration screen as shown.
Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Setup
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
115
Figure 86 Advanced Application > Static MAC Forwarding
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 43 Advanced Application > Static MAC Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate a rule without
deleting it by clearing this check box.
Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding
rule.
MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs.
Note: Static MAC addresses do not age out.
VID Enter the VLAN identification number.
Port Enter the port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be autom atically
forwarded.
Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses this rule if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values.
Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port.
Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active (Yes) or not
(No). You may temporarily deactivate a rule without dele ting it.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC
address-forwarding rule.
MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification num ber
to which the MAC address belongs.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group.
Port This field displays the port where the MAC address sh own in the next field will be forwarded.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
116
CHAPTER 11
Static Multicast Forward Setup
11.1 Static Multicast Forward Setup Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on multicast MAC addresses of
devices on your network.
Use these screens to configure static multicast address forwarding.
11.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Static Multicast Forward Setup screen (Section 11.2 on page 117) to configure rules to
forward specific multicast frames, such as streaming or control frames, to specific port(s).
11.1.2 What You Need To Know
A multicast MAC address is the MAC address of a member of a multicast group. A static multicast
address is a multicast MAC address that has been manually entered in the multicast table. Static
multicast addresses do not age out. Static multicast forwarding allows you (the administrator) to
forward multicast frames to a member without the member having to join the group first.
If a multicast group has no members, then the switch will either flood the multicast frames to all
ports or drop them. Figure 87 on page 116 shows such unknown multicast frames flooded to all
ports. With static multicast forwarding, you can forward these multicasts to port(s) within a VLAN
group. Figure 88 on page 117 shows frames being forwarded to devices connected to port 3. Figure
89 on page 117 shows frames being forwarded to ports 2 and 3 within VLAN group 4.
Figure 87 No Static Multicast Forwarding
Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
117
Figure 88 Static Multicast Forwarding to A Single Port
Figure 89 Static Multicast Forwarding to Multiple Ports
11.2 Configuring Static Multicast Forwarding
Use this screen to configure rules to forward specific multicast fr ames, such as streaming or control
frames, to specific port(s).
Click Advanced Application > Static Multicast Forwarding to display the configuration screen
as shown.
Figure 90 Advanced Application > Static Multicast Forwarding
Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
118
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 44 Advanced Application > Static Multicast Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate a rule without
deleting it by clearing this check box.
Name Type a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for this static multicast MAC
address forwarding rule. This is for identification only.
MAC Address Enter a multicast MAC address which identifies the multicast group. The last binary bit of the
first octet pair in a multicast MAC address must be 1. For example, the first octet pair
00000001 is 01 and 00000011 is 03 in hexadecimal, so 01:00:5e:00:00:0A and
03:00:5e:00:00:27 are valid multicast MAC addresses.
VID You can forward frames with matching destination MAC address to port(s) within a VLAN
group. Enter the ID that identifies the VLAN group here. If you don’t have a specific target
VLAN, enter 1.
Port Enter the port(s) where frames with destination MAC address that matched the entry above
are forwarded. You can enter multiple ports separated by (no space) comma (,) or hyphen (-
). For example, enter “3-5” for ports 3, 4, and 5. Enter “3,5,7” for ports 3, 5, and 7.
Add Click Add to sav e your rule t o the Swit ch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses this rule if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values.
Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Index Click an index nu mber to modify a static multicast MAC address rule for port(s).
Active This field displays whether a static multicast MAC address forwarding ru le is active (Yes) or
not (No). You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for a static multicast MAC
address-forwarding rule.
MAC Address This field displays the multicast MAC address that identifies a multicast group.
VID This field displays the ID number of a VLAN group to which frames containing the specified
multicast MAC address will be forwarded.
Port This field displays the port(s) within a identified VLAN group to which frames containing the
specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
119
CHAPTER 12
Filtering
12.1 Filtering Overview
This chapter discusses MAC address port filtering.
Filtering means sifting traffic going through the Switch based on the source and/or destination MAC
addresses and VLAN group (ID).
12.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Filtering screen (Section 12.2 on page 119) to create rules for traffic going through the
Switch.
12.2 Configure a Filtering Rule
Use this screen to create rules for tr affic going through the Switch. Click Advanced Application >
Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 91 Advanced Application > Filtering
Chapter 12 Filtering
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
120
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Ta ble 45 Advanced Application > Filtering
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule. Y ou may temporarily deactivate a rule
without deleting it by deselecting this check box.
Name Type a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for this rule. This is for
identification only.
Action Select Discard source to drop the frames from the sour ce MAC address (specified in the MAC
field). The Switch can still send frames to the MAC address.
Select Discard destination to drop the frames to the destination MAC address (specified in
the MAC address). The Switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address.
Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to/from the MAC address
specified in the MAC field.
MAC Type a MAC address in valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs.
VID Type the VLAN group identification number.
Add Click Add to save your change s to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to change the settings.
Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactiv at ed.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
MAC Address This field displays the source/destination MAC address with the VLAN identification number to
which the MAC address belongs.
VID This field displays the VLAN group identification number.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox(es).
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
121
CHAPTER 13
Spanning Tree Protocol
13.1 Spanning Tree Protocol Overview
The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) and
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) as defined in the following standards.
• IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
• IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
• IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
The Switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations (or trees). Ports can then be
assigned to the trees.
13.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the Spanning Tree Protocol Status screen (Section 13.2 on page 124) to view the STP
status in the different STP modes (RSTP, MRSTP or MSTP) you can configure on the Switch.
•Use the Spanning Tree Configuration screen (Section 13.3 on page 124) to activate one of the
STP modes on the Switch.
•Use the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol screen (Section 13.4 on page 125) to configure RSTP
settings.
•Use the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status screen (Section 13.5 on page 127) to view the
RSTP status .
•Use the Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol screen (Section 13.6 on page 129) to
configure MRSTP.
•Use the Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status screen (Section 13.7 on page 131) to
view the MRSTP status.
•Use the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol screen (Section 13.8 on page 132) to configure
MSTP.
•Use the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status screen (Section 13.9 on page 137) to view
the MSTP status.
13.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read on for concepts on STP that can help you configure the screens in this chapter.
(Rapid) Spanning Tree Protocol
(R)STP detects and breaks netw ork loops and provides backup links between switches, bridges or
routers. It allows a switch to interact with other (R)STP -compliant switches in your network to
ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
122
The Switch uses IEEE 802.1w RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) that allows faster convergence
of the spanning tree than STP (while also being backwards compatible with STP-only aware
bridges). In RSTP, topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from
the device that generates the topology ch ange. In STP, a longer delay is required as the device that
causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge that then notifies the network. Both RSTP
and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database. In RSTP, the port states are
Discarding, Learning, and Forwarding.
Note: In this user’s guide, “STP” refers to both STP and RSTP.
STP Terminology
The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree.
Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port. The recommended cost
is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached. The slower the media, the
higher the cost.
On each bridge, the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root. It is
the port on this switch with the lowest path cost to the root (the root path cost). If there is no root
port, then this switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network.
For each LAN segment, a designated bridge is selected. This bridge has the lowest cost to the root
among the bridges connected to the LAN.
How STP Works
After a bridge determines the lowest cost-spanning tree with STP, it enables the root port and the
ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs, and disables all other ports that participate
in STP. Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports, eliminating any
possible network loops.
STP-aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) periodically. When the bridged
LAN topology changes, a new spanning tree is constructed.
Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs (Bridge
Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the root bridge. If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a
predefined interval (Max Age), the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down. This
bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re-establish a
valid network topology.
Ta ble 46 STP Path Costs
LINK SPEED RECOMMENDED VALUE RECOMMENDED RANGE ALLOWED RANGE
Path Cost 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535
Path Cost 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535
Path Cost 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535
Path Cost 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535
Path Cost 1Gbps 4 3 to 10 1 to 65535
Path Cost 10Gbps 2 1 to 5 1 to 65535
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
123
STP Port States
STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping. A bridge port is not allowed to go directly
from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops.
Multiple RSTP
MRSTP (Multiple RSTP) is ZyXEL’s proprietary feature that is compatible with RSTP and STP. With
MRSTP, you can have more than one spanning tree on your S witch and assign port(s) to each tree.
Each spanning tree operates independently with its own bridge information.
In the following examp le, there are two RSTP instances (MRSTP 1 and MRSTP2) on switch A.
To set up MRSTP, activate MRSTP on the Switch and specify which port(s) belong to which spanning
tree.
Note: Each port can belong to one STP tree only.
Figure 92 MRSTP Network Example
Multiple STP
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1s) is backward compatible with STP/RSTP and
addresses the limitations of existing spanning tree protocols (STP and RSTP) in networks to include
the following features:
Ta ble 47 STP Port States
PORT STATE DESCRIPTION
Disabled STP is disabled (default).
Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed.
Listening All BPDUs are received and processed.
Note: The listening state does not exist in RSTP.
Learning All BPDUs are received and processed. Information frames are subm itted to the learni ng
process but not forwarded.
Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed. All information frames are received and forwarded.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
124
• One Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) that represents the entire network’s
connectivity.
• Grouping of multiple bridges (or switching devices) into regions that appear as one single bridge
on the network.
• A VLAN can be mapped to a specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance (MSTI). MSTI allows
multiple VLANs to use the same spanning tree.
• Load-balancing is possible as traffic from different VLANs can use distinct paths in a region.
13.2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen
The Spanning Tree Protocol status screen changes depending on what standard you choose to
implement on your network. Click Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol to see the
screen as shown.
Figure 93 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol
This screen differs depending on which STP mode (RSTP, MRSTP or MSTP) you configure on the
Switch. This screen is described in detail in the section that follows the configuration section for
each STP mode. Click Configuration to activate one of the STP standards on the Switch.
13.3 Spanning Tree Configuration
Use the Spanning Tree Configuration screen to activate one of the STP modes on the Switch.
Click Configuration in the Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol.
Figure 94 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Configuration
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
125
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
13.4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
Use this screen to configure RSTP settings, see Section 13.1 on page 121 for more information on
RSTP. Click RSTP in the Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol screen.
Figure 95 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > RSTP
Ta ble 48 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Spanning Tree
Mode You can activate one of the STP modes on the Switch.
Select Rapid Spanning Tree, Multiple Ra pid S p an nin g T ree or Multiple Spanning
Tree. See Section 13.1 on page 121 for background information on STP.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
126
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 49 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > RSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen (see Figure 96 on page 127).
Active Select this check box to activate RSTP. Clear this checkbox to disable RSTP.
Note: You must also activate Rapid Sp anning Tree in the Adva nced Application >
Spanning Tree Protocol > Configuration screen to enable RSTP on the Switch.
Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch, root port and designated port. The
switch with the highest priority (lowest numeric value) becomes the STP root switch. If all
switches have the same priority, the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become
the root switch. Select a value from the drop-down list box.
The lower the numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this bridge.
Bridge Priority determines the root bridge, which in turn determines Hello Time, Max Age
and Forwarding Delay.
Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units)
configuration message generations by the root switch. The allowed range is 1 to 10
seconds.
Max Age This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU
before attempting to reconfigure. All Switch ports (except for designated ports) should
receive BPDUs at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in
the last BPDU) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a
new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network. The
allowed range is 6 to 40 se conds.
Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch will wait before changing states. This
delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes
before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for
conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state; otherwise,
temporary data loops might result. The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds.
As a general rule:
Note: 2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age >= 2 * (Hello Time + 1)
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port.
Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a
computer. An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to f orwarding
state immediately without going through listening and learning stat es right after the port
is configured as an edge port or when its link st atus changes.
Note: An edge port becomes a non-edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data
Unit (BPDU).
Root Guard Select this check box to enable root guard on this port in order to prevent the switch(es)
attached to the port from becoming the root bridge.
With root guard enabled, a port is blocked when the Switch receives a superior BPDU on
it. The Switch allows traffic to pass through this port again when the switc h connected to
the port stops to send superior BPDUs.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
127
13.5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status
Click Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the
status screen as shown next. See Section 13.1 on page 121 for more information on RSTP.
Note: This screen is only available after you activate RSTP on the Switch.
Figure 96 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: RSTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Priority Configure the priority for each port here.
Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a
switch. Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first. The allowed range is
between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128.
Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is
recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the
media, the higher the cost - see Table 46 on page 122 for more information.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 49 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > RSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 50 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: RSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Configuration Click Configuration to specify w h ic h ST P mod e you want to activ ate . C lick RSTP to edi t
RSTP settings on the Switch.
Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree (the root bridge). Our Bridge is this switch.
This Switch may also be the root bridge.
Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address.
This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch.
Hello Time
(second) This is the time interval (in seconds) at which the root switch transmits a configuration
message. The root bridge determines H e llo Time, Max Age and Forwarding Delay.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
128
Max Age (second) This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch can wait without receiving a
configurati on message before attempting to reconfigure.
Forwarding Delay
(second) This is the time (in seconds) the root switch will wait before changing states (that is,
listening to learning to forwarding).
Note: The listening state does not exist in RSTP.
Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch.
Port ID This is the priority and n um ber of the port on the Switch through whi ch this Switch mu s t
communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree.
T opology Changed
Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured.
Time Since Last
Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured.
Port This field displays the number of the port on the Switch.
Port State This field displays the port state in STP.
•Discarding - The port does not forward/process received frames or learn MAC
addresses, but still listens for BPDUs.
•Learning - The port learns MAC addresses and processes BPDUs, but does not
forward frames yet.
•Forwarding - The port is operating normally. It learns MAC addresses, processes
BPDUs and forwards received frames.
Port Role This field displays the role of the port in STP.
•Root - A forwarding port on a non-root bridge, which has th e l owe st path c ost and is
the best port from the non-root bridge to the root bridge. A root bridge does not have
a root port.
•Designated - A forwarding port on the designated bridge for each connected LAN
segment. A designated bridge has the lowest path cost to the root bridge among the
bridges connected to the LAN segment. All the ports on a root bridge (root switch) are
designated ports.
•Alternate - A blocked port, which has a best alternate path to the root bridge. This
path is different from using the root port. The port moves to the forwarding state
when the designated port for the LAN segment fails.
•Backup - A blocked port, which has a backup/redundant path to a LAN segment
where a designated port is already connected when a switch has two links to the
same LAN segment.
•Disabled - Not strictly part of STP. The port can be disabled manually.
Designated Bridge
ID This field displays the identifier of the designated bridge to which this port belongs when
the port is a designated port. Otherwise, it displays the i dentifier of the designated bridge
for the LAN segment to which this port is connected.
Designated Port
ID This field displays the priority and number of the bridge port (on the designated bridge),
through which the designat ed bridge transmits the stored configuration messages.
Designated Cost This field displays the path cost to the LAN segment to which the port is connected when
the port is a designated port. Otherwise, it displays the path cost to the root bridge from
the designated port for the LAN segament to which this port is connected,
Root Guard State This field displays the state of the port on which root guard is enabled.
•Root-inconsistent - the Switch receives superior BPDUs on the port and blocks the
port.
•Forwarding - the Switch unbolcks and allows the port to forward frames again.
Ta ble 50 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: RSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
129
13.6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
To configure MRSTP, click MRSTP in the Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol
screen. See Section 13.1 on page 121 for more information on MRSTP.
Figure 97 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MRSTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 51 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MRSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status Click Status to display the MRSTP Status screen (see Figure 98 on page 131).
Tree This is a read only index number of the STP trees.
Active Select this check box to activate an STP tree. Clear this checkbox to disable an STP tree.
Note: You must also activate Multiple Rapid Spanning T ree in the Advanced Application
> Spanning Tree Protocol > Configuration screen to enable MRSTP on the Switch.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
130
Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch, root port and designated port. The
switch with the highest priority (lowest numeric value) becomes the STP root switch. If all
switches have the same priority, the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become
the root switch. Select a value from the drop-down list box.
The lower the numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this bridge.
Bridge Priority determines the root bridge, which in turn determines Hello T im e, M ax A ge
and Forwarding Delay.
Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units)
configuration message generations by the root switch. The allowed range is 1 to 10
seconds.
Max Age This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU
before attempting to reconfigure. All Switch ports (except for designated ports) should
receive BPDUs at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in
the last BPDU) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a
new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network. The
allowed range is 6 to 40 se conds.
Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch will wait before changing states. This
delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes
before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for
conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state; otherwise,
temporary data loops might result. The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds.
As a general rule:
Note: 2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age >= 2 * (Hello Time + 1)
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port.
Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a
computer. An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding
state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port
is configured as an edge port or when its link st atus changes.
Note: An edge port becomes a non-edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data
Unit (BPDU).
Root Guard Select this check box to enable root guard on this port in order to prevent the switch(es)
attached to the port from becoming the root bridge.
With root guard enabled, a port is blocked when the Switch receives a superior BPDU on
it. The Switch allows traffic to pass through this port again when the switch connected to
the port stops to send superior BPDUs.
Priority Configure the priority for each port here.
Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a
switch. Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first. The allowed range is
between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128.
Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is
recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the
media, the higher the cost - see Table 46 on page 122 for more information.
Tree Select which STP tree configuration this port should part icipate in.
Ta ble 51 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MRSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
131
13.7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status
Click Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the
status screen as shown next. See Section 13.1 on page 121 for more information on MRSTP.
Note: This screen is only available after you activate MRSTP on the Switch.
Figure 98 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MRSTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turn ed off or loses po wer, so use t he Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 51 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MRSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 52 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MRSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate. Click MRSTP to
edit MRSTP settings on the Switch.
Tree Select which STP tree configuration you want to view.
Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree (the root bridge). Our Bridge is this switch.
This Switch may also be the root bridge.
Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address.
This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch.
Hello Time
(second) This is the time interval (in seconds) at which the root switch transmits a configuration
message. The root bridge determines H e llo Time, Max Age and Forwarding Delay.
Max Age (second) This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch can wait without receiving a
configurati on message before attempting to reconfigure.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
132
13.8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
To configure MSTP, click MSTP in the Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol screen.
See Multiple STP on page 123 for more information on MSTP.
Forwarding Delay
(second) This is the time (in seconds) the root switch will wait before changing states (that is,
listening to learning to forwarding).
Note: The listening state does not exist in RSTP.
Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch.
Port ID This is the priority and n um ber of the port on the Switch through whi ch this Switch mu s t
communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree.
T opology Changed
Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured.
Time Since Last
Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured.
Port This field displays the number of the port on the Switch.
Port State This field displays the port state in STP.
•Discarding - The port does not forward/process received frames or learn MAC
addresses, but still listens for BPDUs.
•Learning - The port learns MAC addresses and processes BPDUs, but does not
forward frames yet.
•Forwarding - The port is operating normally. It learns MAC addresses, processes
BPDUs and forwards received frames.
Port Role This field displays the role of the port in STP.
•Root - A forwarding port on a non-root bridge, which has th e l owe st path c ost and is
the best port from the non-root bridge to the root bridge. A root bridge does not have
a root port.
•Designated - A forwarding port on the designated bridge for each connected LAN
segment. A designated bridge has the lowest path cost to the root bridge among the
bridges connected to the LAN segment. All the ports on a root bridge (root switch) are
designated ports.
•Alternate - A blocked port, which has a best alternate path to the root bridge. This
path is different from using the root port. The port moves to the forwarding state
when the designated port for the LAN segment fails.
•Backup - A blocked port, which has a backup/redundant path to a LAN segment
where a designated port is already connected when a switch has two links to the
same LAN segment.
•Disabled - Not strictly part of STP. The port can be disabled manually.
Designated Bridge
ID This field displays the identifier of the designated bridge to which this port belongs when
the port is a designated port. Otherwise, it displays the i dentifier of the designated bridge
for the LAN segment to which this port is connected.
Designated Port
ID This field displays the priority and number of the bridge port (on the designated bridge),
through which the designat ed bridge transmits the stored configuration messages.
Designated Cost This field displays the path cost to the LAN segment to which the port is connected when
the port is a designated port. Otherwise, it displays the path cost to the root bridge from
the designated port for the LAN segament to which this port is connected,
Root Guard State This field displays the state of the port on which root guard is enabled.
•Root-inconsistent - the Switch receives superior BPDUs on the port and blocks the
port.
•Forwarding - the Switch unbolcks and allows the port to forward frames again.
Ta ble 52 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MRSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
133
Figure 99 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 53 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Click Port to display the MSTP Port screen (see Figure 100 on page 136).
Status Click Status to display the MSTP Status screen (s ee Figure 101 on page 137).
Active Select this to activate MSTP on the Switch. Clear this to disable MSTP on the Switch.
Note: You must also activate Multiple Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application >
Spanning Tree Protocol > Configuration screen to enable MSTP on the Switch.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
134
Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units)
configuration message generations by the root switch. The allowed range is 1 to 10
seconds.
Max Age This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU
before attempting to reconfigure. All Switch ports (except for designated ports) should
receive BPDUs at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in
the last BPDU) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a
new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network. The
allowed range is 6 to 40 se conds.
Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch will wait before changing states. This
delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes
before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for
conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state; otherwise,
temporary data loops might result. The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds. As a general
rule:
Note: 2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age >= 2 * (Hello Time + 1)
Maximum hops Ente r the number of hops (between 1 and 255) in an MSTP region before the BPDU is
discarded and the port information is aged.
Configuration
Name Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 characters) of an MST region.
Revision Number Enter a number to identify a region’s configuration. Devices must have the same revision
number to belong to the same region.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Instance Use this section to configure MSTI (Multiple Spanning Tree Instance) settings.
Instance Enter the number you want to use to identify this MST instance on the Switch. The Switch
supports instance numbers 0-15.
Bridge Priority Set the priority of the Switch for the specific spanning tree instance. The lower the
number, the more likely the Switch will be chosen as the root bridge within the span ning
tree instance.
Enter priority values between 0 and 61440 in increments of 4096 (thus valid values are
4096, 8192, 12288, 16 384, 20 480, 245 76, 286 72, 327 68, 3686 4, 4096 0, 45056, 4 9152,
53248, 57344 and 61440).
VLAN Range Enter the start of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range
edit area in the Start field. Enter the end of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or
remove from the VLAN range edit area in the End field.
Next click:
•Add - to add this range of VLAN(s) to be mapped to the MST instance.
•Remove - to remove this range of VLAN(s) from being mapped to the MST instance.
•Clear - to remove all VLAN(s) from be ing mapped to this MST instance.
Enabled VLAN(s) This field displays which VLAN(s) are mapped to this MST instance.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Ta ble 53 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
135
13.8.1 MSTP Port Configuration
Click Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP > Port in the navigation panel
to display the status screen as shown next. See Multiple STP on page 123 for more information on
MSTP.
Active Select this check box to add this port to the MST instance.
Priority Configure the priority for each port here.
Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a
switch. Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first. The allowed range is
between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128.
Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is
recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the
media, the higher the cost - see Table 46 on page 122 for more information.
Add Click Add to save this MST instance to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
this change if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Instance This field displays the ID of an MST instance.
VLAN This field displays the VID (or VID ranges) to which the MST instance is mapped.
Active Port This field display the ports configured to participate in the MST instance.
Select an entry’s check box to select a s pecific entry.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the sele cted checkbox(es).
Ta ble 53 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
136
Figure 100 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 54 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MSTP Click MSTP to edit MSTP settings on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a
computer. An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to
forwarding state immediately without going through listening and learning states right
after the port is configured as an edge port or when its link status changes.
Note: An edge port becomes a non-edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data
Unit (BPDU).
Root Guard Select this che ck box to enable root guard on this port in order to prevent the switch(es)
attached to the port from becoming the root bridge.
With root guard enabled, a port is blocked when the Switch receives a superior BPDU on
it. The Switch allows traffi c to pass through this port again when the switch connected to
the port stops to send superior BPDUs.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
137
13.9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status
Click Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the
status screen as shown next. See Multiple STP on page 123 for more information on MSTP.
Note: This screen is only available after you activate MSTP on the Switch.
Figure 101 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MSTP
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configur ing.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 54 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP > Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
138
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 55 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate. Click MSTP to edit
MSTP settings on the Switch.
CST This section describes the Common Spanning Tree settings.
Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree (the root bridge). Our Bridge is this switch.
This Switch may also be the root bridge.
Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address.
This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch.
Hello Time
(second) This is the time interval (in seconds) at which the root switch transmits a configuration
message. The root bridge determines H e llo Time, Max Age and Forwarding Delay.
Max Age (second) This is the maximum time (in seconds) the Switch can wait without receiving a
configurati on message before attempting to reconfigure.
Forwarding Delay
(second) This is the time (in seconds) the root switch will wait before changing states (that is,
listening to learning to forwarding).
Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch.
Port ID This is the priority and n um ber of the port on the Switch through whi ch this Switch mu s t
communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree.
Configuration
Name This field displays the configuration name for this MST region.
Revision Number This field displays the revision number for this MST region.
Configuration
Digest A configuration digest is generated from the VLAN-MSTI mapping information.
This field displays the 16-octet signature that is included in an MSTP BPDU. This field
displays the digest when MSTP is activated on the sy stem.
T opology Changed
Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured.
Time Since Last
Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured.
Instance: These fields display the MSTI to VLAN mappin g. In other words, which VLANs run on each
spanning tree instance.
Instance This field displays the MSTI ID.
VLAN This field displays which VLANs are mapped to an MSTI.
MSTI Select the MST instance settings you want to view.
Bridge Root refers to the base of the MST instance. Our Bridge is this switch. This Switch may
also be the root bridge.
Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address.
This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch.
Internal Cost This is the path cost from the root port in this MST instance to the regional root switch.
Port ID This is the priority and n um ber of the port on the Switch through whi ch this Switch mu s t
communicate with the root of the MST instance.
Port This field displays the number of the port on the Switch.
Port State This field displays the port state in STP.
•Discarding - The port does not forward/process received frames or learn MAC
addresses, but still listens for BPDUs.
•Learning - The port learns MAC addresses and processes BPDUs, but does not
forward frames yet.
•Forwarding - The port is operating normally. It learns MAC addresses, processes
BPDUs and forwards received frames.
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
139
13.10 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
13.10.1 MSTP Network Example
The following figure shows a network example where two VLANs are configured on the two
switches. If the switches are using STP or RSTP, the link for VLAN 2 will be blocked as STP and RSTP
allow only one link in the network and block the redundant link.
Port Role This field displays the role of the port in STP.
•Root - A forwarding port on a non-root bridge, which has th e l owe st path c ost and is
the best port from the non-root bridge to the root bridge. A root bridge does not have
a root port.
•Designated - A forwarding port on the designated bridge for each connected LAN
segment. A designated bridge has the lowest path cost to the root bridge among the
bridges connected to the LAN segment. All the ports on a root bridge (root switch) are
designated ports.
•Alternate - A blocked port, which has a best alternate path to the root bridge. This
path is different from using the root port. The port moves to the forwarding state
when the designated port for the LAN segment fails.
•Backup - A blocked port, which has a backup/redundant path to a LAN segment
where a designated port is already connected when a switch has two links to the
same LAN segment.
•Disabled - Not strictly part of STP. The port can be disabled manually.
Designated Bridge
ID This field displays the identifier of the designated bridge to which this port belongs when
the port is a designated port. Otherwise, it displays the i dentifier of the designated bridge
for the LAN segment to which this port is connected.
Designated Port
ID This field displays the priority and number of the bridge port (on the designated bridge),
through which the designat ed bridge transmits the stored configuration messages.
Designated Cost This field displays the path cost to the LAN segment to which the port is connected when
the port is a designated port. Otherwise, it displays the path cost to the root bridge from
the designated port for the LAN segament to which this port is connected,
Root Guard State This field displays the state of the port on which root guard is enabled.
•Root-inconsistent - the Switch receives superior BPDUs on the port and blocks the
port.
•Forwarding - the Switch unbolcks and allows the port to forward frames again.
Ta ble 55 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
140
Figure 102 STP/RSTP Network Example
With MSTP, VLANs 1 and 2 are mapped to different spanning trees in the network. Thus tr affic from
the two VLANs travel on different paths. The following figure shows the network example using
MSTP.
Figure 103 MSTP Network Example
13.10.2 MST Region
An MST region is a logical grouping of multiple network devices that appears as a single device to
the rest of the network. Each MSTP-enabled device can only belong to one MST region. When
BPDUs enter an MST region, external path cost (of paths outside this region) is increased by one.
Internal path cost (of paths within this region) is increased by one when BPDUs trav erse the region.
Devices that belong to the same MST region are configured to have the same MSTP configuration
identification settings. These include the following parameters:
• Name of the MST region
• Revision level as the unique number for the MST region
A
B
VLAN 1 VLAN 2
A
B
VLAN 1 VLAN 2
Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
141
• VLAN-to-MST Instance mapping
13.10.3 MST Instance
An MST Instance (MSTI) is a spanning tree instance. VLANs can be configured to run on a specific
MSTI. Each created MSTI is identified by a unique number (known as an MST ID) known internally
to a region. Thus an MSTI does not span across MST regions.
The following figure shows an example where there are two MST regions. Regions 1 and 2 have 2
spanning tree instances.
Figure 104 MSTIs in Different Regions
13.10.4 Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST)
A CIST represents the connectivity of the entire network and it is equivalent to a spanning tree in
an STP/RSTP. The CIST is the default MST instance (MSTID 0). Any VLANs that are not members of
an MST instance are members of the CIST. In an MSTP-enabled network, there is only one CIST
that runs between MST regions and single spanning tree devices. A network may contain multiple
MST regions and other network segments running RSTP.
Figure 105 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
142
CHAPTER 14
Bandwidth Control
14.1 Bandwidth Control Overview
This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control
screen.
Bandwidth c ontrol mean s defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for inco ming and/or o ut-going
traffic flows on a port.
14.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Band w idth Control screen (Section 14.2 on page 142) to limit the bandwidth for traffic
going through the Switch.
14.2 Bandwidth Control Setup
Click Advanced Application > Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen
as shown next.
Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
143
Figure 106 Advanced Application > Bandwidth Control
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Ta ble 56 Advanced Application > Bandwidth Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box t o enable bandwidt h control on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first
to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to activate ingress rate limits on this port.
Ingress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the incoming traffi c
flow on a port.
Note: Ingress rate bandwidth control applies to layer 2 traffic only.
Active Select this check box to activate egress rate limits on this port.
Egress Rat e Specif y the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilo bits per second (Kbps) for the out-going traffic
flow on a port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Swit ch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
144
CHAPTER 15
Broadcast Storm Control
15.1 Broadcast Storm Control Overview
This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature.
Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast, multicast and destination lookup failure
(DLF) packets the Switch receives per second on the ports. When the maximum number of
allowable broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets is reached per second, the subsequent packets
are discarded. Enable this feature to reduce broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets in your
network. You can specify limits for each packet type on each port.
15.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Broadcast Storm Control screen (Section 15.2 on page 144) to limit the number of
broadcast, multicast and destination lookup failure (DLF) packets the Switch receives per second on
the ports.
15.2 Broadcast Storm Control Setup
Click Advanced Application > Broadcast Storm Control i n the navigation panel to display the
screen as shown next.
Chapter 15 Broadcast Storm Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
145
Figure 107 Advanced Application > Broadcast Storm Control
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 57 Advanced Application > Broadcast Storm Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the Switch. Clear this check box to
disable this feature.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Broadcast (pkt/
s) Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port receives per second.
Multicast (pkt/s) Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per second.
DLF (pkt/s) Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure (DLF) packets the port
receives per second.
Apply Click Apply to save y our changes t o the Swit ch’ s run-tim e memory. The Switch loses thes e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
146
CHAPTER 16
Mirroring
16.1 Mirroring Overview
This chapter discusses port mirroring setup screens.
Po rt mirroring allows you to copy a tr affic flow to a monitor port (the port y ou copy the tr affic to) in
order that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference.
16.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Mirroring screen (Section 16.2 on page 146) to select a monitor port and specify the
traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port.
16.2 Port Mirroring Setup
Click Ad vanced Applicatio n > Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen.
Use this screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port.
Chapter 16 Mirroring
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
147
Figure 108 Advanced Application > Mirroring
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 58 Advanced Application > Mirroring
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to activate port mi rroring on the Switch. Clear this check box to disable the
feature.
Monitor
Port The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in more detail without
interfering with the tr affic flow on the original port(s). Enter the port numb er of the moni tor port.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to
set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port.
Direction Specify the directi on of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop-down list box. Choices are
Egress (outgoing), Ingress (incoming) and Both.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
148
CHAPTER 17
Link Aggregation
17.1 Link Aggregation Overview
This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical, higher-
bandwidth link.
Link aggregation (trunking) is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher-capacity link.
You may want to trunk ports if for example, it is cheaper to use multiple lower-speed links than to
under-utilize a high-speed, but more costly, single-port link. However, the more ports you
aggregate then the fewer available ports you have. A trunk group is one logical link containing
multiple ports.
The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group.
17.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the Link Aggregation Status screen (Section 17.2 on page 149) to view ports you have
configured to be in the trunk group, ports that are currently tr ansmitting data as one logical link
in the trunk group and so on.
•Use the Link Aggregation Setting screen (Section 17.3 on page 151) to configure to enable
static link aggregation.
•Use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol screen (Section 17.3.1 on page 153) to enable
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).
17.1.2 What You Need to Know
The Switch supports both static and dynamic link aggregation.
Note: In a properly planned network, it is recommended to implement static link
aggregation only. This ensures increased network stability and control over the
trunk groups on your Switch.
See Section 17.4.1 on page 155 for a static port trunking example.
Dynamic Link Aggregation
The Switch adheres to the IEEE 802.3ad standard for static and dynamic (LACP) port trunking.
The IEEE 802.3ad standard describes the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for dynamically
creating and managing trunk groups.
When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port, the port can automatically negotiate with the
ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups. LACP also allows port redundancy, that
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
149
is, if an operational port fails, then one of the “standby” ports become operational without user
intervention. Please note that:
• You must connect all ports point-to-point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for
LACP trunking.
• LACP only works on full-duplex links.
• All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type, speed, duplex mode and flow
control settings.
Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network
topology loops.
Link Aggregation ID
LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information1:
17.2 Link Aggregation Status
Click Advanced Application > Link Aggregation in the navigation panel. Th e Link Aggregation
Status screen displays by default. See Section 17.1 on page 148 for more information.
Ta ble 59 Link Aggregation ID: Local Switch
SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER
0000 00-00-00-00-00-00 0000 00 0000
Ta ble 60 Link Ag gregation ID: Peer Switch
SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER
0000 00-00-00-00-00-00 0000 00 0000
1. Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group, not the individual port.
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
150
Figure 109 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 61 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Group ID This field displays the group ID to identify a trunk group, that is, one logical li nk containing
multiple ports.
Enabled Ports These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk
group.
The port number(s) displays only when this trunk group is activated and there is a port
belonging to this group.
Synchronized
Ports These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk
group.
Aggregator ID Link Aggregator ID consists of the following: system priority, MAC address, key, port priority
and port number. Refer to Link Aggregation ID on page 149 for more information on this
field.
The ID displays only when there is a port belonging to this trunk group and LACP is also
enabled for this group.
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
151
17.3 Link Aggregation Setting
Click Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting to display the
screen shown next. See Section 17.1 on page 148 for more information on link aggregation.
Criteria This shows the outgoing traffic distribution algorithm used in this trunk group. Packets from
the same source and/ or to the same destination are sent o ver the same link with in the trunk.
src-mac means the Swit ch distributes traffic based on the packet’s source MAC address.
dst-mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet’s destination MAC
address.
src-dst-mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet’s
source and destination MAC addresses.
src-ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet’s source IP address.
dst-ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet’s destination IP address.
src-dst-ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of th e packet’s
source and destination IP addresses.
Status This field displays how these ports were added to the trunk group. It displays:
•Static - if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group.
•LACP - if the ports are configured to join a trunk group via LACP.
Ta ble 61 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
152
Figure 110 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 62 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Link
Aggregation
Setting
This is the only screen you need to configure to enable static link aggregation.
Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group, that is, one logical link containing multiple
ports.
Active Select this option to activate a trunk group.
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
153
17.3.1 Link Aggregation Control Protocol
Click Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting > LACP to
display the screen shown next. See Dynamic Link Aggregation on page 148 for more information on
dynamic link aggregation.
Criteria Select the outgoing traffic distribution type. Packets from the same source and/or to the same
destination are sent over the same link within the trunk. By default, the Switch uses the src-
dst-mac distribution type. If the S witch is beh ind a rout er, the pack et’ s de stinati on or so urce
MAC address will be changed. In this case, set the Switch to distribute traffic based on its IP
address to make sure port trunking can work properly.
Select src-mac to distribute traffic based on the packet’s source MAC address.
Select dst-mac to distribute traffic based on the packet’s destination MAC address.
Select src-dst-mac to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet’s source and
destination MAC addresses.
Select src-ip to distribute traffic based on the packet’s source IP address.
Select dst-ip to distribute traffic based on the packet’s destination IP address.
Select src-dst-ip to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet’s source and
destination IP addresses.
Port This field displays the port number.
Group Select the trunk group to which a port belongs.
Note: When you enable the port security feature on the Switch and configure port security
settings for a port, you cannot include the port in an active trunk group.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are d one configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 62 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > L ink Aggregat ion Setting (c ontinued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
154
Figure 111 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting > LACP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 63 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting > LACP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Link
Aggregation
Control
Protocol
Note: Do not configure this screen unless you want to enable dynamic link aggregation.
Active Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
155
17.4 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
17.4.1 Static Trunking Example
This example shows you how to create a static port trunk group for ports 2-5.
1Make your physical connections - make sure that the ports that y ou want to belong to the trunk
group are connected to the same destination. The following figure shows ports 2-5 on switch A
connected to switch B.
System
Priority LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65,535. The switch with the lowest system
priority (and lowest port number if system priority is the same) becomes the LACP “server”.
The LACP “server” controls the operation of LACP setup. Enter a number to set the priority of
an active port using Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). The smaller the number, the
higher the priority level.
Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group, that is, one logical link containing multiple
ports.
LACP Active Select this option to enable LACP for a trunk.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first
to set the commo n settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
LACP Timeout Timeout is the time interval betwe en the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order
to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up. If a port does not respond after three
tries, then it is deemed to be “down” and is removed from the trunk. Set a sho r t timeout
(one second) for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk
group as soon as possible.
Select either 1 second or 30 second s.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 63 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting > LACP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 17 Link Aggregation
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
156
Figure 112 Trunking Example - Physical Connections
2Configure static trunking - Click Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link
Aggregation Setting. In this screen activate trunk group T1, select the traffic distribution
algorithm used by this group and select the ports that should belong to this group as shown in the
figure below. Click Apply when you are done.
Figure 113 Trunking Example - Configuration Screen
Your trunk group 1 (T1) configuration is now complete.
A
B
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
157
CHAPTER 18
Port Authentication
18.1 Port Authentication Overview
This chapter describes the IEEE 802.1x and MAC authentication methods.
Port authentication is a way to v alidate access to ports on the Switch to clients based on an external
server (authentication server). The Switch supports the following methods for port authentication:
•IEEE 802.1x2 - An authentication server validates access to a port based on a username and
password provided by the user.
•MAC Authentication - An authentication server validates access to a port based on the MAC
address and password of the client.
Both types of authentication use the RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC
2138, 2139) protocol to validate users. See RADIUS and TACACS+ on page 212 for more
information on configuring your RADIUS server settings.
Note: If you enable IEEE 802.1x authentication and MAC authentication on the same
port, the Switch performs IEEE 802.1x authentication first. If a user fails to
authenticate via the IEEE 802.1x method, then access to the port is denied.
18.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the Port Authentication screen (Section 18.2 on page 159) to display the links to the
configuration screens where you can enable the port authentication methods.
•Use the 802.1x scree n (Section 18.3 on page 159) to activate IEEE 802.1x security.
•Use the MAC Authen ticatio n screen (Section 18.4 on page 162) to activate MAC authentication.
18.1.2 What You Need to Know
IEEE 802.1x Authentication
The following figure illustrates how a client connecting to a IEEE 802.1x authentication enabled port
goes through a validation process. The Switch pr ompts the client for login information in the form of
a user name and password. When the client provides the login credentials, the Switch sends an
authentication request to a RADIUS server. The RADIUS server validates whether this client is
allowed access to the port.
2. At the time of writing, IEEE 802.1x is not supported by all operating systems. See your operating system documentation.
If your operating system does not support 802.1x, then you may need to install 802.1x client software.
Chapter 18 Port Authentication
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
158
Figure 114 IEEE 802.1x Authentication Process
18.1.3 MAC Authentication
MAC authentication works in a very similar w ay to IEEE 802.1x authentication. The main difference
is that the Switch does not prompt the client for login credentials. The login credentials are based
on the source MAC address of the client connecting to a port on the Switch along with a password
configured specifically for MAC authentication on the Switch.
Figure 115 MAC Authentication Process
New Connection
Authentication Request
Authentication Reply
1
4
5
Login Credentials
Login Info Request
3
2
Session Granted/Denied
New Connection
Authentication Request
Authentication Reply
1
2
3
Session Granted/Denied
Chapter 18 Port Authentication
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
159
18.2 Port Authentication Configuration
To enable port authentication, first activate the port authentication method(s) (both on the Switch
and the port(s)), then configure the RADIUS server settings in the AAA > RADIUS Server Setup
screen.
Click Advance d Applic ation > Port Authentication in the navigation panel to display the screen
as shown. Select a port authentication method’s link in the screen that appears.
Figure 116 Advanced Application > Port Authen tication
18.3 Activate IEEE 802.1x Security
Use this screen to activate IEEE 802.1x security. In the Port Authentication screen click 802.1x
to display the configuration screen as shown.
Figure 117 Ad vanced Application > Port Authentication > 802.1x
Chapter 18 Port Authentication
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
160
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
18.3.1 Guest VLAN
When 802.1x port authentication is enabled on the Switch and its ports, clients that do not have the
correct credentials are blocked from using the port(s). You can configure your Switch to have one
VLAN that acts as a guest VLAN. If you enable the guest VLAN (102 in the example) on a port (2 in
the example), the user (A in the example) that is not IEEE 802.1x capable or fails to enter the
correct username and password can still access the port, but traffic from the user is forwarded to
the guest VLAN. That is, unauthenticated users can ha ve access to limited network resources in the
same guest VLAN, such as the Internet. The rights gr anted to the Gu est VLAN depends on how the
network administrator configures switches or routers with the guest network feature.
Ta ble 64 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > 802.1x
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to permit 802.1x authentication on the Switch.
Note: You must first enable 802.1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each
port.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-b y-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this to permit 802.1x authentication on this port. You must first allow 802.1x
authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port.
Max-Req Specify the number of times the Switch tries to authenticate client(s) before sending
unresponsive ports to the Guest VLAN.
This is set to 2 by default. That is, the Switch attempts to authenticate a client twice. If the
client does not respond to the first authentication request, the Switch tries again. If the
client still does not respond to the second request, the S witch sends the client to the Guest
VLAN. The client needs to send a new request to be authenticated by the Switch again.
Reauth Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re-enter his or her username and password to
stay connecte d to the port.
Reauth-period
secs Specify the length of time required to pass before a client has to re-enter his or her
username and password to stay connected to the port.
Quiet-period
secs Specify the number of seconds the port remains in the HELD state and rejects further
authentication requests from th e co nnected client a ft er a failed authentication e xchan ge.
Tx-period secs Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits for cl ient’s response before re-sending an
identity request to the client.
Supp-Timeout
secs Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits for client’s response to a chall enge
request before sending another request.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory . The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your ch anges to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 18 Port Authentication
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
161
Figure 118 Guest VL AN Example
Use this screen to enable and assign a guest VLAN to a port. In the Port Authentication >
802.1x screen click Guest Vlan to display the configuration screen as shown.
Figure 119 Ad vanced Application > Port Authentication > 802.1x > Guest VLAN
Internet
2
VLAN 100
A
VLAN 102
Chapter 18 Port Authentication
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
162
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
18.4 Activate MAC Authentication
Use this screen to activate MAC authentication. In the Port Authentication screen click MAC
Authentication to display the configuration screen as shown.
Ta ble 65 Advanc ed Application > Port Authentication > 802.1x > Guest VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This field displays a port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this checkbox to enable the guest VLAN feature on this port.
Clients that fail authentication are placed in the guest VLAN and can receive limited
services.
Guest Vlan A guest VLAN is a pre-configured VLAN on the Switch that allows non-authenticated users
to access limited network resources through the Switch. Y ou must also enable IEEE 802.1x
authentication on the Switch and the associated ports. Enter the number that identifies the
guest VLAN.
Make sure this is a VLAN recognized in your network.
Host-mode Specify how the Switch authenticates users when more than one user connect to the port
(using a hub).
Select Multi-Host to authenticate only the first user that connects to this port. If the first
user enters the correct credential, any other users are allowed to access the port withou t
authentication. If the first user fails to enter the correct crede ntial, they are all put in the
guest VLAN. Once the first user who did authentication logs out or disconnects from the
port, rest of the users are blocked until a user does the authentication process again.
Select Multi-Secure to authenticate each user that connects to this port.
Multi-Secure
Num If you set Host-mode to Multi-Secure, specify the maximum number of users that the
Switch will authenticate on this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 18 Port Authentication
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
163
Figure 120 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > MAC Authentication
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 66 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > MAC Authentication
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to permit MAC authentication on the Switch.
Note: You must first enable MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each
port.
Name Prefix Type the prefix that is appended to all MAC addresses sent to the RADIUS server for
authentication. You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters.
If you leave this field blank, then only the MAC address of the client is forwarded to the
RADIUS server.
Password Type the password the Switch sends along with the MAC address of a client for
authentication with the RADIUS server. You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters.
Chapter 18 Port Authentication
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
164
Timeout Specify the amount of time before the Switch allows a client MAC address that fail s
authentication to try and authenticate again. Maximum time is 3000 seconds.
When a client fails MAC authentication, its MAC address is learned by the MAC address
table with a status o f denied. The timeout period you specify here is the time the MAC
address entry stays in the MAC address table until it is cleared. If you specify 0 for the
timeout value, the Swit ch uses the Aging Time configured in the Switch Set u p screen.
Note: If the Aging Time in the Switch Setup screen is set to a lower value, then it
supersedes this setting. See Section 8.5 on page 69.
Port This field displays a port number.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to permit MAC authentication on this port. You must first allow MAC
authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port.
Trusted-VLAN
List Enter the ID nu mber(s) of the tru sted VLAN( s) ( separ at ed by a com ma). If a c lient’s VLAN
ID is specified here, the client can access the port and the connected networks without
MAC authentication.
Apply Click Apply to sa ve yo ur changes to the Switch’ s run- time memory. The Sw itch loses th ese
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 66 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > MAC Authentication (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
165
CHAPTER 19
Port Security
19.1 Port Security Overview
This chapter shows you how to set up port security.
Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and/or configured static
MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch. The Switch can learn up to 16K MAC
addresses in total with no limit on individual ports other than the sum cannot exceed 16K.
For maximum port security, enable this feature, disable MAC address learning and configure static
MAC address(es) for a port. It is not recommended you disable port security together with MAC
address learning as this will result in many broadcasts. By default, MAC address learning is still
enabled even though the port security is not activated.
19.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Port Security screen (Section 19.2 on page 165) to enable port security and disable MAC
address learning. You can also enable the port security feature on a port.
19.2 Port Security Setup
Click Advanced Application > Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as
shown.
Chapter 19 Port Security
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
166
Figure 121 Advanced Application > Port Security
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 67 Advanced Application > Port Security
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port List Enter the number of the port(s) (separated by a comma) on which you want to enable port
security and disable MAC address learning. After you click MAC freeze, all previously
learned MAC addresses on the specified port(s) will become static MAC addresses and
display in the Static MAC Forwarding screen.
MAC freeze Click MAC freeze to have the Switch automatically select the Active check box es and clear
the Address Learning check boxes only for the ports specified in the P ort list.
Active Select this option to e nable port security on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to mak e some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first
to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Chapter 19 Port Security
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
167
Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port. The Switch forwards
packets whose MAC address(es) is in the MAC address table on this port. Packets with no
matching MAC address(es) are dropped.
Clear this check box to disable the port security feature. The Switch forwards all pack ets on
this port.
Address
Learning MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffi c. For M AC addres s learni ng to occu r
on a port, the port itself must be active with address learning enabled.
Limited Number
of Learned MAC
Address
Use this field to limit the number of (dynamic) MAC addresses that may be learned on a
port. For example, if you set this field to "5" on port 2, then only the devices with these five
learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time. A sixth device would have to
wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out. MAC address aging out time can
be set in the Switch Setup screen. The valid range is from “0” to “16384”. “0” means this
feature is disabled.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are d one configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 67 Advanced Application > Port Security (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
168
CHAPTER 20
Time Range
20.1 Time Range Overview
You can set up one-time and recurring schedules for time-oriented features, such as PoE and
classifier. The UAG supports one-time and recurring schedules. One-time schedules are effective
only once, while recurring schedules usually repeat. Both types of schedules are based on the
current date and time in the Switch.
20.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Time Range screen (Section 20.2 on page 168) to view or define a schedule on the
Switch.
20.2 Configuring Time Range
Click Advanced Application > Time Range in the navigation panel to display the screen as
shown.
Figure 122 Advanced Application > Time Range
Chapter 20 Time Range
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
169
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 68 Advanced Application > Time Range
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes.
Type Select Absolute to create a one-time schedule. One-time schedules begin on a specific
start date and time and end on a specific stop date and time. One-time sch edules are useful
for long holidays and vacation periods.
Alternatively, select Periodic to c reate a r ecurring sc hedule. R ecurring schedules begin at a
specific start time and end at a specific stop time on selected days of the week (Sunday,
Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thu rsday, Friday, and Saturday). Recurring schedules are
useful for defining the workday and off-work hours.
Absolute This section is available only when you set Type to Absolute.
Start Specify the year, month, day, hour and mi nute when the schedule begins.
End Specify the year, month, day, hour and minute when the sch edule ends.
Periodic This section is available only when you set Type to Periodic.
Select the first option if you want to define a recurr ing schedule for a consecutive time
period. Y ou then select the day of the week, hour and minute when the schedule begins and
ends respectively.
Select the second option if you want to define a recurring schedule for multiple non-
consecutive time periods. You need to select each day of the week the recurring schedule is
effective. Y ou also need to specify the hour and minute when the schedule begins and ends
each day. The schedule begins and ends in the same day.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses powe r, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to change the
settings.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
Type This field displays the type of the schedule.
Range This field displays the the time period(s) to which this schedule applies.
Select an entry’ s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox(es).
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
170
CHAPTER 21
Classifier
21.1 Classifier Overview
This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the Switch. It also
discusses Quality of Service (QoS) and classifier concepts as employed by the Switch.
21.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the Classifier Status screen (Section 21.2 on page 170) to view the classifiers configured
on the Switch and how many times the traffic matches the rules.
•Use the Classifier Configuration screen (Section 21.3 on page 171) to define the classifiers
and view a summary of the classifier configuration. After you define the classifier, you can specify
actions (or policy) to act upon the traffic that matches the rules.
•Use the Classifier Global Setting screen (Section 21.4 on page 176) to configure the match
order and enable logging on the Switch.
21.1.2 What You Need to Know
Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network's ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and
the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is
equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network
performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-
demand.
A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address,
destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming port number. For
example, you can configure a classifier to select tr affic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet)
to form a flow .
Configure QoS on the Switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network
performance. Setting up QoS involves two separate steps:
1Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows.
2Configure policy rules to define actions to be performed on a classified traffic flow (refer to Chapter
22 on page 179 to configure policy rules).
21.2 Classifier Status
Use this screen to to view the classifiers configured on the Switch and how many times the traffic
matches the rules.
Chapter 21 Classifier
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
171
Click Advanced Application > Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration
screen as shown.
Figure 123 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
21.3 Classifier Configuration
Use the Classifier Configuration screen to define the classifiers. After you define the classifier,
you can specify actions (or policy) to act upon the tr affic that matches the rules. To configure policy
rules, refer to Chapter 22 on page 179.
In the Classifier Status screen click Classifier Configuration to display the configur ation screen
as shown.
Ta ble 69 Adva nced Application > Classifier > Classif ier Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to edit the rule.
Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated.
W eight This field displays the rule’ s weight. This is to indicate a rule’s priority when the match order
is set to manual in the Classifier > Classifier Global Setting screen.
The higher the number, the higher the rule’s priority.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
Match Count This field displays the number of times a rule is applied. It displays '-' if the rule does not
have count enabled.
Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule’ s settings.
Clear Select Classifier, enter a classifier rule name and then click Clear to erase the recorded
statistical information for that classifier, or select Any to clear statistics for all classifiers.
Chapter 21 Classifier
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
172
Figure 124 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration
Chapter 21 Classifier
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
173
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 70 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable this rule.
Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes.
Weight Enter a number between 0 and 65535 to specify the rule’s weight. When the match order is in
manual mode in the Classifier Global Setting screen, a higher weight means a higher priority.
Log Select this option to have the Switch create a log message when the rule is applied and record
the number of matched packets in a particular time interval.
Note: Make sure you also enable logging in the Classifier Global Setting screen.
Count Select this option to have the Switch count how many times the rule is appli ed.
Time
Range Select the name of the p re-confi gued sc hedule that you want to apply to the rule. The rule will be
active only at the scheduled date and/or time.
If you select None, the rule will be active all the time.
Imgress Port
Port Type the port number to which the rule should be applied. You may choose one port only or all
ports (Any).
Trunk Select Any to apply the rule to all trunk groups.
To specify a trunk group, select the second c hoi ce and type a trunk group ID.
Layer 2
Specify the fields below to configure a layer 2 classifier.
VLAN Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and specify the source
VLAN ID in the field provided.
Priority Select Any to classify traffic from any priority level or select the second option and specify a
priority level in the field provided.
Ethernet
Type Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethernet type number in hexadecimal
value. Refer to Table 72 on page 175 for information.
Source
MAC
Address Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses.
To specify a source, select MAC/Mask to enter the source MAC address of the packet in valid
MAC address format (six hexadecimal character pairs) and type the mask for the specified MAC
address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address should match.
Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal
character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to
ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a pac ket with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12 :34:56 matches this criteria. If y ou
leave the Mask field blank, the Switch auto matically sets the mask to ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff.
Destination
MAC
Address Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses.
To specify a desti nation, sele ct MAC/Mask to enter the destination MAC address of the packet in
valid MAC address format (six hexadecimal character pairs) and type the mask for the specified
MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address should match.
Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal
character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to
ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a pac ket with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12 :34:56 matches this criteria. If y ou
leave the Mask field blank, the Switch auto matically sets the mask to ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff.
Chapter 21 Classifier
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
174
Layer 3
Specify the fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier.
DSCP
IPv4/IPv6
Select Any to classify traffic from any DSCP or select the second option and specify a DS CP
(DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided.
Precedenc
eSelect Any to classify traffic from any precedence or select the second option and specify an IP
Precedence (the first 3 bits of of the 8-bit ToS field) value between 0 and 7 in the field provided.
ToS Select Any to class ify tr affic from an y ToS or select the sec ond option an d specify Type of Service
(the last 5 bits of the 8-bit ToS field) value between 0 and 255 in the field provided.
IP
Protocol Select an IPv4 protocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in decimal value.
Refer to Table 73 on page 176 for more information.
You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type. This means that the Switch will pick out
the packets that are sent to establish TCP connections.
IPv6 Next
Header Select an IPv6 protocol type or select Other and enter an 8-bit next header in the IPv6 packet.
The Next Header field is si mila r to the IP v4 Prot ocol fi el d. The IPv6 pr otocol number ranges from
1 to 255.
You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type. This means that the Switch will identify
packets that initiate or acknowledge (establish) TCP connec tions.
Source
IP
Address/
Address
Prefix
Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask.
A subnet mask can be represented in a 32-bit notation. For example, the subnet mask
“255.255.255.0” can be represented as “11111111.11111111.11111111.00000000”, and
counting up the number of ones in this case results in 24.
Socket
Number Note: You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket
numbers.
Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP/UDP protocol port numbers or select the se cond option
and enter a TCP/UDP protocol port number. Refer to Table 74 on page 176 for more
information.
Destination
IP
Address/
Address
Prefix
Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask.
Socket
Number Note: You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket
numbers.
Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP/UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option
and enter a TCP/UDP protocol port number. Refer to Table 74 on page 176 for more
information.
Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch’s
run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the
Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you
are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaul ts.
Ta ble 70 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 21 Classifier
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
175
21.3.1 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration Summary
To view a summary of the classifier configuration, scroll down to the summary table at the bottom
of the Classifier screen. To change the settings of a rule, click a number in the Index field.
Note: When two rules conflict with each other, a higher layer rule has priority over lower
layer rule.
Figure 125 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration: Summary Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol
number.
Ta ble 71 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configur ation: Sum mary Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to edit the rule.
Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated.
Weight The field displays the priority of the rule when the match order is in manual mode. A higher
weight means a higher priority.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule’s settings.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check bo x in the tabl e
heading row to se lect all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 72 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Numbers
ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER
IP ETHII 0800
X.75 Internet 0801
NBS Internet 0802
ECMA Internet 0803
Chaosnet 0804
X.25 Level 3 0805
XNS Compat 0807
Banyan Systems 0BAD
BBN Simnet 5208
IBM SNA 80D5
AppleTalk AARP 80F3
Chapter 21 Classifier
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
176
In the Internet Protocol there is a field, called “Protocol”, to identify the next level protocol. The
following table shows some common protocol types and the corresponding protocol number. Refer
to http://www.iana.org/assignments/protocol-numbers for a complete list.
Some of the most common TCP and UDP port numbers are:
See Appendix B on page 419 for information on commonly used port numbers.
21.4 Classifier Global Setting
Use this screen to configure the match order and enable logging on the Switch. In the Classifier
Configuration screen click Classifier Global Setting to display the configuration screen as
shown.
Figure 126 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration > Classifier Global Setting
Ta ble 73 Common IP Protocol Types and Protocol Numbers
PROTOCOL TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER
ICMP 1
TCP 6
UDP 17
EGP 8
L2TP 115
Ta ble 74 Common TCP and UDP Port Numbers
PROTOCOL NAME TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER
FTP 21
Telnet 23
SMTP 25
DNS 53
HTTP 80
POP3 110
Chapter 21 Classifier
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
177
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
21.5 Classifier Example
The following screen shows an example where you configure a classifier that identifies all traffic
from MAC address 00:50:ba:ad:4f:81 on port 2.
After you have configured a classifier, you can configure a policy (in the Policy screen) to define
action(s) on the classified traffic flow.
Ta ble 75 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration > Classifier Global Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Match
Order Select manual to have classi fier rules applied accor ding to the weight of each rule you c onfigured
in Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration.
Alternatively, select auto to have classifier rules applied according to the layer of the item
configured in the rule. Layer-4 items have the highest priority, and layer-2 items has the lowest
priority. For example, you configure a layer-2 item (VLAN ID) in classifier A and configure a layer-
3 item (source IP address) in classifier B. When an incoming packet matches both classifier rules,
classifier B has priority over classifer A.
Logging
Active Select this to allow the Switch to create a log when packets match a classifier rule during a
defined time interval.
Interval Select the length of the time period (in seconds) to count matched packets for a classifier rule.
Enter an integer from 0-65535. 0 means that no logging is done.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-ti me memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 21 Classifier
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
178
Figure 127 Classifier: Example
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
179
CHAPTER 22
Policy Rule
22.1 Policy Rules Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules.
A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria (refer to Chapter 21 on
page 170 for more information). A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested
treatment in the network.
22.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Policy screen (Section 22.2 on page 179) to enable the policy and display the active
classifier(s) you configure in the Classifier screen.
22.2 Configuring Policy Rules
You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen. Refer to Section 21.3 on page 171 for
more information.
Click Advanced Applications > Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as
shown.
Chapter 22 Policy Rule
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
180
Figure 128 Advanced Application > Policy Rule
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 76 Advanced Application > Policy Rule
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable the policy.
Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes.
Classifier(s) This field displays the active classifier(s) you configure in the Classifier screen.
Select the cl assifier(s) to whic h this policy rule applies. To select more than one classifier,
press [SHIFT] and select the choices at the same time.
Parameters
Set the fields below for this policy. You only have to set the field(s) that is related to the action(s) you
configure in the Action field.
General
VLAN ID Specify a VLAN ID number.
Egress Port Type the number of an outgoing port.
Priority Specify a priority level.
Rate Limit You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow. Traffic that exceeds the
maximum bandwidth allocated (in cases where the network is congested) is dropped.
Chapter 22 Policy Rule
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
181
Bandwidth Specify the bandwidth in kilobit per second (Kbps). Enter a number between 64 and
1000000.
Action
Specify the action(s) the Switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow.
Note: You can specify only one action (pair) in a policy rule. To have the Switch take multiple actions on the
same traffic flow, you need to define multiple classifiers with the same criteria and apply different policy
rules.
Say you have several classifiers that identify the same traffic flow and you specify a different policy rule for
each. If their policy actions conflict (Discard the packet, Send the packet to the egress port and Rate
Limit), the Switch only applies the policy rules with the Discard the packet and Send the packet to the
egress port actions depending on the classifier names. The longer the classifier name, the higher the
classifier priority. If two classifier names are the same length, the bigger the character, the higher the
classifier priority. The lowercase letters (such as a and b) have higher priority than the capitals (such as A and
B) in the classifier name. For example, the classifier with the name of class 2, class a or class B takes priority
over the classifie r with the name of clas s 1 or class A.
Let’s say you set two classifiers (Class 1 a nd Class 2) and both identify all traffic from MAC address
11:22:33:44:55:66 on port 3.
If Policy 1 applies to Class 1 and the action is to drop the packet s, Policy 2 applies to Class 2 and the action is
to forward the packets to the egress port, the Switch will forward the packets.
If Policy 1 applies to Class 1 and the action is to drop the packet s, Policy 2 applies to Class 2 and the action is
to enable bandwidth limitation, the Switch will discard the packet s immediately.
If Policy 1 applies to Class 1 and the action is to forward the packets to the egress port, Policy 2 applies to
Class 2 and the action is to enable bandwidth limitation, the Switch will forward the packets.
Forwarding Select No change to forward the packets.
Select Discard the packet to dro p the packets.
Priority Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames.
Select Set the packet’s 802.1 priority to replace the packet’ s 802.1 priority field with the
value you set in the Priority field.
Outgoing Select Send the packet to the mirror port to send the packet to the mirror port.
Select Send the packet to the egre ss port to send the packet to the egress port.
Select Set the packet's VLAN ID to replace the VLAN ID of th e packe ts with th e v alue y ou
configure in the VLAN ID field.
Rate Limit Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow(s).
Add Click Add to inset the entry to the sum mary table below and save your changes to the
Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power,
so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile
memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays the policy index number. Click an index number to edit the policy.
Active This field displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated.
Name This field displays the name you have assigned to this policy.
Classifier(s) This field displays the name(s) of the classifier to which this policy applies.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Ta ble 76 Advanced Application > Policy Rule (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 22 Policy Rule
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
182
22.3 Policy Example
The figure below shows an example Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit bandwidth
on a traffic flow classified using the Example classifier (refer to Section 21.5 on page 177).
Figure 129 Policy Example
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 76 Advanced Application > Policy Rule (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
183
CHAPTER 23
Queuing Method
23.1 Queuing Method Overview
This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported.
Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion. Use the
Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic. See also Priority
Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802.1p Priority in Port Set up for related information.
23.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Queueing Method screen (Section 23.2 on page 184) set priorities for the queues of the
Switch. This distributes bandwidth across the different traffic queues.
23.1.2 What You Need to Know
Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual
source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth.
Strictly Priority Queuing
Strictly Priority Queuing (SPQ) services queues based on priority only. As traffic comes into the
Switch, traffic on the highest priority queue, Q7 is transmitted first. When that queue empties,
traffic on the next highest-priority queue, Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties, and then traffic is
transmitted on Q5 and so on. If higher priority queues never empty, then traffic on lower priority
queues never gets sent. SPQ does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements.
Weighted Fair Queuing
Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue's minimum bandwidth based on its
bandwidth weight (portion) (the number you configure in the Weight field) when there is traffic
congestion. WFQ is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle. Queues with
larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights. This queuing
mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic
queues. By default, the weight for Q0 is 1, for Q1 is 2, for Q2 is 3, and so on.
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR)
Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has
more traffic than it can handle. A queue is a given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the
incoming traffic on that port. This queue then mo ves to the back of the list. The next queue is given
Chapter 23 Queuing Method
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
184
an equal amount of bandwidth, and then mov es to the end of the list; and so on, depending on the
number of queues being used. This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty.
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR) uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling, but
services queues based on their priority and queue weight (the number you configure in the queue
Weight field) rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth. WRR is activated only when a port has
more traffic than it can handle. Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with
smaller weights. This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available
bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied.
23.2 Configuring Queuing
Use this screen to set priorities for the queues of the Switch. This distributes bandwidth across the
different traffic queues.
Click Advanced Application > Queuing Met hod in the navigation panel.
Figure 130 Advanced Application > Queuing Method
Chapter 23 Queuing Method
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
185
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 77 Advanced Application > Queuing Method
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This label shows the port you are configuring.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to
set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Method Select SPQ (Strictly Priority Queuing), WFQ (Weighted Fair Queuing) or WRR (Weighted Round
Robin).
Strictly Priority Queuing services queues based on priority only. When the highest priority queue
empties, traffic on the next highest -priority queue begins. Q7 has the highest priority and Q0 the
lowest.
Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue's minimum bandwidth based on their
bandwidth portion (weight) (t he number you configure in the Weight field). Queues with larger
weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights.
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue
weight (the number you configure in the queue Weight field). Queues with larger weights get
more service than queues with smaller weights.
Weight When you select WFQ or WRR enter the queue weight here. Bandwidth is divided across the
different traffic queues according to their weights.
Hybrid-
SPQ
Lowest-
Queue
This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR.
Select a queue (Q0 to Q7) to ha ve th e Swi tch use SPQ to service t he subsequ ent queue( s) after
and including the specified queue for the port. For example, if you select Q5, the Switch services
traffic on Q5, Q6 and Q7 using SPQ.
Select None to always use WFQ or WRR for the port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-ti me memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top nav igation panel to sa ve
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
186
CHAPTER 24
Multicast
24.1 Multicast Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features.
Traditionally , IP packets are tr ansmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender to 1 recipient)
or Broadcast (1 sender to everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group
of hosts on the network.
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish
membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Refer to RFC 1112, RFC 2236
and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
24.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the Multicast Setup screen (Section 24.2 on page 190) to display the links to the
configuration screens where you can configure IPv4 or IPv6 multicast settings.
•Use the IPv4 Multicast Status screen (Section 24.3 on page 190 ) to view multicast group
information.
•Use the IGMP Snooping screen (Section 24.3.1 on page 191) to enable IGMP snooping to
forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group.
•Use the IPv6 Multicast Status screen (Section 24. 4 on page 196) to view multicast group
information,
•Use the MLD Snooping-proxy screen (Section 24.4.1 on page 197) to enable the upstream port
to report group changes to a connected multicast router and forward MLD messages to other
upstream ports.
•Use the MVR screens (Section 24.5 on page 204) to create multicast VLANs and select the
receiver port(s) and a source port for each multicast VLAN.
24.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read on for concepts on Multicasting that can help you configure the screens in this chapter.
IP Multicast Addresses
In IPv4, a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts (multicast
group) in a different subnetwork. A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group, not
individual receiving devices. IP addresses in the Class D range (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255) are
used for IP multicasting. Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes
(see the IANA website for more information).
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
187
IGMP Snooping
A Switch can passively snoop on IGMP packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches
and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast gr oup membership. It checks IGMP packets passing
through it, picks out the group registration information, and configures multicasting accordingly.
IGMP snooping allows the Switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually
configure them.
The Switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups (that it has learned from IGMP
snooping or that you have manually configured) to ports that are members of that group. IGMP
snooping generates no additional network traffic, allowing you to significantly reduce multicast
traffic passing through your Switch.
IGMP Snooping and VLANs
The Switch can perform IGMP snooping on up to 16 VLANs. You can configure the Switch to
automatically learn multicast group membership of any VLANs. The Switch then performs IGMP
snooping on the first 16 VLANs that send IGMP packets. This is referred to as auto mode.
Alternatively, you can specify the VLANs that IGMP snooping should be performed on. This is
referred to as fixed mode. In fixed mode the Switch does not learn multicast group membership of
any VLANs other than those explicitly added as an IGMP snooping VLAN.
MLD Snooping-proxy
MLD snooping-proxy is a ZyXEL-propriet ary feature. IPv6 MLD proxy allows only one upstream
interface on a switch, while MLD snooping-proxy supports more than one upstream port on a
switch. The upstream port in MLD snooping-proxy can report group changes to a connected
multicast router and forward MLD messages to other upstream ports. This helps especially when
you want to have a network that uses STP to provide backup links between switches and also
performs MLD snooping and proxy functions. MLD snooping-proxy, like MLD proxy, can minimize
MLD control messages and allow better network performance.
In MLD snooping-proxy, if one upstream port is learned via snooping, all other upstream ports on
the same device will be added to the same group. If one upstream port requests to leave a group,
all other upstream ports on the same device will also be removed from the group.
In the following MLD snooping-proxy example, all connected upstream ports (1 ~7) are treated as
one interface. The connection between ports 8 and 9 is blocked by STP to break the loop. If there is
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
188
one query from a router (X) or MLD Done or Report message from any upstream port, it will be
broadcast to all connected upstream ports.
MLD Messages
A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to u pdate the multicast
forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report
message for that address.
An MLD Done message is similar to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave a
multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. If the leav e mode is not set to
Immediate, the router or switch sends a group-specific query to the port on which the Done
message is received to determine if other devices connected to this port should remain in the
group.
MVR Overview
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is designed for applications (such as Media-on-Demand (MoD))
that use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring-based service prov ider network.
MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the
network. While isolated in different subscriber VLANs, connected devices can subscribe to and
unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN. This improves bandwidth utilization
with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management.
MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are
configured under MVR. Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP
snooping.
The following figure shows a network example. The subscriber VLAN (1, 2 and 3) information is
hidden from the streaming media server, S. In addition, the multicast VLAN information is only
visible to the Switch and S.
1
2
3
4
56
7
8
9
X
Done
Query
Report
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
189
Figure 131 MVR Network Example
Types of MVR Ports
In MVR, a source port is a port on the Switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a
multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic. Once configured, the Switch
maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group.
MVR Modes
You can set your Switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode.
In dynamic mode, the Switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices
(such as multicast routers or servers) in the multicast VLAN. This allows the multicast devices to
update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver
ports.
In compatible mode, the Switch does not send any IGMP reports. In this case, you must manually
configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN.
How MVR Wo rks
The following figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device (such as a
computer) in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server, S, via the Switch.
Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the Switch.
When the subscriber selects a television channel, computer A sends an IGMP report to the Switch
to join the appropriate multicast group. If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR
multicast group addresses on the Switch, an entry is created in the forwarding table on the S witch.
This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast
traffic.
When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer, an IGMP leave message is sent
to the Switch to leave the multicast group . The Switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port
(in this case, an uplink port on the Switch). If there is another subscriber device connected to this
port in the same subscriber VLAN, the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination
for the multicast tr affic. Otherwise, the Switch removes the receiver port from the forw arding table.
SMulticast VLAN
VLAN 1
VLAN 2
VLAN 3
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
190
Figure 132 MVR Multicast Television Example
24.2 Multicast Setup
Use this screen to configure IGMP for IPv4 or MLD for IPv6 and set up multicast VLANs. Click
Advanced Application > Multicast in the navigation panel.
Figure 133 Advanced Application > Multicast Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
24.3 IPv4 Multicast Status
Click Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast to display the screen as shown. This
screen shows the IPv4 multicast group information. See Section 24.1 on page 186 for more
information on multicasting.
Figure 134 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast
SMulticast VLAN
VLAN 1
A
Ta ble 78 Advanced Application > Multicast Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv4 Multicast Click the link to open screens where you can configure IGMP snooping and IGMP filt ering
for IPv4.
IPv6 Multicast Click the link to open screens where you can configure MLD snooping- proxy and MLD
filtering for IPv6.
MVR Click the link to open screens where you can create multicast VLANs.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
191
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
24.3.1 IGMP Snooping
Click the IGMP Snooping link in the Advanced Applicati on > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast
screen to display the screen as shown. See Section 24.1 on page 186 for more information on
multicasting.
Figure 135 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping
Ta ble 79 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This is the index number of the entry.
VID This field displays the multic ast VLAN ID.
Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group.
Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
192
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 80 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Snooping Use these settings to configure IGMP snooping.
Active Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports
that are members of that group.
Querier Select this option to allow the Switch to send IGMP General Query messages to the VLANs
with the mult icast hosts attached.
Host Timeout Specify the time (from 1 to 16 711 450) in seconds that elapse s before the Switch
removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from
the port.
802.1p
Priority Select a prior ity level (0-7) to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP
control packets. Otherwise, select No-Change to not replace the priority.
IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port
can join.
If you enable IGMP filtering, you must create and assign IGMP filtering profiles for the
ports that you want to allow to join multicast groups.
Unknown
Multicast Frame Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame.
Select Drop to discard the frame(s). Select Flooding to send the frame(s) to all ports.
Reserved
Multicast Group The IP address range of 224.0.0.0 to 224.0.0.255 are reserved for multicasting on the
local network only. For example, 224.0. 0.1 is for all hosts on a local network segmen t and
224.0.0.9 is used to send RIP routing information to all RIP v2 routers on the same
network segment. A multicast router will not forward a packet with the destination IP
address within this r ange to oth er networks. See th e IANA web site for more inform ation.
The layer-2 multicast MAC addresses used by Cisco layer-2 protocols,
01:00:0C:CC:CC:CC and 01:00:0C:CC:CC:CD, are also included in this grou p.
Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives a frame wi th a reserved multicast
address. Select Drop to discard the frame(s). Select Flooding to send the frame(s) to all
ports.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Immed. Leave Select this option to set the Switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an
IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port.
Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port.
Normal Leave Enter an IGMP normal leave ti meout valu e (from 200 to 6,348,800) in miliseconds. Select
this option to ha ve the Switc h use this timeout to u pdate the forwarding table for t he port.
In normal leave mode, when the Switch receiv es an IGMP leave message from a host on a
port, it forwards the me ssage to the multi cast router. The multicast rout er then sends out
an IGMP Group-Specific Query (GSQ) message to determine whether other hosts
connected to the port should remain in the specific multicast group. The Switch forwards
the query message to a ll hosts connected to the port and waits for IGMP reports from
hosts to update the forwarding table.
This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an
IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port
from a host.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
193
24.3.2 IGMP Snooping VLAN
Click Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast in the navigation panel. Click the
IGMP Snooping link and then the IGMP Snooping VLAN link to display the screen as shown. See
IGMP Snooping and VLANs on page 187 for more information on IGMP Snooping VLAN.
Fast Leave Enter an IGMP fast leave timeout value (from 200 to 6,348,800) in miliseconds. Select
this option to ha ve the Switc h use this timeout to u pdate the forwarding table for t he port.
In fast leave mode, right after receiving an IGMP leav e me ssage from a host on a port,
the Switch itse lf sends out an IGMP Group-Specific Query (GSQ) message to determine
whether other hosts connected to the port should remain in the specific multicast grou p.
This helps speed up the leave process.
This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an
IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port
from a host.
Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join.
Max Group Num. Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join. Once a port is registered
in the specified number of multicast groups, any new IGMP join report frame(s) is
dropped on this port.
Throttling IGMP throttling controls how the Switch deals with the IGMP reports when the maximum
number of the IGMP groups a port can join is reached.
Select Deny to drop any new IGMP join report received on this port until an existing
multicast forwarding table entry is aged out.
Select Replace to replace an existing entry in the multicast forwarding table with the new
IGMP report(s) received on this port.
IGMP Filtering
Profile Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port. Otherwise, select
Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group.
You can creat e IGMP filtering profiles in the Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP
Snooping > IGMP Filtering Prof ile screen.
IGMP Querie r
Mode The Switch t reats an IGMP quer y port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router (or
server). The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port.
Select Auto to have the Switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives
IGMP query packets.
Select Fixed to have the Switch always use the port as an IGMP query port. Select this
when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port.
Select Edge to stop the Swit ch from using the port as an IGMP query port. The Switch will
not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port. The Swit ch does not
forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your ch anges to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses powe r, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 80 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
194
Figure 136 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping
VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 81 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping
VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Mode Select auto to have the Switch learn multicast group membership information of any
VLANs automatically.
Select fixed to have the Switch only learn multicast group membership information of the
VLAN(s) that you specify below.
In either auto or fixed mode, the Switch can learn up to 16 VLANs (including up to five
VLANs you configured in the MVR screen). For example, if you have configured one
multicast VLAN in the MVR screen, you can only specify up to 15 VLANs in this screen.
The Switch drops any IGMP control messages which do not belong to these 16 VLANs.
You must also enable IGMP snooping in the Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP
Snooping screen first.
Apply Click Apply to save your ch anges to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses powe r, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VLAN Use this section of the screen to add VLANs upon which the Switch is to perform IGMP
snooping.
Name Enter the descriptive name of the VLAN for identification purposes.
VID Enter the ID of a static VLAN; the valid range is between 1 and 4094.
You cannot configure the same VLAN ID as in the MVR screen.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
195
24.3.3 IGMP Filtering Profile
An IGMP filtering profile specifies a range of multicast groups that clients connected to the Switch
are able to join. A profile contains a range of multicast IP addresses which you want clients to be
able to join. Profiles are assigned to ports (in the IGMP Snooping screen). Clients connected to
those ports are then able to join the multicast groups specified in the profile. Each port can be
assigned a single profile. A profile can be assigned to multiple ports.
Click Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast in the navigation panel. Click the
IGMP Snooping link and then the IGMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown.
Figure 137 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Filtering
Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Index This is the index number of the IGMP snooping VLAN entry in the table. Click on an index
number to view more details or change the settings.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group.
Select an entry’s check box to select a s p ecific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove, then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 81 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping
VLAN (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 82 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Filtering
Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes.
To configure additional rule(s) for a profile that you ha ve already added, ente r the profile
name and specify a different IP multicast address range.
Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want
to belong to the IGMP filter profile.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
196
24.4 IPv6 Multicast Status
Click Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast to display the screen as shown. This
screen shows the IPv6 multicast group information. See Section 24.1 on page 186 for more
information on multicasting.
Figure 138 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a ra nge of IP ad dres ses t hat yo u w ant t o belo ng
to the IGMP filter profile.
If you want to add a single multicast IP address, enter it in both the Start Address and
End Address fields.
Add Click this to create a new entry.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile.
Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast address range.
End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range.
Delete Profile Select a profile’s check box to select a specific profile. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all profiles.
Delete Rule Select the check box(es) of th e rule(s) that you want to remove from a profile.
Delete To delete the profile(s) and all the accompanying rules, select the profile(s) that you want
to remove in the Delete Profile column, then click the Delete button.
To delete a rule(s) from a profile , select the rule(s) that y ou want to remov e in the Delete
Rule column, then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile/Delete Ru le check boxes.
Ta ble 82 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Filtering
Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 83 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This is the index number of the entry.
VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID.
Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group.
Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses.
Group Timeout This field displays the time (in seconds) that elapses before the Switch removes a MLD
group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
197
24.4.1 MLD Snooping-proxy
Click the MLD Snooping-proxy link in the Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast
screen to display the screen as shown. See Section 24.1 on page 186 for more information on
multicasting.
Figure 139 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
24.4.2 MLD Snooping-proxy VLAN
Click the VLAN link in the Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD
Snooping-proxy screen to display the screen as shown. See Section 24.1 on page 186 for more
information on multicasting.
Ta ble 84 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MLD Snooping-proxy Use these settings to configure MLD snooping-proxy.
Active Select Active to enable MLD snooping-proxy on the Switch to minimize MLD control
messages and allow better network performance.
802.1p Priority Select a priority level (0-7) to whic h the Switch changes the priorit y in outgoing MLD
messages.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s ru n-time memo ry. The Sw itch lose s
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save l ink on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are
done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
198
Figure 140 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > VLAN
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Ta ble 85 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN on which you want to enable MLD snooping-proxy
and configure related settings.
Upstream
Query Interval Enter the amount of time (in miliseconds) between general query messages sent by
the router connected to the upstream port. This value should be exactly the same as
what’s configured in the connected multicast router.
This value is used to calculate the amount of time an MLD snooping membership
entry (learned only on the upstream port) can remain in the forwarding table.
When an MLD Report message is received, the Switch sets the timeout period of the
entry to be T = (QI*RV) + MRD, where T = Timeout, QI = Query Interval, RV =
Robustness Variable, and MRD = Maximum Response Delay.
Maximum Response
Delay Enter the amount of time (in mi liseconds) the router connected to the upstream port
waits for a response to an MLD general query message. This value should be exactly
the same as what’s configured in the connected multicast rout er.
This value is used to calculate the amount of time an MLD snooping membership
entry (learned only on the upstream port) can remain in the forwarding table.
When an MLD Report message is received, the Switch sets the timeout period of the
entry to be T = (QI*RV) + MRD, where T = Timeout, QI = Query Interval, RV =
Robustness Variable, and MRD = Maximum Response Delay.
When an MLD Done message is received, the Switch sets the entry’s lifetime to be the
product of Last Member Query Interval and Robustness Variable.
Robustness Variable Enter the number of queries. A multicast address entry (learned only on an upstream
port by snooping) is remove d from the fo rwar ding table when there is no response to
the configur ed nu mbe r of que ries s ent b y the router connected to the upstream port.
This value should be exactly the same as what’ s configured in the connected multicast
router.
This value is used to calculate the amount of time an MLD snooping membership
entry (learned only on the upstream port) can remain in the forwarding table.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
199
24.4.3 MLD Snooping-proxy VLAN Port Role Setting
Click the Port Role Setting link in the Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast >
MLD Snooping-proxy > VLAN screen to display the screen as shown. See Section 24.1 on page
186 for more information on multicasting.
Last Member Query
Interval Enter the amount of time (in miliseconds) between the MLD group-specific queries
sent by an upstream port when an MLD Done message is received. This value should
be exactly the same as what’s configured in the connected multicast router.
This value is used to calculate the amount of time an MLD snooping membership
entry (learned only on the upstream port) can remain in the forwarding table after a
Done message is received.
When an MLD Done message is received, the Switch sets the entry’s lifetime to be the
product of Last Member Query Interval and Robustness Variable.
Downstream
Query Interval Enter the amount of time (in miliseconds) between general query messages sent by
the downstream port.
Maximum Response
Delay Enter the maximum time (in miliseconds) that the Switch waits for a respon se to a
general query message sent by the downstream port.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the index number of the MLD snooping-proxy VLAN entry in the t able. Click on
an index number to view more details or change the settings.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group.
Select an entry’s check box to select a speci fic en try. Otherwise, select the che ck box
in the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry(ies) permanently.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 85 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
200
Figure 141 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Port Role
Setting
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Ta ble 86 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Port Role
Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MLD Snooping-proxy
VLAN ID Select the VLAN ID for which you want to configure a port’s MLD snooping-proxy
settings.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this
row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port
basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
201
24.4.4 MLD Snooping-proxy Filtering
Use this screen to configure the Switch’s MLD filtering settings. Click the Filtering link in the
Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy screen to
display the screen as shown.
Port Role A port on the Switch can be either a Downstream port or Upstream port in MLD . A
downstream port connects to MLD hosts and acts as a multicast router to send MLD
queries and listen to the MLD ho st’s Report and Done messages. An upstream port
connects to a multicast router and works as a host to send Report or Done messages
when receiving queries from a multicast router.
Otherwise, select None if the port is not joining a multicast group or does not belong
to this VLAN.
Leave Mode Select the leave m ode for the specified downstream port(s) in this VLAN.
This specifies whether the Switch removes an MLD snooping membership entry
(learned on a downstream port) immediately (Immediate) or wait for an MLD report
before the leave timeout (Normal) or fast leave timeout (Fast) when an MLD leave
message is received on this port from a host.
Leave Timeout Ent er the MLD snooping norma l leave timeout (in milliseconds) the Switch uses to
update the forwarding table for the specified downstream port(s).
This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an MLD report before removing
an MLD snooping membe rship entry (learned on a downstream port) when an MLD
Done message is received on this port from a host.
Fast Leave Timeout Enter th e fast leave timeout (in milliseconds) for the specified downstream port(s).
This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an MLD report before removing
an MLD snooping membe rship entry (learned on a downstream port) when an MLD
Done message is received on this port from a host.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory . The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are
done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Ta ble 86 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Port Role
Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
202
Figure 142 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Ta ble 87 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable MLD filtering on the Swit ch.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this
row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port
basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Group Limit Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join.
Max Group Num. Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join. Once a port is
registered in the s p ecified number of multicast groups, any new MLD Report message
is dropped on this port.
Filtering Profile Select the name of the MLD filter ing profile to use for this port. Otherwise, select
Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group.
You can create MLD filtering profiles in the Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD
Snooping-proxy > Filtering > Filtering Profile screen.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
203
24.4.5 MLD Snooping-proxy Filtering Profile
Use this screen to create an MLD filtering profile and set the range of the multicast address(es).
Click the Filtering Profile link in the Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast >
MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering screen to display the screen as shown.
Figure 143 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering >
Filtering Profile
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Ta ble 87 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 88 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering
Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes.
To configure additional rule(s) for a profile that yo u have already added, enter the profile
name and specify a different IP multicast address range.
Start Address Type the starting multicast IPv6 address for a range of multicast IPv6 addresses that
you want to belong to the MLD filtering profile.
End Address Type the ending multicast IPv6 address for a range of IPv6 addresses that you want to
belong to the MLD filtering profile.
If you want to add a single multicast IPv6 address, enter it in both the Start Address
and End Address fields.
Add Click this to create a new entry.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
204
24.5 General MVR Configuration
Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port(s) and a source port for
each multicast VLAN. Click Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR to display the screen as
shown next.
Note: You can create up to five multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the
Switch.
Note: Your Switch automatically creates a static VLAN (with the same VID) when you
create a multicast VLAN in this screen.
Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile.
Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast IPv6 address range.
End Address This field displays the end of the multicast IPv6 address range.
To delete the profile(s) and all the accompanying rules, select the profile(s) that you
want to remove, then click the Delete button. Y ou can select the check box in the table
heading row to select all profiles.
To delete a rule(s) from a profile, sel ect the rule(s) that y ou want to remo v e , then cli ck
the Delete button.
Delete Click Delete button to permanent ly delete the entries you selected.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 88 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering
Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
205
Figure 144 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Ta ble 89 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared
among different subscriber VLANs on the network.
Group Name Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable A SCII characters) for identification purposes.
Multicast VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID (1 to 4094) of the multicast VLAN.
802.1p Priority Select a priority level (0-7) with which the Switch replaces the priority in outgoing IGMP
or MLD control packets (belonging to this multicast VLAN).
Mode Specify the MVR mode on the Switch. Choices are Dynamic and Compatible.
Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports or MLD messages to all MVR source ports in the
multicast VLAN.
Select Compatible to set the Switch not to send IGMP reports or MLD messages.
Port This field displays the port number on the Switch.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
206
24.5.1 MVR Group Configuration
All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to
this multicast group.
Use this screen to configure MVR IP multicast group address(es). Click the Group Configuration
link in the MVR screen.
Note: A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN. However, IP multicast group
addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Source Port Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives
multicast traffic. All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN.
Receiver Port Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic.
None Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR. No MVR multicast traffic is sent
or received on this port.
Tagging Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames
transmitted.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VLAN This field dis p lays the multic ast VLAN ID. Click on an index number to change the
settings.
Active This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting.
Mode This field displays the MVR mode.
Source Port This field displays the source port number(s).
Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number(s).
802.1p This field displays the priority level.
Select an entry’s check box to select a s p ecific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete To delete a multicast VLAN(s), select the rule(s) that you want to remove, then click the
Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 89 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
207
Figure 145 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR > Group Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 90 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR > Group Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Multicast VLAN ID Select a multicast VLAN ID (that you configured in the MVR screen) from the drop-down
list box.
Group Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes.
Start Address Enter the starting IP multicast address of the mult ic ast gro up in dotted decimal notation.
Refer to IP Multicast Addresses on page 186 for more information on IP multicast
addresses.
End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation.
Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one IP
address for a multicast group.
Refer to IP Multicast Addresses on page 186 for more information on IP multicast
addresses.
Add Click this to create a new entry.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
MVLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID.
Group Name This field displays the descriptive name for this settin g.
Start Address This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group.
End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group.
To delete the profile(s) and all the accompanying rules, select the profile(s) that you want
to remove, then click the Delete button. You can select the check box in the tabl e
heading row to select all profiles.
To delete a rule(s) from a profile, select the rule(s) that you want to remove , then click
the Delete button.
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
208
24.5.2 MVR Configuration Example
The following fig ure shows a network example where ports 1, 2 and 3 on the Sw itch belong to VLAN
1. In addition, port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic (the
News and Movie channels) from the remote streaming media server, S. Computers A, B and C in
VLAN 1 are able to receive the traffic.
Figure 146 MVR Configuration Example
To configure the MVR settings on the Switch, create a multicast VLAN in the MVR screen and set
the receiver and source ports.
Delete Select the entry(ies) that you want to remove, then click the Delete button to remove
the selected entry(ies) from the table.
If you delete a multicast VLAN, all multicast groups in this VLAN will also be removed.
Cancel Select Cancel to clear the checkbox(es) in the table.
Ta ble 90 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR > Group Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
S
Multicast VID 200
VLAN 1
AB
C
News: 224.1.4.10 ~ 224.1.4 .50
1
Movie: 230.1.2.50 ~230.1.2.60
2
37
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
209
Figure 147 MVR Configuration Example
To set the Switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers, configure multicast group
settings in the Group Configuration screen. The following figure shows an example where two
IPv4 multicast groups (News and Movie) are configured for the multicast VLAN 200.
EXAMPLE
Chapter 24 Multicast
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
210
Figure 148 MVR Group Configuration Example-1
Figure 149 MVR Group Configuration Example-2
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
211
CHAPTER 25
AAA
25.1 AAA Overview
This chapter describes how to configure authentication, authorization and accounting settings on
the Switch.
The external servers that perfo rm authentication, authorization and accounting functions are known
as AAA servers. The Switch supports RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service, see
RADIUS and TACACS+ on page 212) and TACACS+ (Terminal Access Controller Access-Control
System Plus, see RADIUS and T ACACS+ on page 212) as external authentication and authorization
servers.
Figure 150 AAA Server
25.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the AAA screen (Section 25.2 on page 212) to display the links to the screens where you can
enable authentication and authorization or both of them on the Switch.
•use the RADIUS Server Set u p screen (Section 25.3 on page 213) to configure your RADIUS
server settings.
•Use the TACACS+ Server S etup screen (Section 25.4 on page 214) to configure your TACACS+
authentication settings.
•Use the AAA Setup screen (Section 25.5 on page 216) to configure authentication, authorization
and accounting settings, such as the methods used to authenticate users accessing the Switch
and which database the Switch should use first.
25.1.2 What You Need to Know
Authentication is the process of determining who a user is and v alidating access to the Sw itch. The
Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch
itself. The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of
users.
Authorization is the process of determining what a user is allowed to do. Different user accounts
may have higher or lower privilege levels associated with them. For example, user A may have the
right to create new login accounts on the Switch but user B cannot. The Switch can authorize users
Client AAA Server
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
212
based on user accounts configured on the Switch itse lf or it can use an external server to authorize
a large number of users.
Accounting is the process of recording what a user is doing. The Switch can use an external server
to track when users log in, log out, execute commands and so on. Accounting can also record
system related actions such as boot up and shut down times of the Switch.
Local User Accounts
By storing user profiles locally on the Switch, your Switch is able to authenticate and authorize
users without interacting with a network AAA server. However, ther e is a limit on the number of
users you may authenticate in this way (See Section 43.4 on page 368).
RADIUS and TACACS+
RADIUS and TACACS+ are security protocols used to authenticate users by means of an external
server instead of (or in addition to) an internal device user database that is limited to the memory
capacity of the device. In essence, RADIUS and T ACACS+ authentication both allow you to validate
an unlimited number of users from a central location.
The following table describes some key differences between RADIUS and TACACS+.
25.2 AAA Screens
The AAA screens allow you to enable authentication and authorization or both of them on the
Switch. First, configure your authentication server settings (RADIUS, TACACS+ or both) and then
set up the authentication priority, activate authorization.
Click Advanced Application > AAA in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 151 Advanced Application > AAA
Ta ble 91 RADIUS vs. TACACS+
RADIUS TACACS+
Transport
Protocol UDP (User Datagram Protocol) TCP (Transmission Control Protoc ol)
Encryption Encrypts the password sent for
authentication. All communication between the client (the Switch)
and the TACACS server is encrypted.
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
213
25.3 RADIUS Server Setup
Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings. See RADIUS and TACACS+ on page 212
for more information on RADIUS servers and Section 25.6.2 on page 220 for RADIUS attributes
utilized by the authentication features on the Switch. Click on the RADIUS Server Setup link in
the AAA screen to view the screen as shown.
Figure 152 Advanced Application > AAA > RADIUS Server Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 92 Advanced Application > AAA > RADIUS Server Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Authentication
Server Use this section to configure your RADIUS authentication settings.
Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple RADIUS servers.
Select index-priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured
RADIUS server, if the RADIUS server does not respond then the Switch tries to
authenticate wi th the second RAD IUS server.
Select round-robin to alternate between the RADIUS servers that it sends authentication
requests to.
Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request
response from the RADIUS server.
If you are using index-priority for your authentication and you are using two RADIUS
servers then the timeout value is divided between the two RADIUS servers. For example, if
you set the timeout value to 30 seconds, then the Switch waits for a response from the
first RADIUS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second RA DIUS server.
Index This is a read-only number representing a RADIUS serve r entry.
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
214
25.4 TACACS+ Server Setup
Use this screen to configure your T A CACS+ server settings. See RADIUS and T ACACS+ on page 212
for more information on TACACS+ servers. Click on the TACACS+ Server Setup link in the AAA
screen to view the screen as shown.
IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation.
UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812. You need not change this
value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so.
Shared Secret Specify a password (up to 32 alph anumeric characters) as the key to be shared between
the external RADI US server and the Sw itch. This key is n ot sent over the network. This key
must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Switch.
Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS server entry from the Switch.
This entry is deleted when you click Apply.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Accounting
Server Use this section to configure your RADIUS accounting server settings.
Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting reques t
response from the RADIUS accounting server.
Index This is a read-only number represe nting a RADIUS accountin g server entry.
IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RAD IUS accounting server in dotted decimal notation.
UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS accounting server for accounting is 1813. You need not
change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so.
Shared Secret Specify a password (up to 32 alph anumeric characters) as the key to be shared between
the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch. This key is not sent over the
network. This key must be the same on the external RADIUS accounting server and the
Switch.
Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS accounting server entry from the
Switch. This entry is deleted when you click Apply.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 92 Advanced Application > AAA > RADIUS Server Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
215
Figure 153 Advanced Application > AAA > TACACS+ Server Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 93 Advanced Application > AA A > TACACS+ Server Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Authentication
Server Use this section t o configure your TACACS+ aut hentication settings.
Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple TACACS+ servers.
Select index-priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured
TACACS+ server, if the TACACS+ server does not respond then the Switch tries to
authenticate with the second TACACS+ server.
Select round-robin to alternate between the TACACS+ servers that it sends
authentication requests to.
Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request
response from the TACACS+ server.
If you are using index-priority for your authentication and you are using two TACACS+
servers then the timeout value is divided between the two TACACS+ server s. Fo r example,
if you set the timeout value to 30 sec onds, then the Switch waits for a response from the
first TACACS+ server for 15 seconds and then tries the second TACACS+ server.
Index This is a read-only number representing a TACACS+ server entry.
IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS+ server in dotted decimal notation.
TCP Port The default port of a TACACS+ server for authentication is 49. You need not change this
value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so.
Shared Secret Specify a password (up to 32 alph anumeric characters) as the key to be shared between
the external TACACS+ server and the Switch. This key is not sent over the network. This
key must be the same on the external TACACS+ server and the Switch.
Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS+ server entry from the Switch.
This entry is deleted when you click Apply.
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
216
25.5 AAA Setup
Use this screen to configure authentication, authorization and accounting settings on the Switch.
Click on the AAA Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown.
Apply Click Apply t o save your changes to the Swit ch’s run -time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Accounting
Server Use this section to configure your TACACS+ account ing settings.
Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting reques t
response from the TACACS+ server.
Index This is a read-only number representing a TACACS+ accounting server entry.
IP Address Enter the IP address of an external T ACACS+ accounting server in dotted decimal notation.
TCP Port The default port of a TACACS+ accounting server is 49. You need not change this value
unless your network adminis trator instructs you to do so.
Shared Secret Specify a password (up to 32 alph anumeric characters) as the key to be shared between
the external TACACS+ accounting server and the Switch. This key is not sent over the
network. This key must be the same on the external TACACS+ accounting server and the
Switch.
Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS+ accounting server entry from
the Switch. Th is entry is deleted when you click Apply.
Apply Click Apply t o save your changes to the Swit ch’s run -time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 93 Advanced Application > AAA > TACACS+ Server Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
217
Figure 154 Advanced Application > AAA > AAA Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 94 Advanced Application > AAA > AAA Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Authentication Use this section to specify the methods used to authenticat e users accessi ng the Switch.
Privilege Enable These fields specify which database the Switch should us e (first, second and third) to
authenticate access privilege level for administrator accounts (users for Switch
management).
Configure the access privilege of accounts via commands (See the CLI Reference Guide)
for local authentication. The TACACS+ and RADIUS are external servers. Before you
specify the priority, make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first.
You ca n specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate the access privilege
level of administrators. The Switch checks the methods in th e order you configure them
(first Method 1, then Method 2 and finally Method 3). Y ou must configure the settings in
the Method 1 field. If you want the Switch to check other sources for access privilege level
specify them in Metho d 2 and Method 3 fields.
Select local to have the Switch check the access privilege configured for local
authentication.
Select radius or tacacs+ to have the Switch check the acce ss privilege via the external
servers.
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
218
Login These fields specify which database the Switch should use (first, second and third) to
authenticate administrator accounts (users for Switch management).
Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control > Logins screen. The TACACS+
and RADIUS are external servers. Before you specify the priority, make sure you have set
up the corresponding database correctly first.
Y ou can specif y up to three methods for the Sw itch to authenticate administrator accounts.
The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them (first Method 1, then
Method 2 and finally Method 3). You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field.
If you want the Switch to che ck other sources for administrator accounts, specify them in
Method 2 and Method 3 fields.
Select local to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access
Control > Logins screen.
Select radius to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via your
RADIUS server.
Select tacacs+ to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via your
TACACS+ server.
Authorization Use this section to configure authorization settings on the Switch.
Type Set whether the Switch provides the following services to a user.
•Exec: Allow an administrator which logs into the Switch through Telnet or SSH to have
a different access privilege level assigned via the external server.
•Dot1x: Allow an IEEE 802.1x client to have different bandwidth limit or VLAN ID
assigned via the external server.
Active Select this to activate authorization for a specified event types.
Console Select this to allow an administrator which logs in the Switch through the console port to
have different access privilege level assigned via the external server.
Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS+ for authorization of specific types of
events.
RADIUS is the only method for IEEE 802.1x authorization.
Accounting Use this section to configure accounting settings on the Switch.
Update Period This is the amount of time in minu tes before the Swit ch sends an update to t he accounti ng
server. This is only valid if you select the start-stop option for the Exec or Dot1x entries.
Type The Switch supports the following types of events to be sent to the accounting server(s):
• System - Configure the Switch to send information when the following system events
occur: system boots up, system shuts down, system acco unting is enabled, system
accounting is disabled
• Exec - Configure the Switch to send information when an administrator logs in and logs
out via the console port, telnet or SSH.
• Dot1x - Configure the Switch to send information when an IEEE 802.1x client begins a
session (authenticates via the Switch), ends a session as well as interim updates of a
session.
• Commands - Configure the Switch to send information when commands of specified
privilege level and high er are executed on the Switch.
Active Select this to activate accounting for a specified event types.
Broadcast Select this to have the Switch send accounting information to all configured account ing
servers at the same time.
If you don’t select this an d yo u hav e tw o accounti ng serv ers se t up , the n the Swit ch sends
information to the first accounting server and if it doesn’t get a response from the
accounting server then it tries the second accounting server.
Ta ble 94 Advanced Application > AAA > AAA Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
219
25.6 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
25.6.1 Vendor Specific Attribute
RFC 2865 standard specifies a method for sending vendor-specific information between a RADIUS
server and a network access device (for example, the Switch). A company can create Vendor
Specific Attributes (VSAs) to expand the functionality of a RADIUS server.
The Switch supports VSAs that allow you to perform the following actions based on user
authentication:
• Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic for the port the user connects to.
• Assign account privilege levels (See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on account
privilege levels) for the authenticated user.
The VSAs are composed of the following:
•Vendor-ID: An identification number assigned to the company by the IANA (Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority). ZyXEL’s vendor ID is 890.
•Vendor-Type: A vendor specified attribute, identifying the setting you want to modify.
•Vendor-data: A value you want to assign to the setting.
Note: Refer to the documen tation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to
configure VSAs for users authenticating via the RAD IU S server.
Mode The Switch supports two modes of recording login events. Select:
• start-stop - to have the Switch send information to the accounting server when a user
begins a session, during a user’s session (if it lasts past the Update Period), and when a
user ends a sess ion .
• stop-only - to have the Switch send information to the accounting server only when a
user ends a sess ion .
Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS+ for accounting of specific types of
events.
TACACS+ is the only method for recording Commands type of event.
Privilege This field is only configur able for Commands type of event. Select the threshold command
privilege level for which the Switch should send accounting information. The Switch will
send accounting informati on when commands at the level you spec ify and higher are
executed on the Switch.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’ s run-time memory. The Switch loses thes e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your ch anges to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 94 Advanced Application > AAA > AAA Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
220
The following table describes the VSAs supported on the Switch.
25.6.1.1 Tunnel Protocol Attribute
You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server (refer to your RADIUS server
documentation) to assign a port on the Switch to a VLAN based on IEEE 802.1x authentication. The
port VLAN settings are fixed and untagged. This will also set the port’s VID. The following table
describes the values yo u need to configure. Note that the bolded values in the table are fixed values
as defined in RFC 3580.
25.6.2 Supported RADIUS Attributes
R emote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) attributes are data used to define specific
authentication elements in a user profile, which is stored on the RADIUS server. This appendix lists
the RADIUS attributes supported by the Switch.
Refer to RFC 2865 for more information about RADIUS attributes used for authentication.
This section lists the attributes used by authentication functions on the Switch. In cases where the
attribute has a specific format associated with it, the format is specified.
Ta ble 95 Supported VSAs
FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE
Ingress Bandwidth
Assignment Vendor-Id = 890
Vendor-Type = 1
Vendor-data = ingress rate (Kbps in decimal format)
Egress Bandwidth
Assignment Vendor-Id = 890
Vendor-Type = 2
Vendor-data = egress rate (Kbps in decimal format)
Privilege Assignment Vendor-ID = 890
Vendor-Type = 3
Vendor-Data = "shell:priv-lvl=N"
or
Vendor-ID = 9 (CISCO)
Vendor-Type = 1 (CISCO-AVPAIR)
Vendor-Data = "shell:priv-lvl=N"
where N is a privile ge level (from 0 to 14).
Note: If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS server(s)
and the Switch, the user is assigned a privilege level from the database (RADIUS
or local) the Switch uses first for user authentication.
Ta ble 96 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute
FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE
VLAN Assignment Tunnel-Type = VLAN(13)
Tunnel-Medium-Type = 802(6)
Tunnel-Private-Group-ID = VLAN ID
Note: You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the Switch.
Chapter 25 AAA
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
221
25.6.3 Attributes Used for Authentication
The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when
performing authentication.
25.6.3.1 Attributes Used for Authenticating Privilege Access
User-Name
- The format of the User-Name attribute is $enab#$, where # is the privilege level (1-14).
User-Password
NAS-Identifier
NAS-IP-Address
25.6.3.2 Attributes Used to Login Users
User-Name
User-Password
NAS-Identifier
NAS-IP-Address
25.6.3.3 Attributes Used by the IEEE 802.1x Authentication
User-Name
NAS-Identifier
NAS-IP-Address
NAS-Port
NAS-Port-Type
- This value is set to Ethernet(15) on the Switch.
Calling-Station-Id
Frame-MTU
EAP-Message
State
Message-Authenticator
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
222
CHAPTER 26
IP Source Guard
26.1 IP Source Guard Overview
Use IPv4 and IPv6 source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network.
IP source guard uses a binding table to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized DHCP and
ARP packets in your network. A binding contains these key attributes:
•MAC address
•VLAN ID
•IP address
• Port number
When the Switch receives a DHCP or ARP packet, it looks up th e appropriate MAC address, VLAN ID,
IP address, and port number in the binding table. If there is a binding, the Switch forwards the
packet. If there is not a binding, the Switch discards the packet.
26.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the IP Source Guard screen (Section 26.2 on page 223) to display the links to the
configuration screens where you can configure IPv4 or IPv6 source guard settings.
•Use the IPv4 Source Guard Setup screen (Section 26.3 on page 224) to look at the current
bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection.
•Use the IP Source Guard Static Binding screen (Section 26.4 on page 225) to manage static
bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection.
•Use the DHCP Snooping screen (Section 26.5 on page 227) to look at various statistics about
the DHCP snooping database.
•Use this DHCP Snooping Configure screen (Section 26.6 on page 230) to enable DHCP
snooping on the Switch (not on specific VLAN), specify the VLAN where the default DHCP server
is located, and configure the DHCP snooping database.
•Use the DHCP Snooping Port Configure screen (Section 26.6.1 on page 232) to specify
whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping.
•Use the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen (Section 26.6.2 on page 234) to enable DHCP
snooping on each VLAN and to specify whether or not the Switch adds DHCP relay agent option
82 information to DHCP requests that the Switch relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN.
•Use the DHCP Snooping VLAN Port Configure screen (Section 26.6.3 on page 235) to apply a
different DHCP option 82 profile to certain ports in a VLAN.
•Use the ARP Inspection Status screen (Section 26.7 on page 236) to look at the current list of
MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet.
•Use the ARP Inspection VLAN Status screen (Section 26.8 on page 237) to look at various
statistics about ARP packets in each VLAN.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
223
•Use the ARP Inspection Log Status screen (Section 26.9 on page 238) to look at log messages
that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet.
•Use the ARP Inspection Configure screen (Section 26.10 on page 240) to enable ARP
inspection on the Switch. You can also configure the length of time the Switch stores records of
discarded ARP packets and global settings for the ARP inspection log.
•Use the ARP Inspection Port Configure screen (Section 26.10.1 on page 241) to specify
whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection.
•Use the ARP Inspection VLAN Configure screen (Section 26.10.2 on page 243) to enable ARP
inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving
ARP packets from each VLAN.
•Use the IPv6 Source Binding Status screen (Section 26.12 on page 244 ) to look at the current
IPv6 dynamic and static bindings and to remove dynamic bindings based on IPv6 address and/or
IPv6 prefix.
•Use the IPv6 Static Binding Setup screen (Section 26.13 on page 245) to manually create an
IPv6 source guard binding table and manage IPv6 static bindings.
•Use the IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup screen (Section 26.14 on page 247) to have IPv6
source guard forward valid IPv6 addresses and/or IPv6 prefixes that are stored in the binding
table and allow or block data traffic from all link-local addresses
•Use the IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup screen (Section 26.15 on page 248) to apply
configured IPv6 source guard policies to the ports you specify.
•Use the IPv6 Snooping Policy Setu p screen (Section 26.16 on page 249) to dynamically create
an IPv6 source guard binding table using a DHCPv6 snooping policy. A DHCPv6 snooping policy
lets the Switch sniff DHCPv6 packets sent from a DHCPv6 server to a DHCPv6 client when it is
assigning an IPv6 address.
•Use the IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup screen (Section 26.17 on page 251) to enable a DHCPv6
snooping policy on a specific VLAN interface.
•Use the IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup screen (Section 26.18 on page 252) to specify which ports are
trusted and untrusted for DHCP snooping.
26.1.2 What You Need to Know
The Switch builds the binding table by snooping DHCP packets (dynamic bindings) and from
information provided manually by administrators (static bindings).
IP source guard consists of the following features:
• Static bindings. Use this to create static bindings in the binding table.
• DHCP snooping. Use this to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the
binding table dynamically.
• ARP inspection. Use this to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network.
If you want to use dynamic bindings to filter unauthorized ARP packets (typical implementation),
you have to enable DHCP snooping before you enable ARP inspection.
26.2 IP Source Guard Screen
Use this screen to go to the configuration screens where you can configure IPv4 or IPv6 source
guard settings. Click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard in the navigation panel.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
224
Figure 155 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.3 IPv4 Source Guard Setup
Use this screen to look at the current bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection. Bindings are
used by DHCP snooping and ARP inspection to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized
packets in the network. The Switch learns the bindings by snooping DHCP packets (dynamic
bindings) and from information provided manually by administrators (static bindings). To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup.
Figure 156 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup
Ta ble 97 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv4 Source
Guard Setup Click the link to open screens where you can view and manage static bindings, configure
DHCP snooping or ARP inspection and look at various statistics.
IPv6 Source
Binding Status Click the link to open a screen where you can view the current IPv6 dynamic and static
bindings or remove dynamic bindings based on IPv6 address and/or IPv6 prefix.
IPv6 Static
Binding Setup Click the link to open a screen where you can manually create IPv6 source guard static
binding entries.
IPv6 Source
Guard Policy
Setup
Click the link to open a screen where you can define policies to have IPv6 source guard
forward valid addresses and/or prefixes and allow or block data traffic from all link-local
addresses.
IPv6 Source
Guard Port Setup Click the link to open a screen where you can apply the configured IPv6 source guard
policy to a port.
IPv6 Snooping
Pol icy Setup Click the link to open a screen where you can set up DHCPv6 snooping policies for the
binding table.
IPv6 Snooping
VLAN Setup Click the link to open a screen where you can enable a DHCPv6 snooping policy on a
specific VLAN interface.
IPv6 DHCP Trust
Setup Click t he l in k to open a screen whe re you can spe c if y wh i ch port s are trusted for DHCPv6
snooping.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
225
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.4 IPv4 Source Guard Static Binding
Use this screen to manage static bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection. Static bindings
are uniquely identified by the MAC address and VLAN ID. Each MAC address and VLAN ID can only
be in one static binding. If you try to create a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN
ID as an existing static binding, the new static binding replaces the original one. To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > IP Sour ce Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > Static
Binding.
Ta ble 98 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding.
IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding.
Lease This field displays how many days, hours, minutes, and seconds the binding is valid; for
example, 2d3h4m5s means the binding is still vali d for 2 da ys, 3 hours, 4 minutes, and
5 seconds. This field displays infinity if the binding is always valid (for example, a static
binding).
Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding.
static: This binding was learned from information provided manually by an
administrator.
dhcp-snooping: This binding was learned by snooping DHCP packets.
VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding.
Port This field displays the port number in the binding. If this field is blank, the binding applies
to all ports.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
226
Figure 157 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > Static Binding
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 99 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > Static Binding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ARP Freeze ARP Freeze allows you to automatically create static bindings from the current ARP
entries (either dynamically learned or static ARP entries) until the Switch’s binding table
is full.
Note: The ARP learning mode should be set to ARP-Request in the IP Application >
ARP Setup > ARP Learning screen before you use the ARP Freeze feature.
Condition All - Select this and click ARP Freeze to have the Switch automatically add all the
current ARP entries to the static bindings table.
Port List - Select this and ente r the number of the port(s) (separated by a comma).
ARP entries learned on the specified port(s) are added to the static bindings table after
you click ARP F r eeze.
VLAN List - Select this and enter the ID number of the VLAN(s) (separated by a
comma). ARP entries for the specified VLAN(s) are added to the static bindings table
after you click ARP Freez e.
Static Binding
MAC Address Enter the source MAC address in th e binding.
IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding.
VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the binding.
Port Specify the port(s) in the bin ding. If this binding has one port, select the first radio
button and enter the port number in the field to the right. If this binding applies to all
ports, select Any.
Add Click this to create the specified static binding or to update an existing one.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last s elected stati c binding or, if not
applicable, to clear the fi elds above.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
227
26.5 DHCP Snooping
Use this screen to look at various statistics about the DHCP snooping database. To open this screen,
click Advanced Application > IP Source Guar d > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP
Snooping.
Clear Click this to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding.
IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the bindin g.
Lease This field displays how long the binding is valid.
Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding.
static: This binding was learned from information provided manually by an
administrator.
VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding.
Port This field displays the port number in the binding. If this field is blank, the binding
applies to all ports.
Select an entry’ s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click Delete to remove the
selected entry(ies) from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 99 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > Static Binding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
228
Figure 158 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 100 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Database Status This section displays the current settings for the DHCP snooping database. Y ou can
configure them in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen. See Section 26.6 on
page 230.
Agent URL Thi s field displays the location of the DHCP snooping database.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
229
Write delay timer This field displays how lo ng (in seconds) the Switch t ries to complete a specific
update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up.
Abort timer This field displays how long (in seconds) the Switch waits to update the DHCP
snooping database after the current bindings change.
This section displays information about the current update and the next update of
the DHCP snooping database.
Agent running This field displays the status of the current update or access of the DHCP snooping
database.
none: The Switch is not accessing the DHCP snooping database.
read: The Switch is loading dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database.
write: The Switch is updating the DHCP snooping database.
Delay timer expiry This field displays how much longer (in seconds) the Switch tries to complete the
current update before it gives up. It displays Not Running if the Switch is not
updating the DHCP snooping database right now.
Abort timer expiry This field displays when (in seconds) the Switch is going to update the DHCP
snooping database again. It displays Not Running if the current bindings have not
changed since the last update.
This section displ ays information abo ut t h e last time the S witch updated the DHCP
snooping database.
Last succeeded time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database
successfully.
Last failed time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database
unsuccessfully.
Last failed reason This field displays the reason the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database
unsuccessfully.
This section displays historical information about the number of times the Switch
successfully or unsuccessfully read or updated the DHCP snooping database.
Total attempts This field displays the number of times the Switch has tried to access the DHCP
snooping database for any reason.
Startup failures This field displays the number of times the Switch could not cr eate or read the
DHCP snooping database when the Switch started up or a new URL is configured
for the DHCP snooping database.
Successful transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from or updated
the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully.
Fa iled transfers Thi s field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings
from or update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database.
Successful reads Thi s field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from the DHCP
snooping database successfully.
Failed rea ds This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings
from the DHCP snooping database.
Successful writes This field displays the number of times the Switch updat ed the bindings in the
DHCP snooping database successfully.
Fa iled writes This field di splays the number of times the Swit ch was unable to update the
bindings in the DHCP snooping database.
Database detail
First successful
access This field displays the first time the Switch accessed the DHCP snooping database
for any reason.
Table 100 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
230
26.6 DHCP Snooping Configure
Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch (not on specific VLAN), specify the VLAN
where the defau lt DHCP server is loca ted , and configure the DHCP snooping database. The DHCP
snooping database stores the current bindings on a secure, external TFTP server so that they are
still av ailable after a restart. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard
> IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure.
Last ignored bindings
counters This section displays the number of times and the reasons t he Switch ignored
bindings the last time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database. You can
clear these counters by restarting t he Switch or using CLI commands. See th e CLI
Reference Guide.
Binding collisions Thi s field displays the num b er of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch
already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID.
Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the port
number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore.
Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch
was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database.
Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the lease
time had already expired.
Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the VLAN ID
does not exist anymore.
Last ignored time This field displays the last time the Switch ignored any bindings for any reason
from the DHCP binding database.
Total ignored bindings
counters This section displays the reasons the Switch has ignored bindings any time it read
bindings from the DHCP binding database. You can clear these counters by
restarting the Switch or using CLI commands. See the CLI Reference Guide.
Binding collisions Thi s field displays the num b er of bindings the Switch has ignored because the
Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID.
Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the port
number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore.
Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the
Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database.
Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch h as ignored because the leas e
time had already expired.
Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the
VLAN ID does not exist anymore.
Table 100 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
231
Figure 159 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IP v4 Source Guard Setu p > DHCP Snoopin g
> Configure
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 101 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping >
Configure
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch. You still have to enable DHCP
snooping on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports.
Note: If DHCP is enabled and there are no trusted ports, DHCP requests will not
succeed.
DHCP Vlan Select a VLAN ID if you want the Switch to forward DHCP pack ets to DHCP servers
on a specific VLAN.
Note: You have to enable DHCP snooping on the DHCP VLAN too.
You can e nable Option82 in the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen
(Section 26.6.2 on page 234) to help th e DHCP ser v ers distinguish between DHCP
requests from different VLAN.
Select Disable if you do not want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to a specific
VLAN.
Database If Timeout interval is greater than Write delay interval, it is possible that the
next update is scheduled to occur before the current update has finished
successfully or t im ed out. In this case, the Switch waits to start the next update
until it com pletes the current one.
Agent URL Enter the location of the DHCP snooping database. The location should be
expressed like this: tftp://{domain name or IP address}/directory, if
applicable/f il e n a m e ; for example, tftp://192.168.10.1/database.txt.
Timeout interval Enter how long (10-65535 seconds) the Switch trie s to comple t e a spec ific update
in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up.
W rite delay interval Enter how long (10-65535 seconds) the S witch waits to update the DHCP snooping
database the first time the current bindings change after an update. Once the next
update is scheduled, additional changes in current bindings are automatically
included in the next update.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
232
26.6.1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure
Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping.
Note: If DHCP snooping is enabl ed but there are no t rusted ports, DHCP requests cannot
reach the DHCP server.
You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port (trusted or untrusted)
can receive each second. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard >
IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure > Port.
Renew DHCP
Snooping URL Enter the location of a DHCP snooping database, and click Renew if you want the
Switch to load it. You can use this to load dynamic bindings from a different DHCP
snooping database than the one specified in Agent URL.
When the Switch loads dynamic bindings from a DHCP snooping database, it does
not discard the current dynamic bindings first. If there is a conflict, the Switch
keeps the dynamic binding in volatile memory and updates the Binding collisions
counter in the DHCP Snooping screen (Section 26.5 on page 227).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch
loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the
top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you
are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Table 101 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping >
Configure (continued) (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
233
Figure 160 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IP v4 Source Guard Setu p > DHCP Snoopin g
> Configure > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 102 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping >
Configure > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This field displays the port number. If you configure the * port, the settings are
applied to all of the ports.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use
this row first t o set the com mon settings an d then make adjustment s on a port -by -
port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
234
26.6.2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure
Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and to specify whether or not the Switch
adds DHCP relay agent option 82 information (Chapter 40 on page 337) to DHCP requests that the
Switch relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN. To open this screen, click Advanced Application >
IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN.
Figure 161 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IP v4 Source Guard Setu p > DHCP Snoopin g
> Configure > VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Server Trusted state Select whether this port is a trusted port (Trusted) or an untrusted port
(Untrusted).
Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches, and the Switch
discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets
arrive is too high.
Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers, and the Switch discards DHCP
packets from untrusted ports in the following situations:
• The packet is a DHCP server packet (for example, OFFER, ACK, or NACK).
• The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any
of the current bindings.
• The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet, and the source MAC address and
source port do not match any of the current bindings.
• The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high.
Rate (pps) Spe cify t he maximum number for DHCP pack ets (1-20 48) that the S witch receiv es
from each port each second. The Switch discards any additional DHCP packets.
Enter 0 to disable this limit, which is recommended for trusted ports.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch
loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the
top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you
are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Table 102 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping >
Configure > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 103 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping >
Configure > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below.
Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN I D you want to manage in the section below.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
235
26.6.3 DHCP Snooping VLAN Port Configure
Use this screen to apply a different DHCP option 82 profile to certain ports in a VLAN. To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP
Snooping > Configure > VLAN > Port.
Figure 162 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IP v4 Source Guard Setu p > DHCP Snoopin g
> Configure > VLAN > Port
End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below.
Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above. If you
configure the * VLAN, the settings are applied to all VLANs.
Enabled Select Yes to enable DHCP snooping on the VLAN. You still have to enable DHCP
snooping on the Switch and specify trusted ports.
Note: If DHCP is enabled and there are no trusted ports, DHCP requests will not succeed.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to all ports in the
specified VLAN(s). The Switch adds the information (such as slot number, port number,
VLAN ID and/or system name) specified in the profile to DHCP requests that it
broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN, if specified, or VLAN. You can specify the DHCP VLAN in
the DHCP Snooping Configure screen (see Section 26.6 on page 230).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. Th e Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Table 103 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping >
Configure > VLAN (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
236
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.7 ARP Inspection Status
Use this screen to look at the current list of MAC address filters that were created because the
Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet. When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP
packet, it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address
and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet. To open this screen, click Advanced
Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection.
Table 104 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping >
Configure > VLAN > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN you want to configure here.
Port Enter the number of port(s) to which you want to apply the specified DHCP option 82
profile.
You can enter multiple ports separated by (no space) comma (,) or hyphen (-). For
example, enter “3-5” for ports 3, 4, and 5. Enter “3,5,7” for ports 3, 5, and 7.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the specified
port(s) in this VLAN. The Switch adds the information (such as slot number, port
number, VLAN ID and/or system name) specified in the profile to DH CP requests that it
broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN, if specified, or VLAN. You can specify the DHCP VLAN in
the DHCP Snooping Configure screen (see Section 26.6 on page 230).
The profile you select here has priority over the one you select in the DHCP Snooping
> Configure > V L AN screen.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an exi sting one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to sav e y our chan ges to the no n- v olat ile memory whe n yo u are done co nfigur ing.
Cancel Click this to reset the valu es above based on the last selected entry or, if not applicable,
to clear the fields above.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each entry. Click an index number to change
the settings.
VID This field displays the VLAN to which the port(s) belongs.
Port This field displays the port(s) to which the Switch applies the settings .
Profile Name This field displays the DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to th e port(s).
Delete Select the en try(ies) that you want to remove in the Delete column, then click the
Delete button to remove the selected entry(ies) from the table.
Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
237
Figure 163 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.8 ARP Inspection VLAN Status
Use this screen to look at various statistics about ARP packets in each VLAN. To open this screen,
click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP
Inspection > VLAN Status.
Table 105 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Total number of
filters This field displays the current number of MAC address filters that were created because
the Switch identi fied unauthorized ARP packets.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each MAC address filter.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the MAC address filter.
VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the MAC address filter.
Port This field displays the source port of the discarded ARP packet.
Expiry (sec) This field displays how long (in seconds) the MAC address filt er remains in the Switch.
You can also delete the record manually (Delete).
Reason This field displays the reason the ARP packet was discarded.
MAC+VLAN: The MAC address and VLAN ID were not in the binding table.
IP: The MAC address and VLAN ID were in the binding table, but the IP address was
not valid.
Port: The MAC address, VLAN ID, and IP address were in the binding table, but the por t
number was not valid.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click Delete to remove the
selected entry(ies) from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Change Pages Click Previous Page or Next Page to show the previous/next scree n if all status
information cannot be seen in one screen.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
238
Figure 164 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection
> VLAN Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.9 ARP Inspection Log Status
Use this screen to look at log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not
been sent to the syslog server yet. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source
Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Log Status.
Table 106 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection >
VLAN Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Show VLAN range Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to look at in the section below.
Enabled VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs on which ARP inspection is enabled in the section
below.
Selected VLAN Sele ct t his to look at all the VLANs in a s p ecific range in t he s ect ion be low. Then, enter
the lowest VLAN ID (Start VID) and the highest VLAN ID (End VID) you want to look
at.
Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above.
Received This field displays the total number of ARP packets received from the VLAN since the
Switch last restarted.
Request This field displays the total number of ARP Request packets received from the VLAN
since the Switch la st restarted.
Reply This field displays the total number of ARP Reply packets received from the VLAN since
the Switch last restarted.
Forwarded This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch forwarded for the VLAN
since the Switch la st restarted.
Dropped This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch discarded for the VLAN
since the Switch la st restarted.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
239
Figure 165 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection
> Log Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 107 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection >
Log Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Clearing log status
table Click Apply to remove all the log messages that were generated by ARP packets and
that have not been sent to the syslog server yet.
Total number of logs This field displays the number of log messages that were generated by ARP packets
and that have no t been sent to the syslog se rver yet. If one or more l og messages are
dropped due to unavailable buffer, there is an entry called overflow with the current
number of dropped log messages.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each log message.
Port This field displays the source port of the ARP packet.
VID This field displays the source VLAN ID of the ARP packet.
Sender MAC This field displays the source MAC address of the ARP packet.
Sender IP This field displays the source IP address of the ARP packet.
Num Pkts This fiel d displays the number of ARP packets that were consolidated into this log
message. The Switch consolidates identical log messages generated by ARP packets
in the log consolidation interval into one log message. You can configure this interval
in the ARP Inspection Configure screen. See Section 26.10 on page 240.
Reason This field displays the reason the log message was generated.
dhcp deny: An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a dynamic binding with
the same MAC address and VLAN ID.
static deny: An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a static binding with
the same MAC address and VLAN ID.
deny: An ARP packet was discarded because there were no bindings with the same
MAC address and VLAN ID.
dhcp permit: An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a dynamic binding.
static permit: An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a static binding.
In the ARP Inspection VLAN Configure screen, you can configure the Switch to
generate log messages when ARP packets are discarded or forwarded based on the
VLAN ID of the ARP packet. See Section 26.10.2 on page 243.
Time This field displays when the log message was generated.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
240
26.10 ARP Inspection Configure
Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on the Switch. You can also configure the length of time
the Switch stores records of discarded ARP packets and global settings for the ARP inspection log.
To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard
Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure.
Figure 166 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection
> Configure
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 108 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection >
Configure
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable ARP inspection on the Switch. You still have to enable ARP
inspection on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports.
Filter Aging Time
Filter aging time This setting has no effect on existing MAC address filters.
Enter how long (1~2147483647 seconds) the MAC address filter remains in the
Switch after the Switch id entifies an unauthorized ARP packet. The Switch
automatically deletes the MAC address filter afterwards. Enter 0 if you want the MAC
address filter to be permanent.
Log Profile
Log buffer size Enter the maximum number (1~1024) of log messages that were generated by ARP
packets and have not been sent to the syslog server yet. Make sure this number is
appropriate for the specified Syslog rate and Log interval.
If the numb er of log messages in the Switch exceed s this number, the Switch stops
recording log messages and simply starts counting the number of entries that were
dropped due to unavailable buffer. Click Clearing log status table in the ARP
Inspection Log Status screen to clear the log and reset this counter. See Section
26.9 on page 238.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
241
26.10.1 ARP Inspection Port Configure
Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection. You can
also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on each untrusted port. To
open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup
> ARP Inspection > Configure > Port.
Syslog rate Enter the maximum number of syslog messages the Switch can send to the syslog
server in one batch. This number is expressed as a rate because the batch frequency
is determined by the Log Interval. You must configure the syslog server (Chapter 46
on page 389) to use this. Enter 0 if you do not want the Switch to send log messages
generated by ARP packets to the syslog server.
The relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval is illustrated in the following
examples:
• 4 invalid ARP packets per second, Syslog rate is 5, Log i nterv al is 1: the Switch
sends 4 syslog messages every second.
• 6 invalid ARP packets per second, Syslog rate is 5, Log i nterv al is 2: the Switch
sends 5 syslog messages every 2 seconds.
Log interval Enter how often (1-86400 seconds) the Switch sends a batch of syslog messages to
the syslog server. Enter 0 if you want the Switch to send syslog messages
immediately. See Syslog rate for an example of the relationship be tween Syslog
rate and Log interval.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Table 108 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection >
Configure (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
242
Figure 167 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection
> Configure > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 109 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection >
Configure > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This field displays the port number. If you configure the * port, the settings are
applied to all of the ports.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you w ant to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this
row first to set the comm on settings and then make adjust ments on a port- by-port
basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Trusted State Select whe ther this port is a trusted port (Trusted) or an untrusted port
(Untrusted).
The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason.
The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations:
• The sender’s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current
bindings.
• The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high. Y ou can specify the maximum
rate at which ARP packets can arrive on untrusted ports.
Limit These settings have no effect on trusted ports.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
243
26.10.2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure
Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates
log messages for receiving ARP packets from each VLAN. To open this screen, click Advanced
Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure
> VLAN.
Figure 168 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection
> Configure > VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Rate (pps) Specify the maximum rate (1-2048 packets per second) at which the Switch
receives ARP packet s from each port. The Switch discards any additional ARP
packets. Enter 0 to disable this limit.
Burst interval
(seconds) The burst interval is the length of time over which the rate of ARP packets is
monitored for each port. F or example, if the r ate is 15 pps and the burs t interv al is
1 second, then the Switch accepts a maximum of 15 ARP packets in every one-
second interval. If the burst interval is 5 seconds, then the Switch accepts a
maximum of 75 ARP packets in every five-second interval.
Enter the length (1-15 seconds) of the burst interval.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch
loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the
top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you
are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Table 109 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection >
Configure > Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 110 Advanced Application > IP Source G uard > IPv4 Source G uard Setup > AR P Inspection >
Configure > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below.
Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below.
End VID Enter the highe st VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below.
Apply Cli ck this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above. If you
configure the * VLAN, the settings are applied to all VLANs.
Enabled Select Yes to enable ARP inspection on the VLAN. Select No to disable ARP inspection on
the VLAN.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
244
26.11 IPv6 Source Guard Overview
The purpose of IPv6 source guard is to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized users by
using a binding table that validates the source of IPv6 traffic. The binding table can be manually
created or be learned through Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version 6 snooping (DHCPv6
snooping). IPv6 source guard can deny IPv6 tr affic from an unknown source. The IPv6 source guard
binding table includes:
• IPv6 address
• IPv6 prefix
•VLAN ID
• Port number
• MAC address
Enable IPv6 source guard on a port for the Switch to check incoming IPv6 packets on that port. A
packet is allowed when it matches any entry in the IPSG binding table. If a user tries to send IPv6
packets to the Switch that do not match an entry in the IPSG binding table, the Switch will drop
these packets. The Switch forwards matching traffic normally.
26.12 IPv6 Source Binding Status
Use this screen to look at the current IPv6 dynamic and static bindings and to remove dynamic
bindings based on IPv6 address and/or IPv6 prefix. Bindings are used to distinguish between
authorized and unauthorized packets in the network. The Switch learns the bindings by snooping
DHCP packets (dynamic bindings) and from information provided manually by administrators (static
bindings). To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Sou rce Guar d > IP v6 Source
Binding Status.
Log Specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from the
VLAN.
None: The Switch does not generate any log messages when it receives an ARP packet
from the V LAN.
Deny: The Switch generates log messages when it discards an A RP packet from the
VLAN.
Permit: The Switch generates log messages when it forwards an ARP packet from the
VLAN.
All: The Switch generates log messages every time it receives an ARP packet from the
VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these chan ges if it is turned o ff or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Table 110 Advanced Application > IP Source G uard > IPv4 Source G uard Setup > AR P Inspection >
Configure > VLAN (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
245
Figure 169 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard >IPv6 Source Binding Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.13 IPv6 Static Binding Setup
Use this screen to manually create an IPv6 source guard binding table entry and manage IPv6
static bindings. Static bindings are uniquely identified by the source IPv6 address / prefix. Each
Table 111 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Binding Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Clear Dynamic
Source Binding Specify how you want the Switch to remove dynamic IPv6 source binding entries when
you click Flush.
• Select All to remove all of the dynamic entries from the IPv6 source binding table.
• Select IPv6 Address and enter an IPv6 address to remove the dynamic entries
snooped with the specified IPv6 address.
• Select IPv6 Prefix and enter a Prefix address to remove the dynamic entries
snooped with the specified Prefix address.
Flush Click this to remove dynamic IPv6 source binding entries according to your selections.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based or if not applicable, to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding.
Source Address This field displays the source IP address in the binding. If the entry is blank, th is field wil l
not be checked in the binding.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding. If the entry is blank, this field
will not be checked in the binding.
VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding. If the entry is blank, this field will
not be checked in the binding.
Port This field displays the port number in the binding. If this field is blank, the binding applies
to all ports.
Lease This field displays how many days, hours, minutes, and seconds the binding is valid; for
example, 2d3h4m5s means the binding is still vali d for 2 da ys, 3 hours, 4 minutes, and
5 seconds. This field displays infinity if the binding is always valid (for example, a static
binding).
Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding.
S: This static bin d ing was learned from infor mation provided manually by an
administrator.
DH: This dhcp-snooping binding was learned by snooping DHCP packets.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
246
source IPv6 address / prefix can only be in one static binding. If you try to create a static binding
with the same source IPv6 address / prefix as an existing static binding, the new static binding
replaces the original one. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard >
IPv6 Static Binding Setup.
Figure 170 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Static Binding Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 112 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Static Binding Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Static
Binding
Source Address Enter the IPv6 address or IPv6 prefix and prefix length in the binding.
MAC Address Enter the source MAC address in the binding. If this binding doesn’t check this field,
select Any.
Note: You cannot choose Any for all three of MAC Address, VLAN and Port. You must fill
in at least one.
VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the binding. If this binding doesn’t check this field, select
Any.
Port Specify the port(s) in the binding. If this binding has one port, select the first radio
button and enter the port number in the field to the right. If this binding applies to all
ports, select Any.
Add Click this to create the specified static binding or to update an existing one.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based or if not applicable, to clear the fields above.
Clear Click this to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding.
Source Address This field displays the IPv6 address or IPv6 prefix and prefix length in the binding.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding. If the entry is blank, this field
will not be checked in the binding.
VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding. If the entry is blank, this field will
not be checked in the binding.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
247
26.14 IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup
Use this screen to have IPv6 source guard forward valid IPv6 addresses and/or IPv6 prefixes that
are stored in the binding table and allow or block data traffic from all link-local addresses. To open
this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Policy
Setup.
• If you select Validate Address and not Validate Prefix, tr affic for a binding entry that matches
an IPv6 address and VLAN ID, port number, and MAC address will be forwarded. If this binding
entry is an IPv6 prefix, the traffic will be denied.
• If you select Validate Prefix and not Validate Address , traffic for a binding entry that matches
an IPv6 prefix and VLAN ID, port number, and MAC address will be forwarded. If this binding
entry is an IPv6 address, the traffic will be denied.
• If you select both Validate Prefix and Validate Address then traffic matching either IPv6
address or prefix will be forwarded.
Figure 171 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Port This field displays the port number in the binding. If this field is blank, the binding applies
to all ports.
Select an entry’s check box to select a s p ecific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select an entry checkbox and click Delete to remove the specified entry.
Cancel Clic k this to clear the check boxes above.
Ta ble 112 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Static Binding Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 113 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Static Binding Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this IPv6 source guard policy.
Validate Address Select Validate Address to have IPv6 source guard forward valid addresses that are
stored in the binding table.
Validate Prefix Sele ct Validate Prefix to have IPv6 source guard forward valid prefixes that are stored
in the binding table.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
248
26.15 IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup
Use this screen to apply configured IPv6 source guard policies to ports you specify. Use port * to
apply a policy to all ports. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard >
IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup.
Link Local Select Permit to allow data traffic from all link-local addresses; otherwise leave the
setting at Deny. A link-local address is an IPv6 unicast address that can be automatically
configured on any interface using the link-local prefix FE80::/10 and the interface
identifier in the modified EUI-64 format.
Add Click this to create the IPv6 source guard policy or to update an existing one.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above or if not applicable, to clear the fields above.
Clear Click this to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each policy.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this IPv6 source
guard policy.
Validate Address This field displays the Validate Address status for this IPv6 source guard policy.
Validate Prefix This field displays the Validate Prefix status for this IPv6 source guard policy.
Link Local This field displays the Link Local traffic status for this IPv6 source guard policy.
Select an entry’s check box to select a s p ecific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select an entry checkbox and click Delete to remove the specified entry.
Cancel Clic k this to clear the check boxes above.
Ta ble 113 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Static Binding Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
249
Figure 172 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
26.16 IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup
Use this screen to dynamically create an IPv6 source guard binding table using a DHCPv6 snooping
policy. A DHCPv6 snooping policy lets the Switch sniff DHCPv6 packets sent from a DHCPv6 server
to a DHCPv6 client when it is assigning an IPv6 address. When a DHCPv6 client successfully gets a
Ta ble 114 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This field displays the port number. If you configure the * port, the settings are applied
to all of the ports.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Policy Name Sele ct an IPv6 source guard policy that the Switch will apply to this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
250
valid IPv6 address, DHCPv6 snooping builds the binding table dynamically. To open this screen,
click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup.
Note: If you do not select Protocol and Prefix Glean, then the Switch cannot perform
DHCPv6 snooping.
Figure 173 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 115 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this IPv6 snooping policy.
Protocol Select DHCP to let the Switch sni ff DHCP v6 packets sent from a DHCPv6 server to
a DHCPv6 client.
Prefix Glean Select this to learn the IPv6 prefix and length from DHCPv6 sniffed packets.
Limit Address Count This is the number of IPv6 addresses and prefixes learned using the IPv6 snooping
policy.
Note: The maximum limit address count is the maximum size of the IPv6 source
guard binding table. At the time of writing, it is 50 for the GS2210 Switch
series. See the product datasheet for the latest specifications.
Add Click this to create the specified IP v6 snooping pol icy or to update an existi ng one.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based or if not applicable, to clear the fields
above.
Clear Click this to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each IPv6 snooping policy.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this IPv6
source guard policy.
Protocol This field displays the protocols learned from DHCPv6 sniffed packets.
Prefix Glean This field displays the IPv6 prefixes learned from DHCPv6 sniffed packets.
Limit Address Count This field displays the the number of IPv6 addresses and prefixes learned using the
IPv6 snooping policy.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check
box in the table heading row to select all entries.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
251
26.17 IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup
Use this screen to enable a DHCPv6 snooping policy on a specific VLAN interface. To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup.
Figure 174 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Delete Select an entry checkbox and click Delete to remove the specified entry.
Cancel Click this to clear the check boxes above.
Ta ble 115 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 116 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the VLAN interface to apply the selected DHCPv6 snooping pol ic y.
Policy Select the IPv6 snooping poli cy to apply to this VLAN interface.
Add Click this to cre a te the VLAN interface-to-IPv6 snooping policy association.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based or, if not applicable, to clear the fields above.
Clear Click this to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding.
Interface This field displays the VLAN interface.
Policy This field displays the DHCPv6 snooping policy.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select an entry checkbox and click Delete to remove the specified entry.
Cancel Click this to clear the check boxes above.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
252
26.18 IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup
Use this screen to specify which ports are trusted for DHCPv6 snooping. To open this screen, click
Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv 6 DHC P Trus t Setu p.
Note: DHCPv6 solicit packets are sent from a DHCPv6 client to a DHCPv6 server. Reply
packets from a DHCPv6 server connected to an untrusted port are discarded.
Use port * to have all ports be Untrusted or Trusted.
Figure 175 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 117 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping. If
you do not select this then IPv6 DHCP Trust is not used and all ports are automatically
trusted.
Port This field displays the port number. If you configure the * port, the settings are applied to
all of the ports.
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
253
26.19 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
26.19.1 DHCP Snooping Overview
Use DHCP snooping to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding
table dynamically. This can prevent clients from getting IP addresses from unauthorized DHCP
servers.
26.19.1.1 Tru sted vs. Untrusted Ports
Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for DHCP snooping. This setting is
independent of the trusted/untrusted setting for ARP inspection. Y ou can also specify the maximum
number for DHCP packets that each port (trusted or untrusted) can receive each second.
Tr usted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches. The Switch discards DHCP packets
from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high. The Switch learns
dynamic bindings from trusted ports.
Note: If DHCP is enabled and there are no trusted ports, DHCP requests will not succeed.
Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers. The Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted
ports in the following situations:
• The packet is a DHCP server packet (for example, OFFER, ACK, or NACK).
• The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current
bindings.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Trusted state Select whether this port is a trusted port (Trusted) or an untrusted port (Untrusted).
Trusted ports are connected to DHCPv6 servers or other switches.
Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers, and the Switch discards DHCPv6 packets
from untrusted ports in the following situations:
• The packet is a DHCPv6 server packet (for example, ADVERTISE, REPLY, or RELAY-
REPLY).
• The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the
current bindings.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navi gation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Ta ble 117 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
254
• The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet, and the source MAC address and source port do not
match any of the current bindings.
• The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high.
26.19.1.2 DHCP Snooping Database
The Switch stores the binding table in volatile memory. If the Switch restarts, it loads static
bindings from permanent memory but loses the dynamic bindings, in which case the devices in the
network have to send DHCP requests again. As a result, it is recommended you configure the DHCP
snooping database.
The DHCP snooping database maintains the dynamic bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP
inspection in a file on an external TFTP server. If you set up the DHCP snooping database, the
Switch can reload the dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database after the Switch
restarts.
You can configure the name and location of the file on the external TFTP server. The file has the
following format:
Figure 176 DHCP Snooping Database File Format
The <initial-checksum> helps distinguish between the bindings in the latest update and the
bindings from previous updates. Each binding consists of 72 bytes, a space, and another checksum
that is used to validate the binding when it is read. If the calculated checksum is not equal to the
checksum in the file, that binding and all others after it are ignored.
26.19.1.3 DHCP Relay Option 82 Information
The Switch can add information to DHCP requests that it does not discard. This provides the DHCP
server more information about the source of the requests. The Switch can add the following
information:
• Slot ID (1 byte), port ID (1 byte), and source VLAN ID (2 bytes)
• System name (up to 32 bytes)
This information is stored in an Agent Information field in the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of
client DHCP request frames. See Chapter 40 on page 337 for more information about DHCP relay
option 82.
When the DHCP server responds, the Switch removes the information in the Agent Information field
before forwarding the response to the original source.
You can configure this setting for each source VLAN. This setting is independent of the DHCP relay
settings (Chapter 40 on page 337).
<initial-checksum>
TYPE DHCP-SNOOPING
VERSION 1
BEGIN
<binding-1> <checksum-1>
<binding-2> <checksum-1-2>
...
...
<binding-n> <checksum-1-2-..-n>
END
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
255
26.19.1.4 Configuring DHCP Snooping
Follow these steps to configure DHCP snooping on the Switch.
1Enable DHCP snooping on the Switch.
2Enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN, and configure DHCP relay option 82.
3Configure trusted and untrusted ports, and specify the maximum number of DHCP packets that
each port can receive per second.
4Configure static bindings.
26.19.2 ARP Inspection Overview
Use ARP inspection to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network. This can prevent many kinds
of man-in-the-middle attacks, such as the one in the following example.
Figure 177 Example: Man-in-the-middle Attack
In this example, computer B tries to establish a connection with computer A. Computer X is in the
same broadcast domain as computer A and intercepts the ARP request for computer A. Then,
computer X does the following things:
• It pretends to be computer A and responds to computer B.
• It pretends to be computer B and sends a message to computer A.
As a result, all the communication between computer A and computer B passes through computer
X. Computer X can read and alter the information passed between them.
26.19.2.1 ARP Inspection and MAC Address Filters
When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet, it automatically creates a MAC address
filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP
packet. You can configure how long the MAC address filter remains in the Switch.
These MAC address filters are different than regular MAC address filters (Chapter 12 on page 119).
• They are stored only in volatile memory.
• They do not use the same space in memory that regular MAC address filters use.
• They appear only in the ARP Inspection screens and commands, not in the MAC Address
Filter screens and commands.
AXB
Chapter 26 IP Source Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
256
26.19.2.2 Tru sted vs. Untrusted Ports
Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for ARP inspection. This setting is
independent of the trusted/untrusted setting for DHCP snooping. Y ou can al so specify the maximum
rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on untrusted ports.
The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason.
The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations:
• The sender’s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings.
• The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high.
26.19.2.3 Syslog
The Switch can send syslog messages to the specified syslog server (Chapter 46 on page 389)
when it forwards or discards ARP packets. The Switch can consolidate log messages and send log
messages in batches to make this mechanism more efficient.
26.19.2.4 Configuring ARP Inspection
Follow these steps to configure ARP inspection on the Switch.
1Configure DHCP snooping. See Section 26.19.1 .4 on page 255.
Note: It is recommended you enable DHCP snooping at least one day before you enable
ARP inspection so that the Switch has enough time to build the binding table.
2Enable ARP inspection on each VLAN.
3Configure trusted and untrusted ports, and specify the maximum number of ARP pack ets that each
port can receive per second.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
257
CHAPTER 27
Loop Guard
27.1 Loop Guard Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to guard against loops on the edge of your
network.
Loop guard allows you to configure the Switch to shut down a port if it detects that packets sent out
on that port loop back to the Switch. While you can use Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) to prevent
loops in the core of your network. STP cannot prevent loops that occur on the edge of your
network.
Figure 178 Loop Guard vs. STP
Refer to Section 27.1.2 on page 257 for more information.
27.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Loop Guard screen (Section 27.2 on page 259) to enable loop guard on the Switch and in
specific ports.
27.1.2 What You Need to Know
Loop guard is designed to handle loop problems on the edge of your network. This can occur when
a port is connected to a Switch that is in a loop state. Loop state occurs as a result of human error.
It happens when two ports on a switch are connected with the same cable. When a switch in loop
state sends out broadcast messages the messages loop back to the switch and are re-broadcast
again and again causing a broadcast storm.
If a switch (not in loop state) connects to a switch in loop state, then it will be affected by the
switch in loop state in the following way:
STP
Loop Guard
Chapter 27 Loop Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
258
• It will receive broadcast messages sent out from the switch in loop state.
• It will receive its own broadcast messages that it sends out as they loop back. It will then re-
broadcast those messages again.
The following figure shows port N on switch A connected to switch B. Switch B is in loop state.
When broadcast or multicast packets leave port N and reach switch B, they are sent back to port N
on A as they are rebroadcast from B.
Figure 179 Switch in Loop State
The loop guard feature checks to see if a loop guard enabled port is connected to a switch in loop
state. This is accomplished by periodically sending a probe packet and seeing if the packet returns
on the same port. If this is the case, the Switch will shut down the port connected to the switch in
loop state.
The following figure shows a loop guard enabled port N on switch A sending a probe packet P to
switch B. Since switch B is in loop state, the probe packet P returns to port N on A. Th e Switch
then shuts down port N to ensure that the rest of the network is not affected by the switch in loop
state.
Figure 180 Loop Guard - Probe Packet
The Switch also shuts down port N if the probe packet returns to switch A on any other port. In
other words loop guard also protects against standard network loops. The following figure
illustrates three switches forming a loop. A sample path of the loop guard probe packet is also
shown. In this example, the probe packet is sent from port N and returns on another port. As long
as loop guard is enabled on port N. The Switch will shut down port N if it detects that the probe
packet has returned to the Switch.
AB
N
AB
P
P
N
Chapter 27 Loop Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
259
Figure 181 Loop Guard - Network Loop
Note: After resolving the loop problem on your network you can re-activate the disabled
port via the web configur ator (see Section 8.7 on page 72) or via commands (See
the CLI Reference Guide).
27.2 Loop Guard Setup
Click Advanced Application > Loop Guard in the navigation panel to display the screen as
shown.
Note: The loop guard feature can not be enabled on the ports that have Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP, MRSTP or MSTP) enabled.
Figure 182 Advanced Application > Loop Guard
A
P
P
N
P
Chapter 27 Loop Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
260
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 118 Advanced Application > Loop Guard
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Sel ect this option to enable loop guard on the Switch.
The Switch generates syslog, internal log messages as well as SNMP traps when it shuts
down a port via the loop guard feature.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first
to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable the loop guard feature on this port. The Switch sends probe
packets from this port to check if the switch it is connected to is in loop state. If the switch
that this port is connected is in loop state the Switch will shut down this port.
Clear this check box to disable the loop guard feature.
Apply Click Apply to save your change s t o the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch l os es th es e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are d one configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
261
CHAPTER 28
Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
28.1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch.
28.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the Layer 2 Protocol Tunnel screen (Section 28.2 on page 262) to enable layer 2 protocol
tunneling on the Switch and specify a MAC address with which the Switch uses to encapsulate the
layer 2 protocol packets by replacing the destination MAC address in the packets.
28.1.2 What You Need to Know
Layer 2 protocol tunneling (L2PT) is used on the service provider's edge devices.
L2PT allows edge switches (1 and 2 in the following figure) to tunnel layer 2 STP (Spanning Tree
Protocol), CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) and VTP (VLAN Trunking Protocol) packets between
customer switches (A, B and C in the following figure) connected through the service provider’s
network. The edge switch encapsulates layer 2 protocol packets with a specific MAC address before
sending them across the service provider’s network to other edge switches.
Figure 183 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Network Scenario
In the following example, if you enable L2PT for STP, you can have switches A, B, C and D in the
same spanning tree, even though switch A is not directly connected to switches B, C and D.
Topology change information can be propagated throughout the service provider’s network.
To emulate a point-to-point topology between two customer switches at different sites, such as A
and B, you can enable protocol tunneling on edge switches 1 and 2 for PAgP (Port Aggregation
Protocol), LACP or UDLD (UniDirectional Link Detection).
12
AC
Service Provider's
Network
STP
CDP
B
VTP
STP
VTP
CDP
Chapter 28 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
262
Figure 184 L2PT Network Example
28.1.2.1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Mode
Each port can have two layer 2 protocol tunneling modes, Access and Tunnel.
•The Access port is an ingress port on the service provider's edge device (1 or 2 in Figure 184 on
page 262) and connected to a customer switch (A or B). Incoming layer 2 protocol packets
received on an access port are encapsulated and forwarded to the tunnel ports.
•The Tunnel port is an egress port at the edge of the service provider's network and connected to
another service provider’s switch. Incoming encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a
tunnel port are decapsulated and sent to an access port.
28.2 Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
Click Advanced Application > Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling in the navigation panel to display the
screen as shown.
12
A
B
Service Provider's
Network C
D
STP
STP
STP
Chapter 28 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
263
Figure 185 Advanced Application > Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 119 Advanced Application > Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch.
Destination
MAC Address Specify a MAC address with which the Switch uses to encapsulate the l ayer 2 protocol
packets by replacing the destination MAC address in th e packets.
Note: The MAC address can be either a unicast MAC address or multicast MAC address. If
you use a unicast MAC address, make sure the MAC address does not exist in the
address table of a switch on the service provider’s network.
Note: All the edge switches in the service provider’s network should be set to use the same
MAC address for encapsulation.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
CDP Select this option to have the S wi tc h tunn el CDP (Ci sc o Dis covery Protocol ) packets so that
other Cisco devices can be discovered through the service provid er’s network.
Chapter 28 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
264
STP Select this option to have the Swit ch tunnel STP (Spanning Tree Prot ocol) packets so that
STP can run properly across the service provider’s network and spanning trees can be set
up based on bridge information from all (local and remote) networks.
VTP Select this option to have the Swit ch tunnel VTP (VLAN Trunking Protocol) packets so that
all customer switches can use consistent VLAN configuration through the service provider’s
network.
Point to Point The Switch supports PAgP (Port Aggregation Protocol), LACP (Link Aggregation Control
Protocol) and UDLD (UniDirectional Link Detection) tunneling for a poin t-to-point topology.
Both PAgP and UDLD are Cisco’s proprietary data link layer protocols. PAgP is similar to
LACP and used to set up a logical aggregation of Ethernet ports automatically. UDLD is to
determine the link’s physical status and detect a unidirectional link.
PAGP Select this opti on to have the Switch send P AgP pack ets to a peer to aut omatically negotiate
and build a logical port aggregation.
LACP Select this option to have the Switch send LACP packets to a peer to dynamically creates
and manages trunk groups.
UDLD Select this option to have the Switch send UDLD packets to a peer’s port it connected to
monitor the physical status of a link.
Mode Select Access to have the Switch encapsulate the incoming layer 2 protocol packets and
forward them to the tunnel port(s). Select Access for ingress ports at the edge of the
service provider's network.
Note: You can enable L2PT services for STP, LACP, VTP, CDP, UDLD, and PAGP on the
access port(s) only.
Select Tunnel for egress ports at the edge of the service provider's network. The Switch
decapsulates the encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a tunnel port by
changing the destination MAC address to the original one, a nd then forward them to an
access port. If the service(s) is not enabled on an access port, the protocol packets are
dropped.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are d one configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 119 Advanced Application > Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
265
CHAPTER 29
PPPoE
29.1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Overview
This chapter describes how the Switch give s a PPP oE termination server additional information that
the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client.
A PPPoE Intermediate Agent (PPPoE IA) is deployed between a PPPoE server and PPPoE clients. It
helps the PPPoE server identify and authenticate clients by adding subscriber line specific
information to PPPoE discovery packets from clients on a per-port or per-port-per-VLAN basis
before forwarding them to the PPPoE server.
29.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the PPPoE screen (Section 29.2 on page 267) to display the main PPPoE screen.
•Use the Intermediate Agent screen (Section 29.3 on page 268) to enable the PPPoE
Intermediate Agent on the Switch.
•Use the PPPoE IA Per-Port screen (Section 29.3.1 on page 269) to set the port state and
configure PPPoE intermediate agent sub-options on a per-port basis.
•Use the PPPoE IA Per-Port Per-VLAN screen (Section 29.3.2 on page 270) to configure PPP oE
IA settings that apply to a specific VLAN on a port.
•Use the PPPoE IA for VLAN (Section 29.3.3 on p a ge 271) to enable the PPPoE Intermediate
Agent on a VLAN.
29.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read on for concepts on ARP that can help you configure the screen in this chapter.
29.1.2.1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Tag Format
If the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled, the Switch adds a vendor-specific tag to PADI (PPPoE
Active Discovery Initialization) and PADR (PPPoE Active Discovery Request) packets from PPPoE
clients. This tag is defined in RFC 2516 and has the following format for this feature.
PPPoE IA PPPoE Server
PPPoE Client
Table 120 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Vendor-specific Tag Format
Tag_Type
(0x0105)
Tag_Len Value i1 i2
Chapter 29 PPPoE
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
266
The Tag_Type is 0x0105 for vendor-specific tags, as defined in RFC 2516. The Tag_Len indicates the
length of V alue, i1 and i2. The V alue is the 32-bit number 0x00000DE9, which stands for the “ ADSL
Forum” IANA entry. i1 and i2 are PPPoE intermediate agent sub-options, which contain additional
information about the PPPoE client.
29.1.2.2 Sub-Option Format
There are two types of sub-option: “Agent Circuit ID Sub-option” and “Agent Remote ID Sub-
option”. They have the following formats.
The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub-option and 2 identifies this as an
Agent Remote ID sub-option. The next field specifies the length of the field. The Switch takes the
Circuit ID string you manu ally configure for a VLAN on a port as the highest priority and the Circuit
ID string for a port as the second priority. In addition, the Switch puts the PPPoE client’s MAC
address into the Agent Remote ID Sub-option if you do not specify any user-defined string.
Flexible Circuit ID Syntax with Identifier String and Variables
If you do not configure a Circuit ID string for a VLAN on a specific port or for a specific port, the
Switch adds the user-defined identifier string and variables into the Agent Circuit ID Sub-option.
The variables can be the slot ID of the PPPoE client, the port number of the PPPoE client and/or the
VLAN ID on the PPPoE packet.
The identifier-string, slot ID, port number and VLAN ID are separated from each other by a pound
key (#), semi-colon (;), period (.), comma (,), forw ard slash (/) o r space. An Agent Circuit ID Sub-
option example is “Switch/07/0123” and indicates the PPPoE packets come from a PPPoE client
which is connected to the Switch’s port 7 and belong to VLAN 123.
WT-101 Default Circuit ID Syntax
If you do not configure a Circuit ID string for a specific VLAN on a port or for a specific port, and
disable the flexible Circuit ID syntax in the PPPoE > Intermediate Agent screen, the Switch
automatically generates a Circuit ID string according to the default Circuit ID syntax which is
Table 121 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub-option Format: User-defined String
SubOpt Length Value
0x01
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
String
(63 bytes)
Table 122 PPPoE IA Remote ID Sub-option Format
SubOpt Length Value
0x02
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
MAC Address or String
(63 bytes)
Table 123 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub-option Format: Using Identifier String and Variables
SubOpt Length Value
0x01
(1 byte)
N
(1
byte)
Identifier
String
(53 byte)
delimiter
(1 byte)
Slot ID
(1 byte)
delimiter
(1 byte)
Port No
(2 byte)
delimiter
(1 byte)
VLAN
ID
(4
bytes)
Chapter 29 PPPoE
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
267
defined in the DSL Forum Working Text (WT)-101. The default access node identifier is the host
name of the PPPoE intermediate agent and the eth indicates “Ethernet”.
29.1.2.3 Port State
Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for the PPPoE intermediate agent. This
setting is independent of the trusted/untrusted setting for DHCP snooping or ARP inspection. You
can also specify the agent sub-options (circuit ID and remote ID) that the Switch adds to PADI and
PADR packets from PPPoE clients.
Tr usted ports are connected to PPPoE servers.
• If a PADO (PPPoE Active Discovery Offer), PADS (PPPoE Active Discovery Session-confirmation),
or PADT (PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate) packet is sent from a PPPoE server and received on
a trusted port, the Switch forwards it to all other ports.
• If a PADI or PADR packet is sent from a PPPoE client but received on a trusted port, the Switch
forwards it to other trusted port(s).
Note: The Switch will drop all PPPoE discovery packets if you enable the PPPoE
intermediate agent and there are no trusted ports.
Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers.
• If a PADI, PADR, or PADT packet is sent from a PPPoE client and received on an untrusted port,
the Switch adds a vendor-specific tag to the packet and then forwards it to the trusted port(s).
• The Switch discards PADO and P ADS packets which are sent from a PPPoE server but received on
an untrusted port.
29.2 PPPoE Screen
Use this screen to configure the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on the Switch.
Click Advanced Application > PPPoE in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Click Click He re to go to the Intermediate Agent screen.
Figure 186 Advanced Application > PPPoE Intermediate Agent
Table 124 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub-option Format: Defined in WT-101
SubOpt Length Value
0x01
(1 byte)
N
(1
byte)
Access
Node
Identifier
(20 byte)
Space
(1
byte)
eth
(3
byte)
Space
(1
byte)
Slot
ID
(1
byte)
/
(1
byte)
Port No
(2
byte)
:
(1
byte)
VLAN
ID
(4
bytes)
Chapter 29 PPPoE
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
268
29.3 PPPoE Intermediate Agent
Use this screen to configure the Switch to give a PPPoE termination server additional subscriber
information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client.
Click Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent in the navigation panel to display
the screen as shown.
Figure 187 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 125 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable the PPPoE intermediate agent globally on the Switch.
access-node-
identifier Enter up to 20 ASCII characters to identify the PPPoE intermediate agent. Hyphens (-) and
spaces are also allowed. The default is the Switch’s host name.
circuit-id Use this section to configure the Circuit ID field in the PADI and PADR packets.
The Circuit ID you configure for a specific port or for a specific VLAN on a port has priority
over this.
The Circuit ID you configure for a specific port (in the Advanced Application > PPPoE >
Intermediate Agent > Port screen) or for a specific VLAN on a port (in the Advanced
Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port > VLAN screen) has priority over
this. That means, if you also want to configure PPPoE IA Per-Po rt or Per-Port Per-VLAN
setting, lea ve the fields her e empty and configure circuit-id and remote-i d in the Per -P ort or
Per-Port Per -VLAN screen.
Active Select this option to have the Switch add the user-defined identi fier string and variables
(specified in the option field) to PADI or PADR packets from PPPoE clients.
If you leave this option unselected and do not configure any Circuit ID string (using CLI
commands) on the Switch, the Switch will use the string specified in the access-node-
identifier field.
identifier-
string Specify a string that the Swi tch adds in the Agent Circ uit ID sub-option. You can enter up to
53 ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed.
option Select the variables that you want the Switch to generate and add in the Agent Circuit ID
sub-option. The variable opt ions include sp, sv, pv and spv which indicate combinati ons of
slot-port, slot-VLAN, port-VLAN and sl ot-port-VLAN respectively. The Switch enters a zero
into the PADI and PADR packets for the slot value.
Chapter 29 PPPoE
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
269
29.3.1 PPPoE IA Per-Port
Use this screen to specify whether individual ports are trusted or untrusted ports and have the
Switch add extra information to PPPoE discovery packets from PPPoE clients on a per-port basis.
Note: The Switch will drop all PPPoE packets if you enable the PPPoE Intermediate Agent
on the Switch and there are no trusted ports.
Click the Port link in the Int e rmediate Agent screen to display the screen as shown.
Figure 188 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port
delimiter Select a delimiter to separate the identifier-string, slot ID, port number and/or VLAN ID
from each other. You can use a pound key (#), semi-colon (;), period (.), comma (,),
forward slash (/) or space.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’ s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top na vigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are d one configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 125 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 29 PPPoE
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
270
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
29.3.2 PPPoE IA Per-Port Per-VLAN
Use this screen to configure PPPoE IA settings that apply to a specific VLAN on a port.
Click the VLAN link in the Intermediate Agent > Port screen to display the screen as shown.
Table 126 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This field displays the port number.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Server Trusted
State Select whether this port is a trusted port (Trusted) or an untrusted port (Untrusted).
Trusted ports are uplink ports connected to PPPoE servers.
If a PADO (PPPoE Active Discovery Offer), PADS (PPPoE Active Discovery Session-
confirmation), or PADT (PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate) packet is sent from a PPPoE
server and received on a trusted port, the Switch forwards it to all other ports.
If a PADI or PADR packet is sent from a PPPoE client but received on a trusted port, the
Switch forwards it to other trusted port(s).
Untrusted ports are downlink ports connected to subscribers.
If a PADI, PADR, or PADT packet is sent from a PPPoE client and received on an untrusted
port, the Switch adds a vendor-specific tag to the packet and then forwards it to the trusted
port(s).
The Switch discards PADO and PADS packets which are sent from a PPPoE server but
received on an untrusted port.
Circuit-id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Circuit ID
sub-option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this port. Spaces are allowed.
The Circuit ID you configure for a specific VLAN on a port (in the Adv anced Applic ation >
PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port > VLAN screen) has the highest priority.
Remote-id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Remote ID
sub-option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this port. Spaces are allowed.
If you do not specify a string here or in the Remote-id field for a VLAN on a port, the
Switch automatically u ses the PPPoE client’s MAC address.
The Remote ID you configure for a specific VLAN on a port (in the Advanced Application
> PPPoE > Interme diate Agent > Port > VLAN screen) has the highest priority.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’ s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top na vigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are d one configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 29 PPPoE
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
271
Figure 189 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port > VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
29.3.3 PPPoE IA for VLAN
Use this screen to set whether the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled on a VLAN and whether the
Switch appends the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID to PPPoE discovery packets from a specific VLAN.
Click the VLAN link in the Intermediate Agent screen to display the screen as shown.
Table 127 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Show Port Enter a port number to show the PPPoE Intermediate Agent settings for the specified
VLAN(s) on the port.
Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to c onfigure in the sect ion below.
Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below.
End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below.
Apply Click Apply to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below.
Port This field displays the port number specified above.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above. If you configure
the * VLAN, the settings are applied to all VLANs.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all VLANs. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a VLAN-by-VLAN basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the VLANs as soon as you make them.
Circuit-id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Circuit ID
sub-option for this VLAN on the specified port. Spaces are al lowed.
The Circuit ID you configure here has the highest priority.
Remote-id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Remote ID
sub-option for this VLAN on the specified port. Spaces are al lowed.
If you do not specify a string here or in the Remote-id field for a specific port, the Switch
automatically uses the PPPoE client’s MAC address.
The Remote ID you configure here has the highest priority.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are d one configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 29 PPPoE
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
272
Figure 190 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 128 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to c onfigure in the sect ion below.
Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below.
End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below.
Apply Click Apply to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above. If you configure
the * VLAN, the settings are applied to all VLANs.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all VLANs. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a VLAN-by-VLAN basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the VLANs as soon as you make them.
Enabled Select this o p tion to turn on the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on a VLAN.
Circuit-id Select this option to make the Circuit ID settings for a specific VLAN take effect.
Remote-id Select this optio n to make the Remote ID settings for a specific VLAN take effect.
Apply Click Apply to save your change s t o the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch l os es th es e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are d one configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
273
CHAPTER 30
Error Disable
30.1 Error Disable Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure the rate limit for control packets on a port, and set the
Switch to take an action (such as to shut down a port or stop sending packets) on a port when the
Switch detects a pre-configured error. It also shows you how to configure the Switch to
automatically undo the action after the error is gone.
30.1.1 CPU Protection Overview
Switches exchange protocol control packets in a network to get the latest networking information.
If a switch receives large numbers of control packets, such as ARP, BPDU or IGMP packets, which
are to be processed by the CPU, the CPU may become overloaded and be unable to handle regular
tasks properly.
The CPU protection feature allows you to limit the rate of ARP, BPDU and IGMP packets to be
delivered to the CPU on a port. This enhances the CPU efficiency and protects against potential DoS
attacks or errors from other network(s). You then can choose to drop control packets that exceed
the specified rate limit or disable a port on which the packets are received.
30.1.2 Error-Disable Recovery Overview
Some features, such as loop guard or CPU protection, allow the Switch to shut down a port or
discard specific packets on a port when an error is detected on the port. For example, if the Switch
detects that packets sent out the port(s) loop back to the Switch, the Switch can shut down the
port(s) automatically. After that, you need to enable the port(s) or allow the packets on a port
manually via the web configurator or the commands. With error-disable recovery, you can set the
disabled port(s) to become active or start receiving the packets again after the time interval you
specify.
30.1.3 What You Can Do
•Use the Errdisable Status screen (Section 30.3 on page 274) to view whether the Switch
detected that control packets exceeded the rate limit configured for a port or a port is disabled
according to the feature requirements and what action you configure, and related information.
•Use the CPU Protection screen (Section 30.4 on page 276) to limit the maximum number of
control packets (ARP, BPDU and/or IGMP) that the Switch can receive or transmit on a port.
•Use the Errdisable Detect screen (Section 30.5 on page 278) to have the Switch detect
whether the control packets exceed the rate limit configured for a port and configure the action
to take once the limit is exceeded.
•Use the Errdisable Recovery screen (Section 30.6 on page 278) to set the Switch to
automatically undo an action after the error is gone.
Chapter 30 Error Disable
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
274
30.2 Error Disable Screen
Use this screen to go to the screens where you can configure error disable related settings. Click
Advanced Application > Errdisable in the navigation panel to open the following screen.
Figure 191 Advanced Application > Errdisable
30.3 Error-Disable Status
Use this screen to view whether the Switch detected that control packets exceeded the rate limit
configured for a port or a port is disabled according to the feature requirements and what action
you configure, and related information. Click the Click here link next to Errdisable Status in the
Advanced Application > Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown.
Chapter 30 Error Disable
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
275
Figure 192 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 129 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Inactive-reason
mode reset
Port List Enter the number of the port(s) (separated by a comma) on which you want to reset
inactive-reason status.
Cause Select the cause of inactive-reason mode you want to reset here.
Re set Press to reset the specifi ed port(s) to handle ARP, BPDU or IGMP packets in stead of ignoring
them, if the port(s) is in inactive-reason mode.
Errdisable
Status
Port This is the number of the port on which you want to configure Errdisable Statu s.
Cause This displays the type of the control packet received on the port or the feature enabled on
the port and causing the Switch to take the specified action.
Chapter 30 Error Disable
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
276
30.4 CPU Protection Configuration
Use this screen to limit the maximum number of control packets (ARP, BPDU and/or IGMP) that the
Switch can receive or transmit on a port. Click the Click Here link next to CPU protection in the
Advanced Application > Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown.
Note: After you configure this screen, make sure you also enable error detection for the
specific control packets in the Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable
Detect screen.
Active This field displays whether the control packets (ARP, BPDU, and/or IGMP) on the port is
being detected or not. It also shows whether loop guard, anti-arp scanning, BPDU guard or
ZULD is enabled on the port.
Mode This field shows the action that the Switch takes for the cause.
•inactive-port - The Switch disables the port.
•inactive-reason - The Switch drops all the specified control packets (such as BPDU) on
the port.
•rate-limitation - The Switch drops the additional control packets the port(s) has to
handle in every one second.
Rate This field displays how many control packets this port can receive or transmit per second. It
can be adjusted in CPU Protection. 0 means no rate limit.
Status This field displays the errdisable status
•Forwarding: The Switch is forwarding packets. Rate-limitation mode is always in
Forwarding status.
•Err-disable: The Switch disables the port on which the control packets are received
(inactive-port) or drops specified control packets on the port (inactive-reason)
Recovery
Time Left This field displays the time (seconds) left before the port(s) becomes active of Errdisable
Recovery.
Total
Dropped This field displays the total packet number dropped by this port where the packet rate
exceeds the rate of mode rate-limitation.
Table 129 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 30 Error Disable
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
277
Figure 193 Advanced Application > Errdisable > CPU protection
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 130 Advanced Application > Errdisable > CPU protection
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Reason Select the type of control packet you want to configure here.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Rate Limit (pkt/
s) Enter a number from 0 to 256 to specify how many control packets this port can receive or
transmit per second.
0 means no rate limit.
You can c onfigure the acti on that the Switch takes when the limit is exceeded. See Section
30.5 on page 278 for detailed information.
Apply Click Apply to save your change s t o the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch l os es th es e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are d one configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 30 Error Disable
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
278
30.5 Error-Disable Detect Configuration
Use this screen to have the Switch detect whether the control packets exceed the rate limit
configured for a port and configure the action to take once the limit is exceeded. Click the Click
Here link next to Errdisable Detect link in the Advanced Application > Errdisable screen to
display the screen as shown.
Figure 194 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Detect
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
30.6 Error-Disable Recovery Configuration
Use this screen to configure the Switch to automatically undo an action after the error is gone. Click
the Click Here link next to Errdisable Recovery in the Advanced Application > Errdisable
screen to display the screen as shown.
Table 131 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Detect
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Cause This field displays the types of control packet that may cause CPU overload.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all entries. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each entry if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them.
Active Select this option to have t he S w it ch detec t if the conf igured rate limit for a specific control
packet is exceeded and take the action selected below.
Mode Select the action that the Switch takes when the number of control packets exceed the rate
limit on a port, set in the Advanced Application > Errdisable > CPU protection screen.
•inactive-port - The Switch disables the port on which the control packets are received.
•inactive-reason - The Switch drops all the specified control packets (such as BPDU) on
the port.
•rate-limitation - The Switch drops the additional control packets the port(s) has to
handle in every one second.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are d one configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 30 Error Disable
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
279
Figure 195 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Re covery
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 132 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Recovery
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Sel ect this option to turn on the error-disable recovery function on the Switch.
Reason This field displays the supported features that allow th e Switch to shut down a port or
discard packets on a port according to the feature requirements and what action you
configure.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all entries. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each entry if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them.
Timer Status Select this option to allow the Switch to wait for the specified time interval to activate a port
or allow specif ic pack et s on a po rt, after the error w as gone. Deselect this option to turn off
this rule.
Interval Enter the number of seconds (from 30 to 2592000) for the time interval.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are d one configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
280
CHAPTER 31 30
Private VLAN
This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to prevent communications between
ports in a VLAN.
31.1 Private VLAN Overview
Private VLAN allows you to do port isolation within a VLAN in a simple way. You specify which
port(s) in a VLAN is not isolated by adding it to the promiscuous port list. The Sw itch automatically
adds other ports in this VLAN to the isolated port list and blocks traffic between the isolated ports.
A promiscuous port can communicate with any port in the same VLAN. An isolated port can
communicate with the promiscuous port(s) only.
Note: You can have up to one private VLAN rule for each VLAN.
Figure 196 Private VLAN Example
Note: Make sure you keep at least one port in the promiscuous port list for a VLAN with
private VLAN enabled. Otherwise, this VLAN is blocked from the whole network.
31.2 Configuring Private VLAN
Click Advanced Application > Private VLAN in the navigation panel to display the screen as
shown.
Isolated ports: 2 ~ 6
Promiscuous port: 10
VLAN 123
2610
Chapter 31 Private VLAN
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
281
Figure 197 Advanced Application > Private VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 133 Advanced Application > Private VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Check this box to enable private VLAN in a VLAN.
Name Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification purposes.
VLAN ID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094. This is the VLAN to which this rule applies.
Promiscuous
Ports Enter the number of the port(s) that can communicate with any ports in the same VLAN.
Other ports belonging to this VLAN will be added to the isolation list and can only se nd and
receive traffic from the port(s) you specify here.
Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the
Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses
power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-
volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the index number of the rule.
Active This shows whether this rule is activated or not.
Name This is the descriptive name for this rule.
VLAN This is the VLAN to which this rule is applied.
Promiscuous
Ports This shows the port(s) that can communicate with any ports in the same VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry . Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
282
CHAPTER 32
Green Ethernet
This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to reduce the power consumed by switch ports.
32.1 Green Ethernet Overview
Green Ethernet reduces switch port power consumption in the following ways.
IEEE 802.3az Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE)
If EEE is enabled, both sides of a link support EEE and there is no traffic, the port enters Low Power
Idle (LPI) mode. LPI mode turns off some functions of the physical layer (becomes quiet) to save
power. Periodically the port transmits a REFRESH signal to allow the link partner to keep the link
alive. When there is tr affic to be sent, a WAKE signal is sent to the link partner to return the link to
active mode.
Auto Power Down
Auto Power Down turns off almost all functions of the port’s physical lay er functions when the link
is down, so the port only uses power to check for a link up pulse from the link partner. After the link
up pulse is detected, the port wakes up from Auto Power Down and operates normally.
Short Reach
Traditional Ethernet transmits all data with enough power to reach the maximum cable length.
Shorter cables lose less power, so Short Reach saves power by adjusting the transmit power of
each port according to the length of cable attached to that port.
32.2 Configuring Green Ethernet
Click Advanced Application > Gr een Ethernet in the navigation panel to display the screen as
shown.
Note: EEE, Auto Power Down and Short Reach are not supported on an uplink port.
Chapter 32 Green Ethernet
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
283
Figure 198 Advanced Application > Green Ethernet
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 134 Advanced Application > Green Ethernet
LABEL DESCRIPTION
EEE Select this to activate Energy Efficient Ethernet globally.
Auto Power
Down Select this to ac tivate Auto Power Down globally.
Short Reach Select this to activate Short Reach globally.
Port This field displays the port number.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
EEE Select this to activate Energy Efficien t Ethernet on this port.
Auto Power
Down Select this to activate Auto Power Down on this port.
Short Reach Select this to activate Short Reach on this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your change s t o the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch l os es th es e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are d one configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
284
CHAPTER 33 31
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
33.1 LLDP Overview
The LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) is a layer 2 protocol. It allows a network device to
advertise its identity and capabilities on the local network. It also allows the device to maintain and
store information from adjacent devices which are directly connected to the network device. This
helps an administrator discover network changes and perform necessary network reconfiguration
and management. The device information is encapsulated in the LLDPDUs (LLDP data units) in the
form of TLV (Type, Length, Value). Device information carried in the received LLDPDUs is stored in
the standard MIB.
The Switch supports these basic management TLVs.
•End of LLDPDU (mandatory)
• Chassis ID (mandatory)
• Port ID (mandatory)
• Time to Live (mandatory)
• Port Description (optional)
•System Name (optional)
• System Description (optional)
• System Capabilities (optional)
• Management Address (optional)
The Switch also supports the IEEE 802.1 and IEEE 802.3 organizationally-specific TLVs.
IEEE 802.1 specific TLVs:
• Port VLAN ID TLV (optional)
• Port and Protocol VLAN ID TLV (optional)
IEEE 802.3 specific TLVs:
• MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV (optional)
• Power via MDI TLV (optional, For PoE models only)
• Link Aggregation TLV (optional)
• Maximum Frame Size TLV (optional)
The optional TLVs are inserted betwe en the Time To Live TLV and the End of LLDPDU TLV.
The next figure demonstrates that the network devices Switches and R ou ters (S and R) transmit
and receive device information via LLDPDU and the network manager can query the information
using Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
285
Figure 199 LLDP Overview
33.2 LLDP-MED Overview
LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices) is an extension to the
standard LLDP developed by the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) TR-41.4
subcommittee which defines the enhanced discovery capabilities, such as VoIP applications, to
enable network administrators manage their network topology application more efficiently. Unlike
the traditional LLDP, which has some limitations when handling multiple application devices, the
LLDP-MED offers display of accurate physical topology, interoperability of devices, and easy trouble
shooting for misconfigured IP addresses. There are three classes of endpoint devices that the LLDP-
MED supports:
Class I: IP Communications Controllers or other communication related servers
Class II: Voice Gateways, Conference Bridges or Media Servers
Class III: IP-Phones, PC-based Softphones, End user Communication Appliances supporting IP
Media
The following figure shows that with the LLDP-MED, network connectivity devices (NCD) like
Switches and Routers will transmit LLDP TLV to endpoint device (ED) like IP Phone first (1), to get
its device type and capabilities information, then it will receive that information in LLDP-MED TLV
back from endpoint devices (2), after that the network connectivity devices will transmit LLDP-MED
TLV (3) to provision the endpoint device to such that the endpoint device’s network policy and
location identification information is updated. Since LLDPDU updates status and configuration
information periodically, network managers may check the result of provision via remote status.
The remote status is updated by receiving LLDP-MED TLVs from endpoint de vices.
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
286
Figure 200 LLDP-MED Overview
33.3 LLDP Screens
Click Advanced Application > LLDP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 201 Advanced Application > LLDP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 135 Advanced Application > LLDP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LLDP
LLDP Local
Status Click here to show a screen with the Switch’s LLDP information.
LLDP Remote
Status Click here to show a screen with LLDP information from the neighboring devices.
LLDP
Configuration Click here to show a screen to configure LLDP parameters.
LLDP-MED
LLDP-MED
Configuration Click here to show a screen to configure LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for
Media Endpoint Devices) parameters.
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
287
33.4 LLDP Local Status
This screen displays a summary of LLDP status on this Switch. Click Advanced Application >
LLDP > LLDP Local Status to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 202 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status
LLDP-MED
Network Policy Click here to show a screen to configure LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for
Media Endpoint Devices) network policy parameters.
LLDP-MED
Location Click here to show a screen to configure LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for
Media Endpoint Devices) location parame te rs.
Table 135 Advanced Application > LLDP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
288
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
33.4.1 LLDP Local Port Status Detail
This screen displays detailed LLDP status for each port on this Switch. Click Advanced Application
> LLDP > LLDP Local S tatus and then, click a port number, for example 1 in the local port column
to display the screen as shown next.
Table 136 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Basic TLV
Chassis ID TL V This displays the chassis ID of the local Switch, that is the Switch you’re configuring. The
chassis ID is identified by the chassis ID subtype.
Chassis ID Subtype - this displays how the chassis of the Switch is identifie d .
Chassis ID - This displays the chassis ID of the local Switch.
System Name
TLV This shows the host name of the Switch.
System
Description TLV This shows the firmware version of the Switch.
System
Capabilities
TLV
This shows the System Capabilities enabled and supported on the local Switch.
• System Capabilities Supported - Bridge
• System Capabilities Enabled - Bridge
Management
Address TLV The Management Address TL V identifies an address associated with the local LLDP agent
that may be used to reach higher layer entities to assist discovery by network
management. The TLV may also include the system interface number and an object
identifier (OID) that are associated with this management address
This field displays the Management Address settings on the specified port(s).
• Managemen t Address Subtype - ipv4 / all-802
• Interface Number Subtype - unknown
• Interface Number - 0 (not supported)
• Object Identifier - 0 (not supported)
LLDP Port
Information This displays the local port information.
Local Port This displays the number of the Switch port whi ch receives the LLDPDU from the remote
device. Click a port number to view the detailed LLDP status on this port at LLDP Local
Port Status Detail screen.
Port ID
Subtype This indicates how the port ID field is identified.
Port ID This is an alpha-numeric string that contains the specific identifier for the port from
which this LLDPDU was transmitted.
Port
Description This shows the port description that the Switch will advertise from this port.
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
289
Figure 203 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status > LLDP Local Port Status Detail
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
290
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 137 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status > LLDP Local Port Status Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Basic TLV These are the Basic TLV flags
Port ID TLV The port ID TLV identifies the specific port that transmitted the LLDP frame.
• Port ID Subtype: This shows how the port is identified.
• Port ID: This is the ID of the port.
Port
Description TLV This displays the local port description.
Dot1 TLV
Port VLAN ID
TLV This displays the VLAN ID sent by the IEEE 802.1 Port VLAN ID TLV.
Port-Protocol
VLAN ID TLV This displays the IEEE 802.1 Port Protocol VLAN ID TLVs, which indicates whether the
VLAN is enabled and supported.
Dot3 TLV
MAC PHY
Configuration &
Status TLV
The MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV advertises the bit-rate and duplex capability of
the sending 802.3 node. It also advertises the current duplex and bit-rating of the
sending node. Lastly, it advertises whether these setting were the result of auto-
negotiation during link initiation or manual override.
• AN Supported - Displays if the port supports or does not support auto-negotiation.
• AN Enabled - The current auto-negotiation status of the port.
• AN Advertised Capability - The auto-negotiation capabilities of the port.
• Oper MAU Type - The current Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type of the port
Link
Aggregation
TLV
The Link Aggregation TLV indicates whether the link is capable of being aggregated,
whether the link is currently in an aggregation, and if in an aggregation, the port
identification of the aggregation.
• Aggregation Capability — The current aggregation capability of the port.
• Aggregation Status — The current aggregation status of the port.
• Aggregation Port ID — The aggregation ID of the current port.
Max Frame
Size TLV This displays the maximum supported frame size in octets.
MED TLV LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery (MED) is an extension of LLDP that provides additional
capabilities to support media endpoint devices. MED ena bles advertisement and
discovery of network policies, device location discovery to allow creation of location
databases, and information for troubleshooting.
Capabilities
TLV This field displays which LLDP-MED TLV are capable to transmit on the Switch.
• Network Policy
•Location
Device Type
TLV This is the LLDP-MED device class. The ZyXEL Switch device type is:
• Network Connectivity
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
291
33.5 LLDP Remote Status
This screen displays a summary of LLDP status for each LLDP connection to a neighboring Switch.
Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status (Click H ere) to display the screen
as shown next.
Figure 204 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Network Policy
TLV This displays a network policy for the specified application.
•Voice
• Voice-Signaling
• Guest-Voice
• Guest-Voice-Signaling
• Softphone-Voice
• Video-Conferencing
•Streaming-Video
• Video-Signaling
Location
Identification
TLV
This shows the location information of a caller by its ELIN (Emergency Location Identifier
Number) or the IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information
(Civic Address LCI).
• Civic LCI - IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information
• ELIN - (Emergency Location Identifier Number)
• Coordinate-based LCI - latitu de, longitude and altitude coordinates o f the location
Configuration Information (LCI)
Table 137 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status > LLDP Local Port Status Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 138 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index The index number shows the number of remote devices that are connected to the
Switch. Click on an index number to view the detailed LLDP status for this remote device
in the LLDP Remote Port Status Detail screen.
Local Port This is the number of the Switch’s port that received LLDPDU from the remote device.
Chassis ID This displays the chassis ID of the remote device associated with the transmitting LLDP
agent. The chassis ID is identified by the chassis ID subtype. For example, the MAC
address of the remote device.
Port ID This is an alpha-numeric string that contains the specific identifier for the port from
which this LLDPDU was transmitted. The port ID is identified by the port ID subtype.
Port Description This displays a description for the port from which this LLDPDU was transmitted.
System Name This displays the system name of the remote device.
Management
Address This displays the management address of the remote device. It could be the MAC
address or IP address. You can click on the IP address hyperlink directly.
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
292
33.5.1 LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
This screen displays detailed LLDP status of the remote device conencted to the Switch. Click
Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status (Click Here) and then click an index
number, for example 1, in the Index column in the LLDP Remote Status screen to display the
screen as shown next.
Figure 205 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
(Basic TLV)
The following table describes the labels in Basic TLV part of the screen.
Table 139 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
(Basic TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Local Port This displays the number of the Switch’s port to which the remote device is connected.
Basic TLV
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
293
Chassis ID TLV • Chassis ID Subtype - this displays how the chassis of the remote device is identified.
• Chassis ID - this displays the chassis ID of the remote device. The chassis ID is
identified by the chassis ID subtype.
Port ID TLV • Port ID Subtype - this displays how the port of the remote device is identified.
• Port ID - this displays the port ID of the remote device. The port ID is identified by
the port ID subtype.
Time To Live
TLV This displays the time-to-l iv e (TTL) multiplier of LLDP frames. The device information on
the neighboring devices ages out and is discarded when its corresponding TTL expires.
The TTL value is to multiply the TTL multiplier by the LLDP frames transmitting interval.
Port
Description TLV This displays the remote port description.
System Name
TLV This displays the system name of the remote device.
System
Descriptio n TLV This displays the system description of the remote device.
System
Capabilities
TLV
This displays whether the system capabilities are enabled and supported on the remote
device.
• System Capabilities Supported
• System Capabilities Enabled
Management
Address TLV This displays the following management address parameters of the remote device.
• Management Address Subtype
• Management Address
• Interface Number Subtype
• Interface Number
• Object Identifier
Table 139 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
(Basic TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
294
Figure 206 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail>
(Dot 1 and Dot3 TLV)
The following table describes the labels in the Dot1 and Dot3 parts of the screen.
Table 140 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
(Dot1 and Dot3 TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Dot1 TLV
Port VLAN ID
TLV This displays the VLAN ID of this port on the remote device.
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
295
Port-Protocol
VLAN ID TLV This displays the IEEE 802.1 Port Protocol VLAN ID TLV, which indicates whether the
VLAN ID and whether it is enabled and supported on the port of remote Switch which
sent the LLDPDU.
• Port-Protocol VLAN ID
• Port-Protocol VLAN ID Supported
• Port-Protocol VLAN ID Enabled
Vlan Name TLV This shows the VLAN ID and name for remote device port.
•VLAN ID
• VLAN Name
Protocol
Identity TLV The Protocol Identity TLV allows the Switch to advertise the particular protocol s that are
accessible through its port.
Dot3 TLV
MAC PHY
Configuration &
Status TLV
The MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV advertises the bit-rate and duplex capability of
the sending 802.3 node. It also advertises the current duplex and bit-rating of the
sending node. Lastly, it advertises whether these setting were the result of auto-
negotiation during link initiation or manual override.
• AN Supported - Displays if the port supports or does not support auto-negotiation.
• AN Enabled - The current auto-negotiation status of the port.
• AN Advertised Capability - The auto-negotiation capabilities of the port.
• Oper MAU Type - The current Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type of the port
Link
Aggregation
TLV
The Link Aggregation TLV indicates whether the link is capable of being aggregated,
whether the link is currently in an aggregation, and if in an aggregation, the port
identification of the aggregation.
• Aggregation Capability — The current aggregation capability of the port.
• Aggregation Status — The current aggregation status of the port.
• Aggregation Port ID — The aggregation ID of the current port.
Power Vi a MDI
TLV The Power Via MDI TLV allows network management to advertise and discover the MDI
power support capabilities of the sending port on the remote device.
•Port Class
• MDI Supported
•MDI Enabled
• Pair Controlable
• PSE Power Pairs
•Power Class
Max Frame
Size TLV This displays the maximum supported frame size in octets.
Table 140 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
(Dot1 and Dot3 TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
296
Figure 207 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
(MED TLV)
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
297
The following table describes the labels in the MED TLV part of the screen.
Table 141 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
(MED TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MED TLV LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery (MED) is an extension of L LDP that provides additional
capabilities to support media endpoint devices. MED ena bles advertisement and
discovery of network policies, device location discovery to allow creation of location
databases, and information for troubleshooting.
Capabilities
TLV This displays the MED capabilities the remote port supports.
• Network Policy
•Location
• Extend Power via MDI PSE
•Extend Power via MDI PD
• Inventory Management
Device Type
TLV LLDP-MED endpoint device classes:
• Endpoint Class I
• Endpoint Class II
• Endpoint Class III
• Network Connectivity
Network Policy
TLV This displays a network policy for the specified application.
•Voice
• Voice-Signaling
• Guest-Voice
• Guest-Voice-Signaling
• Softphone-Voice
• Video-Conferencing
•Streaming-Video
• Video-Signaling
Location
Identification
TLV
This shows the location information of a caller by its:
• Coordinate-base LCI - latitude and longitude coordinates of the Location
Configuration Information (LCI)
• Civic LCI - IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information
• ELIN - (Emergency Location Identifier Number)
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
298
33.6 LLDP Configuration
Use this screen to configure global LLDP settings on the Switch. Click Advanced Application >
LLDP > LLDP Configuration (Click Here) to display the screen as shown next.
Inventory TLV The majority of IP Phones lack support of management protocols such as SNMP, so
LLDP-MED inventory TLVs are used to prov ide their inventory information to the Network
Connectivity Devices s uch as the Switch. The Inventory TLV may contain the following
information.
• Hardware Revision
•Software Revision
•Firmware Revision
•Model Name
• Manufacturer
• Serial Number
•Asset ID
Extended
Power via MDI
TLV
Extended Power Via MDI Discovery enables detailed power information to be advertised
by Media Endpoints, such as IP phones and Network Connectivity Devices such as the
Switch.
• Power Type - whether it is currently operating from primary power or is on backup
power (backup power may indicate to the Endpoint Device that it should move to a
power conservation mode).
• Power Source - whether or not the Endpoint is currently operating from an external
power source.
• Power Priority - the Endpoint Device’s power priority (which the Network Connectivity
Device may use to prioritize which devices will remain in service during power
shortages)
• Power Valu e - power requirement, in fractions of Watts, in current configuration
Table 141 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
(MED TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
299
Figure 208 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 142 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select to enable LLDP on the Switch. It is enabled by default.
Transmit Interval Enter how many seconds the Switch waits before sending LLDP packets.
Transmit Hold Enter the time-to-live (TTL) multiplier of LLDP frames. The device information on the
neighboring devices ages out and is discarded when its corresponding TTL expires. The
TTL value is to multiply the TTL multiplier by the LLDP packets transmitting interval.
Transmit De lay Enter the delay (in seconds) between succes sive LLDPDU transmissions i nitiated by
value or status changes in the Switch MIB.
Reinitialize Delay Enter the number of seconds for LLDP to wait before initializing on a port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Port This displays the Switch’s port number. * means all ports.
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
300
33.6.1 LLDP Configuration Basic TLV Setting
Use this screen to configure Basic TLV settings. Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP
Configuration (Click Here) > Basic TLV Setting to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 209 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration> Basic TLV Setting
* Use this row to mak e the settin g the same fo r all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Admin Status Select whether LLDP transmission and/or reception is allowed on this port.
• Disable - not allowed
• Tx-Only - transmit only
• Rx-Only - receive only
• Tx-Rx - transmit and receive
Notification Select whether LLDP notification is enabled on this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 142 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
301
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
33.6.2 LLDP Configuration Org-specific TLV Setting
Use this screen to configure organization-specific TLV settings. Click Advanced Application >
LLDP > LLDP Configuration (Click Here) > Org-specific TLV Setting to display the screen as
shown next.
Table 143 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration > Basic TLV Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This displays the Switch’s port number.
* Use this ro w to mak e the s etting th e same fo r all por ts. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Management
Address Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of Management Address TLVs
on the port(s).
Port Description Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of Port Description TLVs on the
port(s).
System
Capabilities Select the check box(es) to en able or to disa ble the sending of System Capabilities TLVs
on the port(s).
System
Description Select the check bo x( es ) to enable or to disable the sending of System Description TLVs
on the port(s).
System Name Se lect the check box(es ) to enable or to disable the s ending of System Name TL Vs on the
port(s).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
302
Figure 210 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration> Org-specific TLV Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 144 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration > Org-specific TLV Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This displays the Switch’s port number.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Dot1 TLV
Port-Protocol
VLAN ID Select the ch eck box(es) to en able or disable the sending of IEEE 802.1 P ort and Protocol
VLAN ID TLVs on the port(s).
Port VLAN ID Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of IEEE 802.1 Port VLAN ID
TLVs on the port(s). All check boxes in this column are enabled by default.
Dot3 TLV
Link
Aggregation Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of IEEE 802.3 Link Aggregation
TLVs on the port(s).
MAC/PHY Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of IEEE 802.3 MAC/PHY
Configuration/Status TLVs on the port(s). All check boxes in this column are enabled by
default.
Max Frame
Size Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of IEEE 802.3 Max Frame Size
TLVs on the port(s).
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
303
33.7 LLDP-MED Configuration
Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Configuration to display the screen as shown
next.
Figure 211 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Configuration
Power Vi a MDI Note: For PoE models only. The Power Via MDI TLV allows network management to
advertise and discover the MDI power support capabilities of the sending port on the
remote device.
•Port Class
• MDI Supported
•MDI Enabled
• Pair Controlable
• PSE Power Pairs
•Power Class
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 144 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration > Org-specific TLV Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
304
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
33.8 LLDP-MED Network Policy
Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Network Policy (Click Here) to display the
screen as shown next.
Figure 212 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Network Policy
Table 145 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This displays the Switch’s port number. Select * to configure all ports simultaneously.
* Use this ro w to mak e the s etting th e same fo r all por ts. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Notification
To pology
Change Select to enable LLDP-MED topology change traps on this port.
MED TLV Setting
Location Select to enable transmitting LLDP-MED location TLV.
Network Policy Select to enable transmitting LLDP-MED Network Policy TLV.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
305
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
33.9 LLDP-MED Location
Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location (Click Here) to display the screen
as shown next.
Table 146 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Network Policy
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Enter the port number to set up the LLDP-MED network policy.
Application Type Select the type of application used in the network policy.
•voice
• voice-signaling
• guest-voice
• guest-voice-signaling
• softphone-voice
• video-conferencing
•streaming-video
• video-signaling
Tag Select to tag or untag in the network policy.
• tagged
• untagged
VLAN Enter the VLAN ID number. It should be from 1 to 4094. For priority tagged frames, enter
“0”.
DSCP Enter the DSCP value of the network policy. The value is defined from 0 through 63 with
the 0 representing use of the default DSCP value.
Priority Enter the priority value for the network policy.
Add Click Add after finish entering the network policy information. A summary table will li st
all the Switch you’ve added.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin entering the information afresh.
Index This field displays the of index number of the network policy. Click an index number to
edit the rule.
Port This field displays the port number of the network policy.
Application Type This field displays the application type of the network policy.
Tag This field displays the Tag Status o f the network policy.
VLAN This field displays the VLANID of the network policy.
Priority This field displays the priority value of the network policy.
DSCP This field displays the DSCP value of the network policy.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rules that you want to remove, then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes.
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
306
Figure 213 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 147 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Enter the port number you want to set up the location wit hin the LLDP-M ED network.
Location
Coordinates The LLDP-MED uses geographical coordinates and Civic Address to set the location
information of the remote device. Geographical based coordinates includes latitude,
longitude, altitude and datum. Civic Address includes Country , State, County, City , Street
and other related information.
Latitude Enter the latitude information. The value should be from 0º to 90º. The negative value
represents the South.
•north
•south
Longitude Enter the longitude in formation. The value should be from 0º to 180º. The negative
value represents the West.
•west
•east
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
307
Altitude Enter the altitude inf ormation. The va lue should be from -2097151 to 2097151 in meters
or in floors.
• meters
• floor
Datum Select the appropriate geodetic datum used by GPS.
•WGS84
•NAD83-NAVD88
•NAD83-MLLW
Civic Address Enter the Civic Address by providing information such as Country, State , County, City,
Street, Number, ZIP code and other additional information. Enter at least two field in this
configuration including the Country. The valid length of the Country field is 2 characters
and all other fields are up to 32 characters.
•Country
•State
•County
•City
• Division
• Neighbor
•Street
• Leading-Street-Direction
• Street-Suffix
• Trailing-Street-Suffix
•House-Number
• House-Number-Suffix
• Landmark
• Additional-Location
•Name
•Zip-Code
•Building
•Unit
• Floor
• Room-Number
•Place-Type
• Postal-Community-Name
•Post-Office-Box
• Additional-Code
ELIN Number Enter a numerical digit string, corresponding to the ELIN identifier which is used during
emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk-based PSAP. The valid length is
from 10 to 25 characters.
Add Click Add after finish entering the location information.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin entering the location information afresh.
Index This lists the index number of the location configuration. Click an index number to view
or edit the location.
Port This lists the port number of the location configuration.
Location
Coordinates This field displays the location confi guration information based on geographical
coordinates that includ es longitude, latitude, altitude and datum.
Civic Address This field displays the Civic Address for the remote device using information such as
Country, State, Coun ty, City, Street, Number, ZIP code and additional information.
ELIN Number This field shows the Emergency Loca tion Identification Numb er (ELIN), which is used to
identify endpoint devices when they issue emergency call services. The valid length is
form 10 to 25 characters.
Table 147 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 33 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
308
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the locations th at you want to remove, then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes.
Table 147 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
309
CHAPTER 34
Anti-Arpscan
34.1 Anti-Arpscan Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), RFC 826, is a protocol used to convert a network-layer IP
address to a link -la yer MAC address. ARP scan is used to scan the network of a certain interface for
alive hosts. It shows the IP address and MAC addresses of all hosts found. Hackers could use ARP
scan to find targets in your network. Anti-arpscan is used to detect unusual ARP scan activity and
block suspicious hosts or ports.
Unusual ARP scan activity is determined by port and host thresholds that you set. A port threshold
is determined by the number of packets received per second on the port. If the received packet rate
is over the threshold, then the port is put into an Err-Disable state. You can recover the normal
state of the port manually if this happens and after you identify the cause of the problem.
A host threshold is determined by the number of ARP-request packets received per second. There is
a global threshold rate for all hosts. If the rate of a host is over the threshold, then that host is
blocked by using a MAC address filter. A blocked host is released automatically after the MAC aging
time expires.
Note: A port-based threshold m us t be larger than the host-based threshol d or the host-
based threshold will not work.
34.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the Anti-Arpscan Status screen (Section 34.2 on page 310) to see what ports are trusted
and are forwarding traffic or are disabled.
•Use the Anti-Arpscan Host Status screen (Section 34.3 on page 310) to view blocked hosts
and clear selected ones.
•Use the Anti-Arpscan Trust Host screen (Section 34.4 on page 311) to create or remove
trusted hosts identified by IP address and subnet mask. Anti-arpscan is not performed on
trusted hosts.
•Use this Anti-Arpscan Configure screen (Section 34. 5 on page 312) to enable anti- arpscan, set
port and host thresholds as well as configure ports to be trusted or untrusted.
34.1.2 What You Need to Know
• You should set an uplink port as a trusted port before enabling Anti-arpscan so as to prevent
the port from being shutdown due to receiving too many ARP messages.
• When a port is configured as a trusted port, Anti-arpscan is not performed on the port. Both
host and port thresholds are ignored for trusted ports. If the received ARP packet rate on a port
or the received ARP-requests from a host exceed the thresholds, the trusted port will not be
closed.
• If a port on the Switch is closed by Anti-arpscan, and y ou want to recov er it, then do one of the
following:
Chapter 34 Anti-Arpscan
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
310
•Go to Basic Setting > Port Setup. Clear Active and click Apply. Then select Active and
click Apply again.
•Go to Application > Errdiable > Errdisable Recovery and set the interval for Anti-
arpscan. After the interval expires, the closed port(s) will become active and start receiving
packets again.
• Use the command port no inactive.
• Refer to the port logs to see when a port was closed.
34.2 Anti-Arpscan Status
Use this screen to see what ports are trusted and are forwarding traffic or are disabled. To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan.
Figure 214 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
34.3 Anti-Arpscan Host Status
Use this screen to view blocked hosts and unblock ones connected to certain ports. To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Host Status.
Table 148 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Anti-Arpscan is.... This shows whether Anti-arpscan is enabled or disabled on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number of the Switch.
Trusted This field displays whether the port is trusted or untrusted. Anti-arpscan is not
performed on a trusted port.
State This field displays whether the port can forward traffic normally (Forwarding) or is
disabled (Err-Disable).
Chapter 34 Anti-Arpscan
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
311
Figure 215 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Host Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
34.4 Anti-Arpscan Trust Host
Use this screen to create or remove trusted hosts identified by IP address and subnet mask. Anti-
arpscan is not performed on trusted hosts. To open this screen, click Advanced Application >
Anti-Arpscan > Trust Host.
Figure 216 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Trust Host
Table 149 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Host Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Clear Fi ltered
host: A filtered host is a blocked IP address.
Port List Type a port number or a series of port numbers separated by commas and spaces, and
then click Clear to unblock all hosts connected to these ports.
Filtered host: This table li sts information on blocked hosts.
Index This displays the index number of an IP address (a host) that has been blocked.
Host IP This displays the IP address of the blocked host.
MAC This displays the MAC address of the blocked host.
VLAN This displays the VLAN ID that shows which VLAN the blocked host is in.
Port This displays the port number to which the blocked host is connected.
State This shows Err-Disable if the ARP-request rate from this host is over the threshold.
Forwarding hosts are not displayed.
Chapter 34 Anti-Arpscan
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
312
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
34.5 Anti-Arpscan Configure
Use this screen to enable Anti-Arpscan, set port and host thresholds as well as configure ports to
be trusted or untrusted. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan >
Configure.
Table 150 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Trust Host
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Type a descriptive name of up to 32 printable ASCII characters to identify this host.
Host IP Type the IP address of the host.
Mask A trusted host may consist of a subnet of IP addresses. Type a subnet mask to cr eate a
single host or a subnet of hosts.
Add Click this to create the trusted host.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based or, if not applicable, to cl ear the fields above.
Clear Click this to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each trusted host.
Name This field displays the name of the trusted host.
Host IP This field displays the IP address of the trusted host.
Mask This field displays the subnet mask of the trusted host.
Select an entry’s check box to select a s p ecific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select an entry checkbox and click Delete to remove the specified entry.
Cancel Clic k this to clear the check boxes above.
Chapter 34 Anti-Arpscan
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
313
Figure 217 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Configure
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 151 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Configure
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable Anti-arpscan on the Switch.
Port Threshold A port threshold is determined by the number of packet s received per secon d on the port.
If the received packet rate is over the threshold, then the port is put into an Err-Disable
state. Type the maximum number of packets per second allowed on the port before it is
blocked.
Note: The allowed range is 2 to 255 packets received per second.
Host Threshold A host threshold is determined by the number of ARP-request packets received per
second. This is the global threshold rate for all hosts. If the rate of a host is over the
threshold, then that host is blocked by using a MAC address filter. A blocked host is
released automatically after the MAC aging time expires.
Type the maxi mum number of ARP-request packets allowed by a host before it is
blocked.
Note: The allowed range is 2 to 100 ARP-request packets per second.
Note: The port-based threshold must be larger than the host-based threshold or the host-
based threshold will not be applied.
Port This is the port index number. Use port * to have all ports be Untrusted or Trusted.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Trusted State Select Untrusted or Trusted for the associated port. Anti-arpscan is not performed on
trusted hosts.
Chapter 34 Anti-Arpscan
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
314
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Table 151 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Configure (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
315
CHAPTER 35
BPDU Guard
35.1 BPDU Guard Overview
A BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) is a data frame that contains information about STP. STP-
aware switches exchange BPDUs periodically.
The BPDU guard feature allows you to prevent any new STP-aware switch from connecting to an
existing network and causing STP topology changes in the network. If there is any BPDU detected
on the port(s) on which BPDU guard is enabled, the Switch disables the port(s) automatically. You
can then enable the port(s) manually in the Basic Setting > Port Setup screen (Section 8.7 on
page 72) or use the Errdisable Recovery screen (see Section 30.6 on page 278) to have the
port(s) become active after a certain time interval.
35.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the BPDU Guard Status screen (Section 35.2 on page 315) to view the BPDU guard status.
•Use the BPDU Guard Configuration screen (Section 35.3 on page 316) to enable BPDU guard
on the Switch.
35.2 BPDU Guard Status
Use this screen to view whether BPDU guard is enabled on the Switch and the port status. Click
Advanced Application > BPDU Guard in the navigation panel.
Chapter 35 BPDU Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
316
Figure 218 Advanced Application > BPDU Guard Staus
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
35.3 BPDU Guard Configuration
Use this screen to turn on the BPDU guard feature on the Switch and port(s).
In the BPDU Guard Status screen click Configuration to display the configuration screen as
shown.
Table 152 Advanced Application > BPDU Guard Staus
LABEL DESCRIPTION
BPDU guard
globally
configuration
This field displays whether BPDU guard is activated on the Switch.
Port This is the number of the port on the Switch.
Active This shows whether BPDU guard is activated on the port.
Status This shows whether the port is shut down (Err-disable) or able to transmit packets
(Forwarding).
Chapter 35 BPDU Guard
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
317
Figure 219 Advanced Application > BPDU Guard > BPDU Guard Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 153 Advanced Application > BPDU Guard > BPDU Guard Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Sel ect this option to enable BPDU guard on the Switch.
Port This field displays the Switch’s port number.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable the BP DU guard feature on this port. The Switch shuts down
this port if there is any BPDU received on the port.
Clear this check box to disable the BPDU guard feature.
Apply Click Apply to save your change s t o the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch l os es th es e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are d one configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
318
CHAPTER 36
OAM
36.1 OAM Overview
Link layer Ethernet OAM (Operations, Administration and Maintenance) as described in IEEE
802.3ah is a link monitoring protocol. It utilizes OAM Protocol Data Units or OAM PDUs to transmit
link status information between directly connected Ethernet devices. Both devices must support
IEEE 802.3ah. Because link layer Ethernet OAM operates at layer two of the OSI (Open Systems
Interconnection Basic Reference) model, neither IP or SNMP are necessary to monitor or
troubleshoot network connection problems.
The Switch supports the following IEEE 802.3ah features:
• Discovery - this identifies the devices on each end of the Ethernet link and their OAM
configuration.
• Remote Loopback - this can initiate a loopback test between Ethernet devices.
36.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the OAM Status screen (Section 36.2 on page 318) to view the configuration of ports on
which Ethernet OAM is enabled.
•Use the OAM Configuration screen (Section 36.3 on page 323) to enable Ethernet OAM on the
Switch.
•Use the OAM Remote Loopback screen (Section 36.4 on page 324) to perform remote-
loopback tests.
36.2 OAM Status
Use this screen to view the configuration of ports on which Ethernet OAM is enabled. Click
Advanced Application > OAM in the navigation panel.
Chapter 36 OAM
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
319
Figure 220 Advanced Application > OAM Staus
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 154 Advanced Application > OAM Staus
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Local
This section displays information about the ports on the Switch.
Port This field displays the number of the port on the Switch.
Mode This field displays the operational state of the port when OAM is enabled on the port.
Active - Allows the port to issue and respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Passive - Allows the port to respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Remote
This section displays information about the remote device.
Mac Address This field displays the MAC address of the remote device.
OUI This field displays the OUI (first three bytes of the MAC address) of the remote device.
Mode This field displays the operational state of the port when OAM is enabled on the port.
Active - Allows the port to issue and respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Passive - Allows the port to respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Config This field displays the capabilities of the Switch and remote device.
Chapter 36 OAM
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
320
36.2.1 OAM Details
Use this screen to view OAM configuration details and operational status of a specific port. Click a
number in the Port column in the OAM Status screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 221 Advanced Application > OAM Staus > OAM Details
Chapter 36 OAM
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
321
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 155 Advanced Application > OAM Staus > OAM Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Discovery
This section displays OAM configuration details and operational status of the port on the Switch and/or t h e
remote device.
Local Client/
Remote Client
OAM
configurations
Mode This field displays the OAM mode. The device in active mode (typically the service
provider's device) controls the device in passi ve mode (typically the subscriber's device).
Active: The port initiates OAM dis covery; sends information PDUs; and may send event
notification PDUs, variable request/response PDUs, or loopback control PDUs.
Passive: The port waits for the remote device to initiate OAM discovery; sends
information PDUs; may send event notification PDUs; and may respond to variable
request PDUs or loopback control PDUs.
The Switch might not support some types of PDUs, as indicated in the fields below.
Unidirectional This field indicates whether or not the port can send information PDUs to transmit fault
information when the receive path is non-operational.
Remote
loopback This field indicates whether or not the port can use loopback control PDUs to put the
remote device into loopback mode.
Link events Th is field indicates whe ther or not the port can interpret link events, such as link fault and
dying gasp. Link events are sent in ev ent notificati on PDUs and indicate when the n umber
of errors in a given interval (time, number of frames, number of symbols, or number of
errored frame seconds) exceeds a specified threshold. Organizations may create
organization-specific link event TLVs as well.
Variable
retrieval This field indicates whether or not the port can respo nd to requests fo r more information,
such as requests for Ethernet counters and statistics, about link events.
Max. OAMPDU
size This field displays the maximum size of PDU for receipt and delivery.
Local Client/
Remote Client
Operational
status
Link status This field indicates that the link between the Switch port and a connected IEEE 802.3ah-
enabled remote Ethernet device is up or down.
Info. revision This field displays the current version of local state and configuration. This two-octet
value starts at zero and increments every time the local state or configuration changes.
Parser state This fi eld indicates the current state of the parser.
Forward: The port is forwarding packets normally.
Loopback: The port is in loopback mode.
Discard: The port is discarding non-OAMPDUs because it is trying to or has put the
remote device into loopback mode.
Chapter 36 OAM
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
322
Discovery
state This field indicates the state in the OAM discovery process. OAM-enabled devices use this
process to detect each other and to exchange information about their OAM configuration
and capabilities. OAM discovery is a handshake protocol.
Fault: One of the devices is transmitting OAM PDUs with link fault information, or the
interface is not operational.
Active Send Local: The port is in active mode and is trying to see if the remote device
supports OAM.
Passive Wait: The port is in passive mode and is waiting for the remote device to begin
OAM discovery.
Send Local Remote: This state occurs in the following circum stances.
• The port has discovered the remote device but has not accepted or rejected the
connection yet.
• The port has discovered the remote device and rejected the connection.
Send Local Remote OK: The port has discovered the remote device and has accepted
the connection. In addition, the remote device ha s not accepted or rejected the
connection yet, or the remote device has rejected the connected.
Send Any: The port and the remote device have accepted the c onnection. This is th e
operating state for OAM links that are fully operational.
Statistics
This section displays the number of OAM packets transferred on the port of the Switch.
Information
OAMPDU Tx This field displays the number of OAM PDUs sent on the port.
Information
OAMPDU Rx This field displays the number of OAM PDUs received on the port.
Event N otification
OAMPDU Tx This field displays the number of unique or duplicate OAM event notification PDUs sent on
the port.
Event N otification
OAMPDU Rx This field displays the number of unique or duplicate OAM event notification PDUs
received on the port.
Loopback Control
OAMPDU Tx This field displays the number of loopback control OAM PDUs sent on the port.
Loopback Control
OAMPDU Rx This field displays the number of loopback control OAM PDUs received on the port.
Variable Request
OAMPDU Tx This field displays the number of OAM PDUs sent to request MIB objects on the remote
device.
Variable Request
OAMPDU Rx This field displays the number of OAM PDUs received requesting MIB objects on t he
Switch.
Variable Response
OAMPDU Tx This field displays the number of OAM PDUs sent by the Switch in response to requests.
Variable Response
OAMPDU Rx This field displays the number of OAM PDUs sent by the remote device in response to
requests.
Unsupported
OAMPDU Tx This field displays the number of unsupported OAM PDUs sent on the port.
Unsupported
OAMPDU Rx This field displays the number of unsupported OAM PDUs received on the port.
Table 155 Advanced Application > OAM Staus > OAM Details (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 36 OAM
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
323
36.3 OAM Configuration
Use this screen to turn on Ethernet OAM on the Switch and port(s) and configure the related
settings.
In the OAM Status screen click Configuration to display the configuration screen as shown.
Figure 222 Advanced Application > OAM > OAM Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 156 Advanced Application > OAM > OAM Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable Ethernet OAM on the Switch.
Port This field displays the Switch’s port number.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable Ethernet OAM on this port.
Clear this check box to disable Ethernet OAM on the port.
Chapter 36 OAM
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
324
36.4 OAM Remote Loopback
Use this screen to perform a remote-loopback test. In the OAM Status screen click Remote
Loopback to display the screen as shown.
Figure 223 Advanced Application > OAM > OAM Remote Loopback
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Mode Specify the OAM mode on the port.
Select Active to allow the port to issue and respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Select Passive to allow the port to respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Remote
Loopback
Supported
Select this che ck box to enable the remo te loopback feature on the port. Otherwise, clear
the check box to disable it.
Remote
Loopback
Ignore-Rx
Select this check box to set the Switch to process loopback commands received on the port.
Otherwise, clea r the check box to have the Switch ignore loopback commands received on
the port.
Apply Click Apply to save your change s t o the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch l os es th es e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are d one configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 156 Advanced Application > OAM > OAM Configuration (co ntinued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 157 Advanced Application > OAM > OAM Remote Loopback
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Remote
Loopback Test
Port Enter the number of the port from which the Switch performs a remote-loopback test.
Number of
Packet Define the allowable packet number of the loopback test frames.
Packet Size Define the allowable packet size of the loopback test frames.
Chapter 36 OAM
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
325
Test Click Test to begin the test.
Remote
Loopback Mode
Por t Enter the number of the port from which the Switch se nds loopback control PDUs to initiate
or terminate a remote-loopack test.
Start Click Start to initiate a remote-loopback test from the specified port by sending Enable
Loopback Control PDUs to the remote device.
Stop Click Stop to terminate a remote-loopback test from the specified port by sending Disable
Loopback Control PDUs to the remote device.
Table 157 Advanced Application > OAM > OAM Remote Loopback (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
326
CHAPTER 37
ZULD
37.1 ZULD Overview
A unidirectional link is a connection where the link is up on both ends, but only one end can receive
packets. This may happen if OAM was initially enabled but then disabled, there are misconfigured
transmitting or receiving lines or the hardware is malfunctioning. ZyXEL Unidirectional Link
Detection (ZULD) is a layer-2 protocol that can detect and disable these physical one-way links
before they cause loops or communication malfunction.
In the figure below , S1 - A is a bidirectional link as both ends can send pack ets to each other. S1-B
is unidirectional as B cannot send packets to S1 (although the S1-B link is up). Similarly, S2-S1 is
unidirectional as S1 cannot send packets to S2 (although the S1-S2 link is up).
Figure 224 ZULD Overview
37.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the ZULD Status screen (Section 37.2 on page 32 7) to see details on ZULD.
•Use the ZULD Configuration screen (Section 37.3 on page 328) to enable ZULD on a port,
configure a mode and set the probe time.
37.1.2 What You Need to Know
• ZULD must be enabled on the Switch and the port(s) in order to detect unidirectional links by
monitoring OAMPDUs.
Chapter 37 ZULD
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
327
• Po rts adve rtise their unidirectional link detection capability using OAMPDUs, so all connected
devices must support OAM as well as ZULD. You need to enable OAM on the Switch by going to
Advanced Application > OAM > Configuration and selecting Active. OAM must be enabled
on other connected devices too. If OAM is not enabled initially, ZULD will not work.
• If OAM is enabled initially and later disabled on one end of a link, the link will be unidirectional as
that end cannot send OAMPDUs.
• OAM discovery, the sending of OAMPDUs to other ports, is initiated by an active port.
• When ZULD detects a unidirectional link, it sends a syslog and SNMP trap and may shut down
the affected port (Aggresssive Mode).
• If a port on the Switch is shut down by ZULD, and you want to recover it, then do one of the
following:
•Go to Basic Setting > Port Setup. Clear Active and click Apply. Then select Active and
click Apply again.
•Go to Application > Errdiable > Errdisable Recovery and set the interval for ZULD. After
the interval expires, the closed port(s) will become active and start receiving packets again.
• Use the command port no inactive.
• Refer to the ZULD logs to see when a unidirectional link is detected and when it is recovered to a
bidirectional link.
37.2 ZULD Status
Use this screen to see details of unidirectional and bidirectional links discovered by ZULD. To open
this screen, click Advanced Application > ZULD.
Figure 225 Advanced Application > ZULD Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 158 Advanced Application > ZULD Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ZULD is.... This shows whether ZULD is enabled or disabled on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number of the Switch.
Active This field displays whether ZULD is enabled on the port or not. ZULD must be enabled to
detect an unidirectional link by mon itoring OAMPDUs.
Chapter 37 ZULD
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
328
37.3 ZULD Configuration
Use this screen to enable ZULD on a port, configure a mode and set the probe time. To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > ZULD > Configuration.
Mode This field indicates what ZULD will do when a unidirectional link is detected. In Normal
mode, ZULD only sends a syslog and trap when it detects a unidirectional link. In
Aggressive mode, ZULD shuts down the port (puts it into an ErrDisable state) as well
as sends a syslog and trap when it detects a unidirectional link.
Probe Time Probe time is the length of time that ZULD waits before declaring that a link is
unidirectional. When the probe time expires, and one port (either on the Switch or the
connected device) still has not received an OAMPDU, then ZULD declares that the link is
unidirectional.
Link State This field shows the following link states:
•Linkdown: This is an initialization state, where the port is not yet up.
•Probe: This indicates that ZULD is discovering the connected device on this link.
•Bidirectional: Traffic sent by the Switch is received by the connected device on this
link, and traffic from the connected device on this link is receive d by the Switch.
•Unidirectional: The state of the link between the port and its connected port cannot
be determined either because no ZULD message was received, or one port is not
capable of sending traffic.
•Shutdown: The port has been shut down because its link with the connec ted device
is unidirectional and ZULD is in Aggressive mode.
Remote Operation This field displays whether ZULD is enabled or disabled on the connected device on this
link. ZULD must be enabled on the connected device and on the port that’s connecting to
the Switch.
Remote MAC Addr This is the MAC address of the port on the connected device to which the port of the
Switch is connected.
Remote Port This is the port number of the port on the connected device to which the port of the
Switch is connected.
Table 158 Advanced Application > ZULD Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 37 ZULD
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
329
Figure 226 Advanced Application > ZULD > Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 159 Advanced Application > ZULD > Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable ZULD on the Switch.
Port Use port * to configure all ports to hav e the same settings. Al ternatively, select individual
ports for different settings.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this to enable ZULD on the port. ZULD must be enabled to detect an unidirectional
link by monitoring OAMPDUs.
Mode Select Normal or Aggressive. In Normal mode, ZULD only sends a syslog and trap
when it detects a unidirectional link. In Aggressive mode, ZULD shuts down the port
(puts it into an ErrDisable state) as well as sends a syslog and trap when it detects a
unidirectional link.
Probe Time Type the length of time that ZULD waits before declaring that a link is unidirectional.
When the probe time expires, and one port (either on the Switch or the connected
device) still has not received an OAMPDU, then ZULD declares that the link is
unidirectional.
The allowed time range is from 5-65535 seconds.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
330
CHAPTER 38
Static Route
38.1 Static Route Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure static routes.
The Switch uses IP for communication with management computers, for example using HTTP,
Telnet, SSH, or SNMP. Use IP static routes to have the Switch respond to remote management
stations that are not reachable through the default gateway. The Switch can also use static routes
to send data to a server or device that is not reachable through the default gateway, for example
when sending SNMP traps or using ping to test IP connectivity.
This figure shows a Telnet session coming in from network N1. The Switch sends reply traffic to
default gateway R1 which routes it back to the manager’s computer. The Switch needs a static
route to tell it to use router R2 to send traffic to an SNMP trap server on network N2.
Figure 227 Static Routing Overview
38.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the Static Routing screen (Section 38.2 on page 331) to display the link to the IPv4 Static
Route screen.
•Use the IPv4 Static Route screen (Section 38.3 on page 331) to configure and enable an IPv4
static route.
R1 R2
N1 N2
SNMP
Telnet
Chapter 38 Static Route
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
331
38.2 Static Routing
Click IP Application > Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 228 IP Application > Static Routing
To enable IPv4 static route, configure the static route settings in the IP Application > Static
Routing > IPv4 Static Route screen.
38.3 IPv4 Static Route
Click IP Application > Static Routing > IPv4 Static Route in the navigation panel to display the
screen as shown.
Figure 229 IP Application > Static Routing > IPv4 Static Route
The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route.
Table 160 IP Application > Static Routing > IPv4 Static Route
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.
Name Enter a descriptive name (up to 10 printable ASCII characters) for identification purposes.
Destination IP
Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination.
IP Subnet
Mask Enter the subnet mask for this destination. Routing is always based on network number. If
you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the
subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID.
Chapter 38 Static Route
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
332
Gateway IP
Address Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Switch
that will forward the packet to the destination. The gateway must be a router on the same
segment as your Switch.
Metric The metric represents the “cost” of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop
count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks.
Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number need not be precise,
but it must be between 1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number.
Add Click Add to insert a new static route to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the above fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays the index number of the route. Click a number to edit the static route
entry.
Active Th is field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route. Thi s is for identifi cation purposes only.
Destination
Address This field displays the IP network address of the final destination.
Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination.
Gateway
Address This field displays the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of
your Switch that will forward the packet to the dest ination.
Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Othe rwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 160 IP Application > Static Routing > IPv4 Static Route (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
333
CHAPTER 39
Differentiated Services
39.1 Differentiated Services Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services (DiffServ) on the Switch.
Quality of Service (QoS) is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the
flow are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to
different packet types.
DiffServ is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop
treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types
and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of
service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the
packets di fferentl y dependi ng on the code poin ts without the need to negotiate paths or remember
state information for every flow . In addition, applications do not ha ve to request a particular service
or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.
39.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the DiffServ screen (Section 39.2 on page 334) to activate DiffServ to apply marking rules
or IEEE 802.1p priority mapping on the Switch.
•Use the DSCP screen (Section 39.3.1 on page 336) to change the DSCP-IEEE 802.1p mapping.
39.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read on for concepts on Differentiated Services that can help you configure the screens in this
chapter.
DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service (ToS) field in
the IP header. The DS field contains a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels and
the remaining 2 bits are defined as currently unused (CU). The following figure illustrates the DS
field.
Figure 230 DiffServ: Differentiated Service Field
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ
compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.
DSCP (6 bits) CU (2 bits)
Chapter 39 Differentiated Services
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
334
The DSCP value determines the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets as it is forwarded
across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for
different priorities of forwarding. R esources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and
the configured policies.
DiffServ Network Example
The following figure depicts a DiffServ n etwork consisting of a group of directly connected DiffServ -
compliant network devices. The boundary node (A in Figure 231) in a DiffServ network classifies
(marks with a DSCP value) the incoming packets into different traffic flows (Platinum, Gold,
Silver, Bronze) based on the configured marking rules. A network administrator can then apply
various traffic policies to the traffic flows. An example traffic policy, is to give higher drop
precedence to one traffic flow over others. In our example, packets in the Bronze traffic flow are
more likely to be dropped when congestion occurs than the packets in the Platinum traffic flow as
they move across the DiffServ network.
Figure 231 DiffServ Network
39.2 Activating DiffServ
Activate DiffServ to apply marking rules or IEEE 802.1p priority mapping on the Switch.
Click IP Application > DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
G
S
B
P
S
B
B
G
P
P
S
P - Platinum
G - Gold
S - Silver
B - Bronze
G
P
P
S
A
Chapter 39 Differentiated Services
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
335
Figure 232 IP Application > DiffServ
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
39.3 DSCP-to-IEEE 802.1p Priority Settings
You can configure the DSCP to IEEE 802.1p mapping to allow the Switch to prioritize all traffic
based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE 802.1p mapping table.
Table 161 IP Application > DiffServ
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the Switch.
Port This field displays the index number of a port on the switch.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first
to set the common settings and then ma ke adju stments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select Active to enable Diffserv on the port.
Apply Click Apply to save your ch anges to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 39 Differentiated Services
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
336
The following table shows the default DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p mapping.
39.3.1 Configuring DSCP Settings
To change the DSCP-IEEE 802.1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to
display the screen as shown next.
Figure 233 IP Application > DiffServ > DSCP Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 162 Default DSCP-IEEE 802.1p Mapping
DSCP VALUE 0 – 7 8 – 15 16 – 23 24 – 31 32 – 39 40 – 47 48 – 55 56 – 63
IEEE 802.1p 01234567
Table 163 IP Application > DiffServ > DSCP Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
0 … 63 This is the DSCP classification identification number.
To set the IE EE 802.1p priority mapping, select the priority level from the drop-down list box.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
337
CHAPTER 40
DHCP
40.1 DHCP Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual computers
to obtain TCP/IP configur ation at start-up from a server. If you configure the Switch as a DHCP rela y
agent, then the Switch forwards DHCP requests to DHCP server on your network. If you don’t
configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent then you must have a DHCP server in the broadcast
domain of the client computers or else the client computers must be configured manually.
40.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the DHCPv4 Status screen (Section 40.3 on page 338) to display the relay mode.
•Use the DHCPv4 Relay screen (Section 40.4 on page 338) to enable and configure global
DHCPv4 relay.
•Use the VLAN Setting screen (Section 40.4.6 on page 344) to configure your DHCPv4 settings
based on the VLAN domain of the DHCPv4 clients.
•Use the DHCPv6 Relay screen (Section 40.5 on page 347) to enable and configure DHCPv6
relay.
40.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read on for concepts on DHCP that can help you configure the screens in this chapter.
DHCP Modes
If there is already a DHCP server on your network, then you can configure the Switch as a DHCP
relay agent. When the Switch receiv es a request from a computer on your network, it contacts the
DHCP server for the necessary IP information, and then relays the assigned information back to the
computer.
DHCPv4 Configuration Options
The DHCPv4 configuration on the S witch is divided into Global and VLAN screens. The screen you
should use for configuration depends on the DHCP services you want to offer the DHCP clients on
your network. Choose the configuration screen based on the following criteria:
•Global - The Switch forwards all DHCP requests to the same DHCP server.
•VLAN - The Switch is configured on a VLAN by VLAN basis. The S witch can be configured to relay
DHCP requests to different DHCP servers for clients in different VLAN.
Chapter 40 DHCP
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
338
40.2 DHCP Configuration
Click IP Application > DHCP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. Click the link
next to DHCPv4 to open screens where you can enable and configure DHCPv4 relay settings and
create option 82 profiles. Click the link next to DHCPv6 to open a screen where you can configure
DHCPv6 relay settings.
Figure 234 IP Application > DHCP
40.3 DHCPv4 Status
Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 in the navigation panel. The DHCP Status scree n
displays.
Figure 235 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
40.4 DHCPv4 Relay
Configure DHCP relay on the Switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same
broadcast domain. During the initial IP address leasing, the Switch helps to relay network
information (such as the IP address and subnet mask) between a DHCP client and a DHCP server.
Once the DHCP client obtains an IP address and can connect to the network, network information
renewal is done between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the Switch.
Table 164 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Relay
Status This section displays configuration settings related to the Switch’s DHCP relay mode.
Relay
Mode This field displays:
None - if the Switch is not configured as a DHCP relay agent.
Global - if the Switch is configured as a DHCP relay agent only.
VLAN - followed by a VLAN ID or multiple VLAN IDs if it is configured as a relay agent for specific
VLAN(s).
Chapter 40 DHCP
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
339
The Switch can be configured as a global DHCP relay. This means that the Switch forw ards all DHCP
requests from all domains to the same DHCP server. You can also configure the Switch to relay
DHCP information based on the VLAN membership of the DHCP clients.
40.4.1 DHCPv4 Relay Agent Information
The Switch can add information about the source of client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP
server by adding Relay Agent Information. This helps provide authentication about the source of
the requests. The DHCP server can then provide an IP address based on this information. Please
refer to RFC 3046 for more details.
The DHCP Relay Agent Information feature adds an Agent Information field (also known as the
Option 82 field) to DHCP requests. The Option 82 field is in the DHCP headers of client DHCP
request frames that the Switch relays to a DHCP server.
Relay Agent Information can include the System Name of the Switch if you select this option.
You can change the System Name in Basic Settings > General Setup.
The following describes the DHCP relay agent information that the Switch sends to the DHCP
server:
40.4.1.1 DHCPv4 Relay Agent Information Format
A DHCP Relay Agent Information option has the following format.
i1, i2 and iN are DHCP relay agent sub-options, which contain additional information about the
DHCP client. You need to define at least one sub-option.
40.4.1.2 Sub-Option Format
There are two types of sub-option: “Agent Circuit ID Sub-option” and “Agent Remote ID Sub-
option”. They have the following formats.
Table 165 Relay Agent Information
FIELD LABELS DESCRIPTION
Slot ID (1 byte) This value is always 0 for stand-alone switches.
Port ID (1 byte) This is the port that the DHCP client is connected to.
VLAN ID (2 bytes) This is the VLAN that the port belongs to.
Information (up to 64 bytes) This optional, read-only field is set according to system name set in
Basic Settings > General Setup.
Table 166 DHCP Relay Agent Information Option Format
Code
(82)
Length
(N)
i1 i2
...
iN
Table 167 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID Sub-option Format
SubOpt Code Length Value
1
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
Slot ID, Port ID, VLAN ID, System Name or String
Chapter 40 DHCP
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
340
The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub-option and 2 identifies this as an
Agent Remote ID sub-option. The next field specifies the length of the field.
40.4.2 DHCPv4 Option 82 Profile
Use this screen to create DHCPv4 option 82 profiles. Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 in
the navigation panel and click the Option 82 Profile link to display the screen as shown.
Figure 236 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Option 82 Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 168 DHCP Relay Agent Remote ID Sub-option Format
SubOpt Code Length Value
2
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
MAC Address or String
Table 169 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Option 82 Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes. You can use up to 32
ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed.
Circuit-ID Use thi s sect ion t o co nfig ure the Circuit ID sub-option to include information th at i s speci fic
to the relay agent (the Switch).
Enable Select this option to have the Switch add the Circuit ID sub-option to client DHCP requests
that it relays to a DHCP server.
slot-port Select this option to have the Switch add the number of port that the DHCP client is
connected to.
vlan Select this option to have the Switch add the ID of VLAN which the port belongs to.
hostname This is the system name you configure in the Basic Setting > General Setup screen.
Select this opt ion for the S witch to add the system n ame to the client DHCP re quests that i t
relays to a DHCP server.
Chapter 40 DHCP
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
341
40.4.3 Configuring DHCPv4 Global Relay
Use this screen to configure global DHCPv4 relay. Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 in the
navigation panel and click the Global link to display the screen as shown.
Figure 237 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global
string Enter a string of up to 64 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the client DHCP
requests. Spaces are allowed.
Remote-ID Use this section to configure the Remote ID sub-option to include information that identifies
the relay agent (the Switch).
Enable Select this option to have the Switch append the Remote ID sub-option to the option 82
field of DHCP requests.
mac Sel ect this option to have the Switch add its MAC address to the client DHCP requests that
it relays to a DHCP server.
string Enter a string of up to 64 ASCII characters for the remote ID information in this field.
Spaces are allowed.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top n avigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values.
Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile. Click the name to change the
settings.
Circuit-ID
Enable This field displays whether the Circuit ID sub-option is added to client DHCP requests.
Field This field displays the information that is included in the Circuit ID sub-option.
Remote-ID
Enable This field displays whether the Remote ID sub-option is added to client DHCP requests.
Field This field displays the information that is included in the Remote ID sub-option.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to rem ove and th en click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check box(es).
Table 169 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Option 82 Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 40 DHCP
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
342
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
40.4.4 DHCPv4 Global Relay Port Configure
Use this screen to apply a different DHCP option 82 profile to certain ports on the Switch. To open
this screen, click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global > Port.
Figure 238 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 170 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to enable DHCPv4 relay.
Remote DHCP
Server 1 .. 3 Enter the IP address of a DHCPv4 server in dotted deci mal notation.
Option 82
Profile Select a pre-defined DHCPv4 option 82 profile that the Switch applies to all ports. The
Switch adds the Circuit ID sub-option and/or Remote ID sub-option specified in the profile
to DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
Apply Click Apply to sav e y our ch anges to t he Sw itch ’ s ru n-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 171 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Enter the number of port(s) to which you want to apply the specified DHCP option 82
profile.
You can ent er multiple ports separated by (no space) comma (,) or hyphen (-). For
example, enter “3-5” for ports 3, 4, and 5. Enter “3,5,7” for ports 3, 5, and 7.
Option 82
Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the S witch applies to th e specified port(s).
The Switch adds the Circuit ID sub-option and/or Remote ID sub-option specified in the
profile to DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
The profile you select here has priority over the one you select in the DHCP > DHCPv4 >
Global screen.
Chapter 40 DHCP
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
343
40.4.5 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example
The follow figure shows a network example where the Switch is used to relay DHCP requests for the
VLAN1 and VLAN2 domains. There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both
domains.
Figure 239 Global DHCP Relay Network Example
Configure the DHCP Relay screen as shown. Make sure you select a DHCP option 82 profile
(default1 in this example) to set the Switch to send additional information (such as the VLAN ID)
together with the DHCP requests to the DHCP server. This allows the DHCP server to assign the
appropriate IP address according to the VLAN ID.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top n avigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last se lected entry or, if not appl icable, to
clear the fields above.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each entry. Click an index number to change the
settings.
Port This field displays the port(s) to which the Switch applies the settings.
Profile Name This field displays the DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the port(s).
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select the entry(ies) that you want to remove, then click the Delete button to remove the
selected entry( ies) from the table.
Cancel Click this to clear the check boxes above.
Table 171 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global > Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN1 VLAN2
192.168.1.100
DHCP Server:
Chapter 40 DHCP
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
344
Figure 240 DHCP Relay Configuration Example
40.4.6 Configuring DHCPv4 VLAN Settings
Use this screen to configure your DHCP settings based on the VLAN domain of the DHCP clients.
Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 in the navigation panel, then click the VLAN link In the
DHCP Status screen that displays.
Note: You must set up a management IP address for each VLAN th at you want to
configure DHCP settings for on the Switch. See Section 5.2 on page 44 for
information on how to do this.
Figure 241 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
EXAMPLE
Table 172 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN to which these DHCP settings appl y.
Remote DHCP
Server 1 .. 3 Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation.
Option 82
Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to all ports in this VLAN.
The Switch adds the Circuit ID sub-option and/or Remote ID sub-option specified in the
profile to DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
Chapter 40 DHCP
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
345
40.4.7 DHCPv4 VLAN Port Configure
Use this screen to apply a different DHCP option 82 profile to certain ports in a VLAN. To open this
screen, click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN > Port.
Figure 242 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top n avigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply.
Type This field displays Relay for the DHCP mode.
DHCP Status For DHCP server configuration, this field displays the starting IP address and the size of the
IP address pool.
For DHCP relay configuration, this field displays the first remote DHCP server IP address.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select the configuration entries you want to remove and click Delete to remove them.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 172 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 173 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the I D n umber of the VLAN you want to configure here.
Port Enter the number of port(s) to which you want to apply the specified DHCP option 82
profile.
You can ent er multiple ports separated by (no space) comma (,) or hyphen (-). For
example, enter “3-5” for ports 3, 4, and 5. Enter “3,5,7” for ports 3, 5, and 7.
Chapter 40 DHCP
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
346
40.4.8 Example: DHCP Relay for Two VLANs
The following example displays two VLANs (VIDs 1 and 2) for a campus network. Two DHCP servers
are installed to serve each VLAN. The system is set up to forward DHCP requests from the
dormitory rooms (VLAN 1) to the DHCP server with an IP address of 192.168.1.100. Requests from
the academic buildings (VLAN 2) are sent to the other DHCP server with an IP address of
172.16.10.100.
Figure 243 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs
For the example network, configure the VLAN Setting screen as shown.
Option 82
Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the specified port(s)
in this VLAN. The Switch adds the Circuit ID sub-option and/or Remote ID sub-option
specified in the profile to DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
The profile you select here has priority over the one you select in the DHCP > DHCPv4 >
VLAN screen.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top n avigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last se lected entry or, if not appl icable, to
clear the fields above.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each entry. Click an index number to change the
settings.
VID This field d isplays the VLAN to which the port(s) belongs.
Port This field displays the port(s) to which the Switch applies the settings.
Profile Name This field displays the DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the port(s) in this
VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select the entry(ies) that you want to remove, then click the Delete button to remove the
selected entry( ies) from the table.
Cancel Click this to clear the check boxes above.
Table 173 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN > Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN 1
VLAN 2
DHCP: 192.168.1.100
DHCP: 172.16.10.100
Chapter 40 DHCP
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
347
Figure 244 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example
40.5 DHCPv6 Relay
A DHCPv6 relay agent is on the same network as the DHCPv6 clients and helps forward messages
between the DHCPv6 server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-
known multicast address to locate a DHCPv6 server on its network, it then needs a DHCPv6 relay
agent to send a message to a DHCPv6 server that is not attached to the same network.
The DHCPv6 relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID
option to the Rela y-F orward DHCPv6 messages. The remote- ID option carries a user-defined string,
such as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the
VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay -Reply
messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCPv6 server copies the
interface-ID option from the Re lay-Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to
the relay agent. The interface-ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts.
Use this screen to configure DHCPv6 relay settings for a specific VLAN on the Switch. Click IP
Application > DHCP > DHCPv6 in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
EXAMPLE
Chapter 40 DHCP
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
348
Figure 245 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv6
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 174 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv6
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the I D n umber of the VLAN you want to configure here.
Helper Address Enter the remote DHCPv6 server address for the specified VLAN.
Options
Interface ID Select this option to have the Switch add the interface-ID option in the DHCPv6 requests
from the clients in the specified VLAN before the Switch forwards them to a DHCPv6 server.
Remote ID Enter a string of up to 64 printable characters to be carried in the remote-ID option. The
Switch adds the remote-ID option in the DHCPv6 requests from the clients in the specified
VLAN before the Switch forwards them to a DHCPv6 server.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top n avigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID number. Click the VLAN ID to chang e the settings.
Helper Address This field displays the IPv6 address of the remote DHCPv6 server for this VLAN.
Interface ID This field displays whether the interface-ID option is added to DHCPv6 requests from clients
in this VLAN.
Remote ID This field displays whether the remote-ID option is added to DHCPv6 requests from clients
in this VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to rem ove and th en click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
349
CHAPTER 41
ARP Setup
41.1 ARP Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP
address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on
the local area network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The
ARP table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address.
41.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the ARP Learning screen (Section 41.2.1 on page 351) to configure ARP learning mode on a
per-port basis.
41.1.2 What You Need to Know
Read on for concepts on ARP that can help you configure the screen in this chapter.
41.1.2.1 How ARP Works
When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch,
the Switch looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address, it sends it to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN.
The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP
address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the Switch puts all ones in the
target MAC field (FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is
either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the
broadcast address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts
the answer directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference
and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied.
41.1.2.2 ARP Learning Mode
The Switch supports three ARP learning modes: ARP-Reply, Gratuitous-ARP, and ARP-Request.
ARP-Reply
The Switch in ARP-Reply learning mode updates the ARP table only with the ARP replies to the ARP
requests sent by the Switch. This can help prevent ARP spoofing.
In the following ex amp le, the S w i tc h does not have IP address and MAC address mapping
information for hosts A and B in its ARP table, and host A wants to ping host B. Host A sends an
Chapter 41 ARP Setup
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
350
ARP request to the Switch and then sends an ICMP request after getting the ARP reply from the
Switch. The Switch finds no matched entry for host B in the ARP table and broadcasts the ARP
request to all the devices on the LAN. When the Switch receives the ARP reply from host B, it
updates its ARP table and also forwards host A’s ICMP request to host B. After the Switch gets the
ICMP reply from host B, it sends out an ARP request to get host A’s MAC address and updates the
ARP table with host A’s ARP reply. The Switch then can forward host B’s ICMP reply to host A.
Gratuitous-ARP
A gratuitous ARP is an ARP request in which both the source and destination IP address fields are
set to the IP address of the device that sends this request and the destination MAC address field is
set to the broadcast address. There will be no reply to a gratuitous ARP request.
A device may send a gratuitous ARP packet to detect IP collisions. If a device restarts or its MAC
address is changed, it can also use gratuitous ARP to inform other devices in the same network to
update their ARP table with the new mapping information.
In Gratuitous-ARP learning mode, the Switch updates its ARP table with either an ARP reply or a
gratuitous ARP request.
ARP-Request
When the Switch is in ARP-Request learning mode, it updates the ARP table with both ARP replies,
gratuitous ARP requests and ARP requests.
AB
ARP Request
ARP Reply
ICMP Request
ARP Request
ARP Reply
ICMP Request
ICMP Reply
ARP Request
ARP Reply
ICMP Reply
Chapter 41 ARP Setup
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
351
Therefore in the following example, the Switch can learn host A’s MAC address from the ARP
request sent by host A. The Switch then forwards host B’s ICMP reply to host A right after getting
host B’s MAC address and ICMP reply.
41.2 ARP Setup
Click IP Application > ARP Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. Click
the link next to ARP Learning to open a screen where you can set the ARP learning mode for each
port.
Figure 246 IP Application > ARP Setup
41.2.1 ARP Learning
Use this screen to configure each port’s ARP learning mode. Click the link next to ARP Learning in
the IP Application > ARP Setup screen to display the screen as shown next.
AB
ARP Request
ARP Reply
ICMP Request
ARP Request
ARP Reply
ICMP Request
ICMP Reply
ICMP Reply
Chapter 41 ARP Setup
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
352
Figure 247 IP Application > ARP Setup > ARP Learning
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 175 IP Application > ARP Setup > ARP Learning
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This field displays the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
ARP Learning
Mode Select the ARP learning mode the Switch uses on the port.
Select ARP-Reply to have the Switch update the ARP table only with the ARP replies to the
ARP requests sent by the Switch.
Select Gratuitous-ARP to have the Switch update its ARP table with either an ARP reply or
a gratuitous ARP request.
Select ARP-Request to have the Switch update the ARP table with both ARP replies,
gratuitous ARP requests and ARP requests.
Apply Click Apply to save y our changes to the S witch’s run-time memory. The Switch l oses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
353
CHAPTER 42
Maintenance
42.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to configure the screens that let you maintain the firmware and
configuration files.
42.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the Maintenance screen (Section 42.2 on page 353) to upload the latest firmware.
•Use the Firmware Upgrade screen (Section 42.3 on page 355) to upload the latest firmware.
•Use the Restore Configuration screen (Section 42.4 on page 357) to upload a stored device
configuration file.
•Use the Backup Configuration screen (Section 42.5 on page 357) to save your configurations
for later use.
42.2 The Maintenance Screen
Use this screen to manage firmware and your configuration files. Click Management >
Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen.
Figure 248 Management > Maintenance
Chapter 42 Maintenance
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
354
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
42.2.1 Erase Running-Configuration
Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the factory defaults.
1In the Maintenance screen, click the Click Here button next to Erase Running-Configuration
to clear all Switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults.
2 Click OK to reset all Switch configurations to the factory defaults.
Figure 249 Erase Running-Configuration: Confirmation
Table 176 Management > Maintenance
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Current This field displays which confi guration (Configuration 1 or Configuration 2) is currently
operating on the Switch.
Firmware
Upgrade Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen.
Restore
Configuration Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen.
Backup
Configuration Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen.
Erase Running-
Configuration Click Click Here to reset the configuration to the factory default settings.
Save
Configuration Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 1 on the
Switch.
Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the
Switch.
Reboot System Click Config 1 to reboot the system and load Configuration 1 on the Switch.
Click Config 2 to reboot the system and load Configuration 2 on the Switch.
Click Factory Default to reboot the system and load the defaul t confi guration settings on
the Switch.
Note: Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the current
configuration on the Switch.
Tech-Support Click Click Here to see the Tech-Support screen. Y ou can set CPU and memory thresholds
for log reports and download related log reports for i ssue analysis. Log reports include CPU
history and utilization, crash and memory.
Chapter 42 Maintenance
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
355
3In the web configurator, click the Save button in the top of the screen to make the changes take
effect. If you want to access the Switch web configurator again, you may need to change the IP
address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address
(192.168.1.1).
42.2.2 Save Configuration
Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings permanently to Configuration 1 on the
Switch.
Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings permanently to Configuration 2 on the
Switch.
Alternatively, click Save on the top right-hand corner in any screen to save the configuration
changes to the current configuration.
Note: Clicking the Apply or Add button does NOT save the changes permanently. All
unsaved changes are erased after you reboot the Switch.
42.2.3 Reboot System
Reboot System allows you to restart the Switch without physically turning the power off. It also
allows you to load configuration one ( Config 1 ), configur ation two (Config 2) or the factory deault
configuration when you reboot. Follow the steps below to reboot the Switch.
1In the Maintenance screen, click the Config 1 button next to Reboot System to reboot and load
configuration one. The following screen displays.
Figure 250 Reboot System: Confirmation
2Click OK again and then wait for the Switch to restart. This takes up to two minutes. This does not
affect the Switch’s configuration.
Click Config 2 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration two on the Switch.
Click Factory Default and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load default configuration settings on
the Switch.
42.3 Firmware Upgrade
Use the following screen to upgrade your Switch to the latest firmware. The Switch supports dual
firmware images, Firmware 1 and Firmware 2. Use this screen to specify which image is updated
Chapter 42 Maintenance
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
356
when firmware is uploaded using the web configurator and to specify which image is loaded when
the Switch starts up.
Make sure you have downloaded (and unzipped) the correct model firmware and version to your
computer before uploading to the device.
Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong
model firmware may damage your device.
Click Management > Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to view the screen as shown next.
Figure 251 Management > Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
Ty pe the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File Path
text box or click Browse to locate it. Select the Rebooting checkbox if you want to reboot the
Switch and apply the new firmware immediately. (Firmware upgrades are only applied after a
reboot). Click Upgrade to load the new firmware.
After the firmware upgr ade process is complete, see the System Inf o screen to verify your current
firmware version number.
Table 177 Management > Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name This is the name of the Switch that you’re configuring.
Version The Switch has two firmware sets, Firmware 1 and Firmware 2, residing in flash.
•Running shows the version number (and model code) and MM/DD/YYYY creation
date of the firmware current ly in use on the Swit ch (Firmware 1 or Firmware 2).
The firmware information is also display ed at S yst em I nfo rmation in B asic Sett ings .
•Firmware 1 shows its version number (and model code) and MM/DD/YYYY
creation date.
•Firmware 2 shows its version number (and model code) and MM/DD/YYYY
creation date.
Current Boot Image This displays which firmware is currently in use on the Switch (Firmware 1 or
Firmware 2).
Config Boot Image S elect which firmware (Firmw are 1 or Firmware 2) should load, click Apply and
reboot the Switch to see changes, you will also see changes in the Current Boot
Image field above as well.
Chapter 42 Maintenance
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
357
42.4 Restore a Configuration File
Use this screen to restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the Switch.
Figure 252 Management > Maintenance > Restore Configuration
Type the path and file name of the configur ation file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or
click Browse to locate it. After you have specified the file, click Restore. "config" is the name of
the configuration file on the Switch, so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed
when you restore using this screen.
42.5 Backup a Configuration File
Use this screen to save and store your current device settings.
Backing up your Switch configur ations allows you to create various “sn ap shots” of your device from
which you may restore at a later date.
Back up your current Switch configur ation to a computer using the Backup Conf iguration screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Firmware Choose to upload the new firmware to (Firmware) 1 or (Firmware) 2.
File Path T ype the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the
File Path text box or click Browse to locate it.
Upgrade Click Upgrade to load the new firmware. Firmware upgrades are only applied after a
reboot. To reboot, go to Management > Maintenance > Reboot System and click
Config 1, Config 2 or Factory Default (Config 1, Config 2 and Factory Default
are the configuration files you want the Switch to use when it restarts).
Table 177 Management > Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 42 Maintenance
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
358
Figure 253 Management > Maintenance > Backup Configuration
Follow the steps below to back up the current S witch configur ation to y our computer in this screen.
1Click Backup.
2If the current configur ation file is open and/or downloaded to your computer automatically, you can
click File > Save As to save the file to a specific place.
If a dialog box pops up asking whether you want to open or save the file, click Save or Save File to
download it to the default downloads folder on your computer. If a Save As screen displays after
you click Save or Save File, choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in
drop-down list bo x and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box. Click Save to save
the configuration file to your computer.
42.6 Tech-Support
The Tech-Support feature is a log enhancement tool that logs useful information such as CPU
utilization history, memory and Mbuf (Memory Buffer) log and crash reports for issue analysis by
customer support should you have difficulty with your Switch. The Tech Support menu eases your
effort in obtaining reports and it is also available in CLI command by typing “Show tech-support”
command.
Click Management > Maintenance > Tech-Support to see the following screen.
Figure 254 Management > Maintenance > Tech-Support
Chapter 42 Maintenance
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
359
Y ou may need W ordP ad or similar software to see the log report correctly. The table below describes
the fields in the above screen.
42.7 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
42.7.1 FTP Command Line
This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the Switch using FTP
commands. First, understand the filename conventions.
Table 178 Management > Maintenance > Tech-Support
LABEL DESCRIPTION
CPU Type a number ranging from 50 to 100 in the CPU threshold box, and type another
number ranging from 5 to 60 in the seconds box then click Apply.
For example, 80 for CPU threshold and 5 for seconds means a log will be created
when CPU utilization reaches over 80% and lasts for 5 seconds.
The log report holds 7 days of CPU log data and is stored in volatile memory (RAM).
The data is lo st if the Switch is turned off or in event of power outage. After 7 days,
the logs wrap around and new ones and replace the earliest ones.
The higher the CPU threshold number, the fewer logs will be created, and the less
data technical support will have to analyze and vice versa.
Mbuf Type a number ranging from 50 to 100 in the Mbuf (Memory Buffer) threshold box.
The Mbuf log report is stored in flash (permanent) memory.
For example, Mbuf 50 means a log will be created when the Mbuf utilization is over
50%.
The higher the Mbuf threshold number, the fewer logs will be created, and the less
data technical support will have to analyze and vice versa.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory . The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are
done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
All Click Download to see all the log report and system status. This log report is stored
in flash memory. If the All log report is too large, you can download the log reports
separately below.
Crash Click Download to see the crash log report. The l og will include information of the
last crash and is stored in flash memory.
CPU history Click Download to see the CPU history log report. The 7-days log is stored in RAM
and you will need to save it, otherwise it will be lost when the Switch is shutdown or
during power outage.
Memory Section Click Download to see the memory section log report. This log report is stored in
flash memory.
Mbuf Click Download to see the Mbuf log report. The log includes M b uf over threshold
information. This log report is stored in flash memory.
ROM Click Download to see the Read Only Memory (ROM) log report. This report is
stored in flash memory.
Chapter 42 Maintenance
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
360
42.7.2 Filename Conventions
The configuration file (also known as the romf ile or ROM) contains the factory default settings in the
screens such as password, Switch setup, IP Setup, and so on. Once you have customized the
Switch’s settings, they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing.
Z y NOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the “ras” file) is the system
firmware and has a “bin” filename extension.
42.7.2.1 Example FTP Commands
ftp> put firmware.bin ras
This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file "firmware.bin" to the Switch.
ftp> get config config.cfg
This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called “config.cfg” on your
computer.
If your (T)FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source,
you will need to rename them as the Switch only recognizes “config” and “ras”. Be sure you keep
unaltered copies of both files for later use.
Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong
model firmware may damage your device.
42.7.3 FTP Command Line Procedure
1Launch the FTP client on your computer.
2Enter open, followed by a space and the IP address of your Switch.
3Press [ENTER] when prompted for a username.
4Enter your password as requested (the default is “1234”).
5Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary.
Table 179 Filename Conventions
FILE TYPE INTERNAL NAME EXTERNAL NAME DESCRIPTION
Configuration File config *.cfg This is the conf iguration filename on the
Switch. Uploading the con fig file replaces
the specified configuration file system,
including your Switch configurations,
system-related data (including the
default password), the error log and the
trace log.
Firmware ras *.bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS
firmware on the Switch.
Chapter 42 Maintenance
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
361
6Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Switch, for example, put firmware.bin ras
transfers the firmware on your computer (firmware.bin) to the Switch and renames it to “ras”.
Similarly, put config.cfg config tr ansfers the configuration file on your computer (config.cfg) to
the Switch and renames it to “config”. Likewise get config config.cfg transfers the configur ation
file on the Switch to your computer and renames it to “config.cfg”. See Table 179 on page 360 for
more information on filename conventions.
7Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt.
42.7.4 GUI-based FTP Clients
The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI-based FTP clients.
42.7.5 FTP Restrictions
FTP will not work when:
• FTP service is disabled in the Service Access Control screen.
• The IP address(es) in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address. If
it does not match, the Switch will disconnect the FTP session immediately.
General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
Host Address Enter the address of the host server.
Login Type Anonymous.
This is when a user I.D. and password is automatically supplied to the server for
anonymous access. Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service
administrator has enabled this option.
Normal.
The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login.
Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII (plain text format) or in binary mode. Configur ation and
firmware files should be transferred in binary mode.
Initial Remote
Directory Specify the default remote directory (path).
Initial Lo cal Directory Specify the default local directory (path).
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
362
CHAPTER 43
Access Control
43.1 Access Control Overview
This chapter describes how to control access to the Switch.
A console port and FTP are allowed one session each, Telnet and SSH share nine sessions, up to fiv e
Web sessions (five different user names and passwords) and/or limitless SNMP access control
sessions are allowed.
A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi-
login is disabled. See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on disabling multi-login.
43.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the Access Control screen (Section 43.2 on page 362) to display the main screen.
•Use the SNMP screen (Section 43.3 on page 363) to configure your SNMP settings.
•Use the Trap Group screen (Section 43.3.1 on page 364) to specify the types of SNMP traps that
should be sent to each SNMP manager.
•Use the User Information screen (Section 43.3.3 on page 366) to create SNMP users for
authentication with managers using SNMP v3 and associate them to SNMP groups.
•Use the Logins screens (Section 43.4 on page 368) to assign which users can access the S witch
via web configurator at any one time.
•Use the Service Access Control screen (Section 43.5 on page 369) to decide what services you
may use to access the Switch.
•Use the Remote Management screen (Section 43.6 on page 370) to specify a group of one or
more “trusted computers” from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch.
43.2 The Access Control Main Screen
Use this screen to display the main screen.
Click Management > Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as
shown.
Table 180 Access Control Overview
Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP
One session Share up to nine sessions One session Up to five accounts No limit
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
363
Figure 255 Management > Access Control
43.3 Configuring SNMP
Use this screen to configure your SNMP settings.
Click Management > Access Control > SNMP to view the screen as shown.
Figure 256 Management > Access Control > SNMP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 181 Management > Access Control > SNMP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
General Setting Use this section t o specify the SNMP vers ion and community (password) values.
V ersion Select the SNMP version for the Switch. The SNMP version on the Switch must match the
version on the SNMP manager. Choose SNMP version 2c (v2c), SNMP version 3 (v3) or
both (v3v2c).
SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1.
Get Community Enter the Get Community string, which is the password for the incoming Get- and
GetNext- requests from the management station.
The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or
lower.
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
364
43.3.1 Configuring SNMP Trap Group
From the SNMP screen, click Trap Group to view the screen as shown. Use the Trap Group
screen to specify the types of SNMP traps that should be sent to each SNMP manager.
Figure 257 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group
Set Communi t y Enter the Set Community, which is the password for incoming Set- requests from the
management station.
The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or
lower.
Trap Community Enter the Trap Community string, which is the password sent with each trap to the
SNMP manager.
The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or
lower.
Trap Destination Use this section to configure where to send SNMP traps from the Switch.
Version Specify the version of the SNMP trap messages.
IP Enter the IP addresses of up to four managers to send your SNMP traps to.
Port Enter the port number upon which the manager listens for SNMP traps.
Username Enter the username to be sent to the SNMP manager along with the SNMP v3 trap.
This username must match an existing account on the Switch (configured in
Management > Access Control > Logins screen).
Apply Click Apply to s ave yo ur changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the n on-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 181 Management > Access Control > SNMP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
365
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
43.3.2 Enabling/Disabling Sending of SNMP Traps on a Port
From the SNMP > Trap Group screen, click Port to view the screen as shown. Use this screen to
set whether a trap received on the port(s) would be sent to the SNMP manager.
Figure 258 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group > P ort
Table 182 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Trap Destination
IP Select one of yo ur configured tr ap destinatio n IP addresses. These are the IP addresses of
the SNMP managers. You must first configure a trap destination IP address in the SNMP
Setting screen.
Use the rest of the screen to select which traps the Switch sends to that SNMP manager.
Type Select the categories of SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP manager.
Options Select the indiv idual SNMP traps th at the Switch i s to send to the SNMP stati on. See SNMP
Traps on page 373 for individual trap descriptions.
The traps are grouped by category. Selecting a category autom a tically selects all of the
category’s traps. Clear the check boxes for individual traps that you do not want the
Switch to send to the SNMP station. Clearing a category’s check box automatically clears
all of the category’s trap check boxes (the Switch only sends traps from selected
categories).
Apply Click Apply to s ave yo ur changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the n on-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
366
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
43.3.3 Configuring SNMP User
From the SNMP screen, click User to view the screen as shown. Use the User screen to create
SNMP users for authentication with managers using SNMP v3 and associate them to SNMP groups.
An SNMP user is an SNMP manager.
Figure 259 Management > Access Control > SNMP > User
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 183 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Option Select the trap type you want to configure here.
Port This field displays a port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you w ant to mak e some of th e settings the same for al l ports. Use this
row first to set the common sett ings and then make adjustments on a port-b y- port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable the trap type of SNMP traps on this port.
Clear this check box to disable the sending of SNMP traps on this port.
Apply Click Apply to s ave yo ur changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the n on-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 184 Management > Access Control > SNMP > User
LABEL DESCRIPTION
User Information Note: Use the username and password of the login accounts you specify in this screen to
create accounts on the SNMP v3 manager.
Username Specify the username of a login account on the Switch.
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
367
Security Level Select whether you want to implement authentication and/or encryption for SNMP
communication from this user. Choose:
•noauth -to use the username as the password string to send to the SNMP manager.
This is equivalent to the Get, Set and T rap Community in SNMP v2c. This is the lowest
security le vel.
•auth - to implement an authentication algorithm for SNMP messages sent by this
user.
•priv - to implement authentication and encryption for SNMP messages sent by this
user. This is the highest security level.
Note: The settings on the SNMP manager must be set at the same security level or higher
than the security level settings on the Switch.
Authentication Select an authentication algorithm. MD5 (Message Digest 5) and SHA (Secure Hash
Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate SNMP data. SHA authentication is
generally considered stronger than MD5, but is slower.
Password Enter the password of up to 32 ASCII characters for SNMP user authentication.
Privacy Specify the encryption method for SNMP communication from this user. You can choose
one of the following:
•DES - Data Encryption Standard is a widely used (but breakable) method of data
encryption. It applies a 56-bit key to each 64-bit block of data.
•AES - Advanced Encryption Standard is another method for data encryption that also
uses a secret key. AES applies a 128-bit key to 128-bit blocks of data.
Password Enter the password of up to 32 ASCII characters for encrypting SNMP packets.
Group SNMP v 3 adopts the concept of View-based Access Control Model (VACM) group. SNMP
managers in one group are assigned common access rights to MIBs. Specify in which
SNMP group this user is.
admin - Members of this group can perform all types of system configurat io n, including
the management of administrator accounts.
readwrite - Members of this group have read and write rights, meaning that the user can
create and edit the MIBs on the Switch, except the user account and AAA configuration.
readonly - Members of this group have read rights only, meaning the user can collect
informat ion from the Switch.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is a read-only number identifying a login account on the Switch. Click on an index
number to view more details and edit an existing account.
Username This field displays the username of a login account on the Switch.
Security Level This field displays whether you want to implement authentication and/or encryption for
SNMP communication with this user.
Authentication This field displays the authentication algorithm used for SNMP communication with this
user.
Privacy This field displays the encrypt ion method used for SNMP communication with this user.
Group This field displays the SNMP group to which this user belongs.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Table 184 Management > Access Control > SNMP > User (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
368
43.4 Setting Up Login Accounts
Up to five people (one administrator and four non-administrators) may access the Switch via web
configurator at any one time.
• An administrator is someone who can both view and configure Switch changes. The username for
the Administrator is always admin. The default administrator password is 1234.
Note: It is highly recommended that you change the defaul t administrator password
(1234).
• A non-administrator (username is something other than admin) is someone who can view but
not configure Switch settings.
Click Management > Access Control > Logins to view the screen as shown.
Figure 260 Management > Access Control > Logins
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 184 Management > Access Control > SNMP > User (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 185 Management > Access Control > Logins
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Administrator
This is the default administrator account with the “admin” user name. You cannot change the default
administrator user name. Only the administrator has read/write access.
Old Password Type the existing system password (1234 is the default password when shipped).
New Password Enter your new system password.
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
369
43.5 Service Access Control
Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the Switch. You
may also change the default service port and configure “trusted computer(s)” for each service in
the Remote Management screen (discussed later). Click Access Control to go back to the main
Access Control screen.
Retype to
confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation
Edit Logins
You may configure passwords for up to four users. These users have read-only access. You can give use rs
higher privileges via the CLI. For more information on assigning privileges see the Ethernet Switch CLI
Reference Guide.
User Name Set a user name (up to 32 ASCII characters long).
Password Enter your new system password.
Retype to
confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation
Privilege Type the privilege level for this user. At the time of writing, users may have a privilege
level of 0, 3, 13, or 14 representing different configuration rights as shown below.
• 0 - Display basic system information.
• 3 - Display configuration or status.
• 13 - Configure features except for login accounts, SNMP user accounts, the
authentication method sequence and authorization settings, multip le logins,
administrator and enable passwords, and configuration information display.
• 14 - Configur e login accounts, SNMP user accounts, the authentication method
sequence and authorization settings, multiple logins, and administrator and enable
passwords, and display configuration information.
Users can run command lines if the session’s privilege l evel is greater than or equal to the
command’s privilege level. The session privilege initially comes from the privilege of the
login account. For example, if the user has a privilege of 5, he/she can run commands
that requires privilege level of 5 or less but not more.
Apply Click Apply to s ave yo ur changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the n on-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 185 Management > Access Control > Logins (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
370
Figure 261 Management > Access Control > Service Access Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
43.6 Remote Management
Use this screen to specify a group of one or more “trusted computers” from which an administrator
may use a service to manage the Switch.
Click Management > Access Control > Remote Management to view the screen as shown
next.
Y o u can specify a group of one or m ore “trusted computers” from which an administrator ma y use a
service to manage the Switch. Click Access Control to return to the Access Control screen.
Table 186 Management > Access Control > Service Access Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Services Services you may use to access the Switch are listed here.
Active Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the
Switch.
Service Port For Telnet, SSH, FTP, HTTP or HT TPS services, you may change the default service port by
typing the new port number in the Servic e Port field. If you change the default port
number then you will have to let people (who wish to use the service) know the new port
number for that service.
Timeout Type how many minutes (from 1 to 255) a management session can be left idle before
the session time s out. After it tim es out you ha ve to log in with your password again. Very
long idle ti meouts may have security risks.
Apply Click Apply to s ave yo ur changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the n on-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
371
Figure 262 Management > Access Control > Remote Management
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
43.7 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
Table 187 Management > Access Control > Remote Management
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Entry This is the client set index number. A “client set” is a group of one or more “trusted
computers” from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch.
Active Select this check box to activate this sec ured client set. Clear the check box if you wish to
temporarily disable the set without deleting it.
Start Address
End Address
Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this
Switch.
The Switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol
matches the range set here. The Switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not
match.
Telnet/FTP/
HTTP/ICMP/
SNMP/SSH/
HTTPS
Select services that may be used for managing the Switch fro m the specified trusted
computers.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch lose s these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
372
43.7.1 About SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol used to manage and
monitor TCP/IP-based devices. SNMP is used to exchange management information between the
network management system (NMS) and a network element (NE). A manager station can manage
and monitor the Switch through the network via SNMP version 1 (SNMPv1), SNMP version 2c or
SNMP version 3. The next figure illustr ates an SNMP management operation. SNMP is only available
if TCP/IP is configured.
Figure 263 SNMP Management Model
An SNMP managed network consists of two main components: agents and a manager.
An agent is a management software module that reside s in a managed Switch (the Switch). An
agent translates the local management information from the managed Switch into a form
compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform
network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed
devices.
The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of
information to be collected about a Switch. Examples of variables include number of packets
received, node port status and so on. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of
managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agen ts to communicate for the purpose of accessing
these objects.
SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The
manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:
SNMP v3 and Security
SNMP v3 enhances security for SNMP management. SNMP managers can be required to
authenticate with agents before conducting SNMP management sessions.
Table 188 SNMP Commands
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.
GetNext Allows the manager to retri eve the ne xt object v ariable from a table or list within an agent.
In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it
initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.
Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.
Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
373
Security can be further enhanced by encrypting the SNMP messages sent from the managers.
Encryption protects the contents of the SNMP messages. When the contents of the SNMP messages
are encrypted, only the intended recipients can read them.
Supported MIBs
MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance.
The Switch supports the following MIBs:
• SNMP MIB II (RFC 1213)
• RFC 1157 SNMP v1
• RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs
• RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs
• RFC 1155 SMI
• RFC 2674 SNMPv2, SNMPv2c
• RFC 1757 RMON
• SNMPv2, SNMPv2c or later version, compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP, RFC 2012
SNMPv2 MIB for TCP, RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP
SNMP Tr aps
The Switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs. The following tables outline the
SNMP traps by category.
An OID (Object ID) that begins with “1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15” is defined in private MIBs. Otherwise,
it is a standard MIB OID.
Ta ble 189 SNMP System Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
coldstart coldStart 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1 This trap is sent when the Switch is
turned on.
warmstart warmStart 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2 This trap is sent when the Switch
restarts.
fanspeed zyHwMonitorFanSpeedOut
OfRange 1.3. 6.1.4.1.890.1.15. 3.26.2.1 This trap is sent when the fan speed goes
above or below the n ormal op erating
range.
zyHwMonitorFANSpeedOut
OfRangeRecovered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.26.2.6 This trap is sent when the fan speed is
recovered from the out of range to
normal operating range.
temperature zyHwMonitorTemperatureO
utOfRange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.26.2.2 This trap is sent when the temperature
goes above or below the normal
operating range.
zyHwMonitorTemperatureO
utOfRangeRecovered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890. 1.15.3.2 6.2.7 This trap is sent when the temper ature is
recovered from the out of range to
normal operating range.
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
374
voltage zyHwMonitorPowerSupplyV
oltageOutOfRange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.26.2.3 This trap is sent when the voltage goes
above or below the n ormal op erating
range.
zyHwMonitorPowerSupplyV
oltageOutOfRangeRecovere
d
1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.26.2.8 This trap is sent when the power supply
voltage is recovered from the out of
range to normal operating range.
reset zySysMgmtUncontrolledSys
temReset 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.49.2.1 This trap is sent when the Switch
automatically resets.
zySysMgmtControlledSyste
mReset 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.49.2.2 This trap is sent when the Switch resets
by an administrator through a
management interface.
zySysMgmtBootImageInco
nsistence 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.49.2.3 This trap is sent when the index number
of image which is loaded when the S witch
starts up is different from what is
specified via the CLI.
Reboot Event 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.5.1.1.2 This trap is se nt when the S witch reboots
by an administrator through a
management interface.
timesync zyDateTimeTrapTimeServer
NotReachable 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.82.3.1 This trap is sent when the Switch’s date
and time is not manually ente red or the
specified time server is not reachable.
zyDateTimeTrapTimeServer
NotReachableRecovered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.82.3.2 This trap is sent when the Switch’s real
time clock is up to date.
intrusionlock zyPortIntrusionLock 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.61.3.2 This trap is sent when intrusion lock
occurs on a port.
loopguard zyLoopGuardLoopDetect 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.45.2.1 This trap is sent when loopguard shuts
down a port.
errdisable zyErrdisableDetect 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.24.4.1 This trap is sent when an error is
detected on a port, such as a loop occurs
or the rate limit for specific control
packets is exceeded.
zyErrdisableRecovery 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.24.4.2 This trap is sent when the Switch ceases
the action taken on a port, such as
shutting down the port or discarding
packets on the port, after the specified
recovery interval.
poe
(For PoE
models only)
zyPoePowerPortOverload 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.59.4.1 This trap is sent when the port is turned
off to supply power due to overloading.
zyPoePowerPortShortCircuit 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.59.4.2 This trap is sent when the port is turned
off to supply power due to short circuit.
zyPoePowerPortOverSyste
mBudget 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.59.4.3 This trap is sent when the port is turned
off to supply power because the
requested power exceeds the total PoE
power budget on the Switch.
zyPoePowerPortOverloadRe
covered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.59.4.5 This trap is sent when the port is turned
on to recover from an overloaded state.
zyPoePowerPortShortCircuit
Recovered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.59.4.6 This trap is sent when the port is turned
on to recover from a short circuit.
zyPoePowerPortOverSyste
mBudgetRecovered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.59.4.7 This trap is sent when the port is turned
on to recover from an over system
budget.
Ta ble 189 SNMP System Traps (continued)
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
375
loginrecord zyAccessControlLoginRecor
d1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9.4.1 This trap is sent when users log in.
zyAccessControlLogoutRec
ord 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9.4.2 This trap is sent when users log out.
zyAccessControlLoginFail 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9.4.3 This trap is sent when users fail in login.
Ta ble 189 SNMP System Traps (continued)
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 190 SNMP Interface Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
linkup linkUp 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet
link is up.
linkdown linkDown 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet
link is down.
lldp lldpRemTablesChange 1.0.8802.1.1.2.0.0.1 The trap is sent when entries in the
remote database have any updates.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
(LLDP), defined as IEEE 802.1ab,
enables LAN devices that support
LLDP to exchange their configured
settings. This helps eliminate
configuration mismatch issues.
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
376
transceiver-ddm zyTransceiverDdmiTemperatur
eOutOfRange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.1 This trap is sent when the
transceiver temperature is above or
below the normal operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiTxPowerOut
OfRange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.2 This trap is sent when the
transmitted optical power is above
or below the normal operating
range.
zyTransceiverDdmiRxPowerOut
OfRange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.3 This trap is sent when the received
optical power is above or below the
normal operating r ange.
zyTransceiverDdmiVoltageOut
OfRange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.4 This trap is sent when the
transceiver supply voltage is above
or below the normal operating
range.
zyTransceiverDdmiTxBiasOutOf
Range 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.5 This trap is sent when the
transmitter laser bias current is
above or below the normal
operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiTemperatur
eOutOfRangeRecovered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.6 This trap is sent when the
transceiver temperature is
recovered from the out of normal
operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiTxPowerOut
OfRangeRecovered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.7 This trap is sent when the
transmitted optical power is
recovered from the out of normal
operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiRxPowerOut
OfRangeRecovered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.8 This trap is sent when the received
optical power is recovered from the
out of normal operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiVoltageOut
OfRangeRecovered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.9 This trap is sent when the
transceiver supply voltage is
recovered from the out of normal
operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiTxBiasOutOf
RangeRecovered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.10 This trap is sent when the
transmitter laser bias current is
recovered from the out of normal
operating range.
Storm-control zyPortStormCont rolTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3. 78.2.1 This trap is s ent when st orm control
is detected on a specific port. A
packet filter action has been applied
on the interface.
zuld zyZuldUnidirectionalDetected 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.110.3.1 This trap is sent when a
unidirectional link is detected.
zyZuldBidirectionalRecovered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.110.3.2 This trap is sent when the port
which is shut down by ZULD
becomes active again.
Ta ble 190 SNMP Interface Traps (continued)
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
377
Ta ble 191 SNMP AAA Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
authentication authenticationFailure 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5 This trap is sent when authentication
fails due to incorrect user name and/
or password.
zyAaaAuthenticationFailure 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.8.3.1 This trap is sent when authentication
fails due to incorrect user name and/
or password.
zyRadiusServerAuthenticationSe
rverNotReachable 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.71.2.1 This trap is sent when there is no
response me ssage from the RADIUS
authentication server.
zyTacacsServerAuthenticationSe
rverUnreachable 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.83.2.1 This trap is sent when there is no
response message from the TACACS+
authentication server.
zyRadiusServerAuthenticationSe
rverNotReachableRecovered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.71.2.3 This trap is sent when there is a
response me ssage from the
previous ly un rea c hable RADIUS
authentication server.
zyTacacsServerAuthenticationSe
rverUnreachableRecovered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.83.2.3 This trap is sent when there is a
response me ssage from the
previously unreachable TACACS+
authentication server.
authorization zyAaaAuthorizationFailure 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.8.3.2 This trap is sent when management
connection authorization failed.
accounting zyRadiusServerAccountingServe
rNotReachable 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.71.2.2 This trap is sent when there is no
response me ssage from the RADIUS
accounting server.
zyTacacsServerAccountingServe
rUnreachable 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.83.2.2 This trap is sent when there is no
response message from the T ACACS+
accounting server.
zyRadiusServerAccountingServe
rNotReachableRecovered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.71.2.4 This trap is sent when there is a
response me ssage from the
previous ly un rea c hable RADIUS
accounting server.
zyTacacsServerAccountingServe
rUnreachableRecovered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.83.2.4 This trap is sent when there is a
response me ssage from the
previously unreachable T ACACS+
accounting server.
Ta ble 192 SNMP IP Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
ping pingProbeFailed 1.3.6.1.2.1.80.0.1 This trap is sent when a single ping probe fails.
pingTestFailed 1.3.6.1.2.1.80.0.2 This trap is sent when a ping test (consisting of a
series of ping probes) fails.
pingTestCompleted 1.3.6.1.2.1.80.0.3 This trap is sent when a ping test is completed.
traceroute traceRouteTestFailed 1.3.6.1.2.1.81.0.2 This trap is sent when a traceroute test fails.
traceRouteTestCompleted 1.3.6.1.2.1.81.0.3 This trap is sent when a traceroute test is completed.
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
378
43.7.2 SSH Overview
Unlike Telnet or FTP, which transmit data in clear text, SSH (Secure Shell) is a secure
communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure
encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network.
Figure 264 SSH Communication Example
43.7.2.1 How SSH works
The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts.
Ta ble 193 SNMP Switch Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
stp STPNewRoot 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes.
zyMrstpNewRoot 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15
.3.52.3.1 This trap is sent when the MRSTP root switch
changes.
zyMstpNewRoot 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15
.3.53.3.1 This trap is sent when the MSTP root switch changes.
STPTopologyChange 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.2 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes.
zyMrstpTopologyChange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15
.3.52.3.2 This trap is sent when the MRSTP topology changes.
zyMstpTopologyChange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15
.3.53.3.2 This trap is sent when the MSTP root switch changes.
mactable zyMacForwardingTableFull 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15
.3.48.2.1 This trap is sent when more than 99% of the MAC
table is used.
zyMacForwardingTableFullReco
vered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15
.3.48.2.2 This trap is sent when the MAC address switching
table has become normal from full.
rmon RmonRisingAlarm 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.1 This tr ap i s sent when a v a riable goes ov er the RM ON
"rising" threshold.
RmonFallingAlarm 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.2 This trap is sent when the variable falls below the
RMON "falling" threshold.
cfm dot1agCfmFaultAlarm 1.3.111.2.802.1.1.8.
0.1 The trap is sent when the Switch detects a
connectivity fault.
classifier zyAclV2ClassifierLogNotificatio
n1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15
.3.105.4.1 This trap is sent when the Switch detects classifier log
information.
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
379
Figure 265 How SSH Works
1Host Identification
The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server. The server identifies itself with a host
key. The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and
sends the result back to the server.
The client automatically saves any new server public keys. In subsequent connections, the server
public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer.
2Encryption Method
Once the identification is verified, both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption
method to use.
3Authentication and Data Transmission
After the identification is verified and data encryption activated, a secure tunnel is established
between the client and the server. The client then sends its authentication information (user name
and password) to the server to log in to the server.
43.7.2.2 SSH Implementation on the Switch
Your Switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three en cryption methods (DES,
3DES and Blowfish). The SSH server is implemented on the Switch for remote management and file
transfer on port 22. Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time.
43.7.2.3 Requirements for Using SSH
You must install an SSH client program on a client computer (Windows or Linux operating system)
that is used to connect to the Switch over SSH.
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
380
43.7.3 Introduction to HTTPS
HT TPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer, or HT TP over SSL) is a web protocol
that encrypts and decrypts web pages. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an application-level protocol
that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality (an unauthorized party cannot
read the transferred data), authentication (one party can identify the other party) and data
integrity (you know if data has been changed).
It relies upon certificates, public keys, and private keys.
HTTPS on the Switch is used so that you may securely access the Switch using the web
configurator. The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server (the Switch) must always authenticate
itself to the SSL client (the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the Switch),
whereas the SSL client only should authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so.
Authenticating client certificates is optional and if selected means the SSL-client must send the
Switch a certificate. You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a Certificate Authority
(CA) that is a trusted CA on the Switch.
Please refer to the following figure.
1HT TPS connection requests from an SSL-aware web browser go to port 443 (by default) on the
Switch’s WS (web server).
2HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 (by default) on the Switch’s WS (web
server).
Figure 266 HTTPS Implementation
Note: If you disable HT TP in the Service Access Control screen, then t he Switch blocks all
HTTP connection attempts.
43.7.3.1 HTTPS Example
If you haven’t changed the default HTTPS port on the Switch, then in your browser enter “https://
Switch IP Address/” as the web site address where “S witch IP Address” is the IP address or domain
name of the Switch you wish to access.
Internet Explorer Warning Messages
Internet Explorer 6
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
381
When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server, a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you
trust the server certificate.
You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer. Select Yes to proceed to the web
configurator login screen; if you select No, then web configurator access is blocked.
Figure 267 Security Alert Dialog Box (Internet Explorer 6)
Internet Explorer 7 or 8
When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server, a screen with the message "There is a
problem with this website's security certificate." may display. If that is the case, click Continue to
this website (not recommended) to proceed to the web configurator login screen.
Figure 268 Security Certificate Warning (Internet Explorer 7 or 8)
After you log in, you will see the red address bar with the message Certificate Error. Cl ick on
Certificate Error next to the address bar and click View certificates.
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
382
Figure 269 Certificate Error (Internet Explorer 7 or 8)
Click Install Certificate... and follow the on-screen instructions to install the certificate in your
browser.
Figure 270 Certificate (Internet Explorer 7 or 8)
Mozilla Firefox Warning Messages
When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server, a This Connection is Unstructed screen
may display. If that is the case, click I Understand the Risks and then the Add Exception...
button.
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
383
Figure 271 Security Alert (Mozilla Firefox)
Confirm the HT TPS serv er URL matches. Click Confirm Security Exception to proceed to the web
configurator login screen.
Figure 272 Security Alert (Mozilla Firefox)
EXAMPLE
Chapter 43 Access Control
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
384
43.7.3.2 The Main Screen
After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password, the S witch main screen
appears. The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar or next to the website
address denotes a secure connection.
Figure 273 Example: Lock Denoting a Secure Connection
EXAMPLE
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
385
CHAPTER 44
Diagnostic
44.1 Overview
This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen. You can use this screen to help you identify problems.
44.2 Diagnostic
Click Management > Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen. Use this screen to
ping IP addresses, run a traceroute, perform port tests or show the Switch’s location between
devices.
Figure 274 Management > Diagnostic
Chapter 44 Diagnostic
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
386
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 194 Management > Diagnostic
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ping Test
IPv4 Select this option if you want to ping an IPv4 address, and select vlan to specify the ID
number of the VLAN to which the Switch is to send ping requests. Otherwise, select - to
send ping requests to all VLANs on the Switch.
IPv6 Select this option if you want to ping an IPv6 address. You can also select vlan and
specify the ID number of the VLAN to which the Switch is to send ping requests.
Otherwis e, select - to send ping requests to all VLANs on the Switch.
Count Enter the number of ICMP Echo Request (ping) messages the Switch continuously sends.
IP Address/
Host Name Type the IP address or host name of a device that you want to ping in order to test a
connection.
Click Ping to have the Switch ping the IP address.
Trace Route Test
IPv4 Select this option if you want to trace the route packets take to a device with an IPv4
address, and select vlan to specify the ID nu mber of the VLAN on which the Switch
traces the path. Otherwise, select - to trace the path on any VLAN.
Note: The device to which you want to run a traceroute must belong to the VLAN you
specify here.
IPv6 Select this option if you want to trace the route packets take to a device with an IPv6
address.
TTL Enter the Ti me To Live (TTL) value for the ICMP Ec h o Request packets. This is to set the
maximum number of the hops (routers) a packet can travel through. Each router along
the path will decrement the TTL value by one and forward the packets. When the TTL
value becomes zero and the destination is not found, the router drops the packets and
informs the sender.
Wait Time Specify how many seconds the Switch waits for a response to a probe before running
another traceroute.
Queries Specify how many times the Switch performs the traceroute functi on.
IP Address/
Host Name Enter the IP address or host name of a device to which you want to perform a
traceroute.
Click Trace Route to have the Switch perform the traceroute functio n. This determines
the path a packet takes to the specified device.
Ethernet Port Test Enter a port number and click Port Test to perform an internal loopback test.
Cable Diagnostics Enter a port number and click Diagnose to perform a physical wire-pair test of the
Ethernet connections on the specified port(s). The followin g fields display when you
diagnose a port.
Port This is the number of the physical Ethernet port on the Switch.
Channel An Ethernet cable usually has four pairs of wires. A 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX port only
use and test two pairs, while a 1000BASE-T port requires all four pairs.
This displays the descriptive name of the wire-pair in the cable.
Pair status Ok: The physical connection between the wi re-pair is okay.
Open: There is no physic al connection (an open circuit dete cted) between the wire-pair.
Short: There is an short circuit detected between the wire-pair.
Unknown: The Switch failed to run cable diagnostics on the cable connected this port.
Unsupported: The port is a fiber port or it is not active.
Chapter 44 Diagnostic
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
387
Cable length This displays the total length of the Ethe rnet cable that is c onnected to the port whe n the
Pair status is Ok and the Switch chipset supports this feature.
This shows N/A if the Pair status is Open or Short. Check the Distance to fault.
This shows Unsupported if the Switch chipset does not support to show the cable
length.
Distance to
fault This displays the distance between the port and the location where the c able is open or
shorted.
This shows N/A if the Pair status is Ok.
This shows Unsupported if the Switch chipset does not support to sh ow the distance.
Locator LED Enter a time interval (in minutes) and click Blink to show the actual location of the
Switch between several devices in a rack.
The default time interval is 30 minutes.
Click Stop to have the Switch term inate the blinking locater LED.
Table 194 Management > Diagnostic (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
388
CHAPTER 45
System Log
45.1 Overview
A log message stores the information for viewing.
45.2 System Log
Click Management > System Log in the navigation panel to open this screen. Use this screen to
check current system logs.
Note: When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages, new log messages
automatically overwrite existing log messages, starting with the oldest existing log
message first.
Figure 275 Management > System Log
The summary table shows the time the log message was recorded and the reason the log message
was generated. Click Refresh to update this screen. Click Clear to clear the whole log, regardless
of what is currently displayed on the screen. Click Download to save the log to your computer.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
389
CHAPTER 46
Syslog Setup
46.1 Syslog Overview
This chapter explains the syslog screens.
The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to
syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog
message and send it to a syslog server.
Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related
information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog
facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for
details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels.
46.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the Syslog Setup screen (Section 46.2 on page 38 9) to configure the device’s system
logging settings and configure a list of external syslog servers.
46.2 Syslog Setup
The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server. Use this screen to configure the device’s
system logging settings and configure a list of external syslog servers.
Click Management > Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen.
Table 195 Syslog Severity Levels
CODE SEVERITY
0 Emergency: The system is unusable.
1 Alert: Action must be taken immediately.
2 Cr itical: The sys tem condition is critical.
3 Error: There is an error condition on the system.
4 Warning: There is a warning condition on the system.
5 Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system.
6 Informational: The syslog contains an informational message.
7 Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes.
Chapter 46 Syslog Setup
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
390
Figure 276 Management > Syslog Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 196 Management > Syslog Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Syslog Select Active to turn on syslog (system logging) and then configure the syslog sett ing
Logging Type This column displays the names of the categories of logs that the device can generate.
Active Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category.
F acilit y The log facility al lows you to send logs t o different files in the sysl og server. R efer to the
documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Syslog Server
Setup
Active Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server. Clear the check
box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it
(you can edit the entry later).
Server Address Enter the IP address of the syslog server.
Log Level Select the severity level(s) of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog
server. The lower the number, the more critical the logs are.
Chapter 46 Syslog Setup
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
391
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry. Click this number to edit the entry.
Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server. No displays if the
device is not to send logs to the syslog server.
IP Address This field displays the IP address of the syslog server.
Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog
server.
Select an entry’ s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry(ies).
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 196 Management > Syslog Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
392
CHAPTER 47
Cluster Management
47.1 Cluster Management Overview
This chapter introduces cluster management.
Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one Switch, called the cluster
manager. The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able
to communicate with one another.
In the following example, switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches
on the upper floors of the building are cluster members.
Figure 277 Clustering Application Example
Table 197 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications
Maximum number of cluster
members 24
Cluster Member Models Must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management
implementation.
Cluster Manager The switch through which you manage the cluster member
switches.
Cluster Members The switches being managed by the cluster manager switch.
Chapter 47 Cluster Management
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
393
47.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the Cluster Management screen (Section 47.2 on page 393) to view the role of the Switch
within the cluster and to access a cluster member switch’s web configurator.
•Use the Clustering Management Configuration screen (Section 47.1 on page 392) to
configure clustering management.
47.2 Cluster Management Status
Use this screen to view the role of the Switch within the cluster and to access a cluster member
switch’s web configurator.
Click Management > Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following
screen.
Note: A cluster can only have one manager.
Figure 278 Management > Cluster Management: Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 198 Management > Cluster Management: Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status This field dis p lays the role of this Switch within the cluster.
Manager
Member (you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not
via the cluster manager)
None (neither a manager nor a member of a cluster)
Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch’s hardware MAC address.
The Number of
Member This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster. The following fields
describe the cluster member switches.
Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch. Each number in
the Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch’s web configurator
(see Figure 280 on page 396).
MacAddr This is the cluster member switch’s hardware MAC address.
Name This is the cluster member switch’s System Name.
Chapter 47 Cluster Management
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
394
47.3 Clustering Management Configuration
Use this screen to configure clustering management. Click Management > Cluster Management
> Configuration to display the next screen.
Figure 279 Management > Cluster Management > Configuration
Model This field displays the model name.
Status This field displays:
Online (the cluster member switch is accessible)
Error (for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set
as the manager and so left the member list, etc.)
Offline (the switch is disconnected - Offline shows approximately 1.5 minutes after the link
between cluster member and manager goes down)
Table 198 Management > Cluster Management: Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLE
Chapter 47 Cluster Management
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
395
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 199 Management > Cluster Management > Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Clustering Manager
Active Select Active to have this Switch become the cluster manager switch. A cluster can
only have one manager. Other (directly connected) swi tches that are set to be cluster
managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list. If a switch that was
previously a cluster member is later set t o become a cluster manager, then its Status is
displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon
( ) appears in the member summary list below.
Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager. You may use up to 32 printable
characters (spaces are allowed).
VID This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the Switch is set to 802.1Q VLAN. All
switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same
cluster. Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering
Candidates list. This field is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port-based
VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clustering
Candidate The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members.
List A list of suitable candidates found by auto-discovery is shown here. The switches must
be directly connected. Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers
will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list. Switches that are not in the same
management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list.
Password Each cl uster member’s password is its web configurator password. Select a member in
the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password. If that
switch administ rato r changes the web configur ator pass word afterwards, then i t cannot
be managed from the Cluster Manager. Its Status is displayed as Error in the
Cluster Management Status screen.
If multiple devices have the same password then hold [SHIFT] and click those switches
to select them. Then enter their commo n web configurator password.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto-discovery again to list potential cluster members.
The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured.
Index Thi s is the index number of a cluster member switch.
MacAddr This is the cluster member switch’s hardware MAC address.
Name This is the cluster member switch’s System Name.
Model This is the cluster member switch’s model name.
Select an entry’s check box to select a sp ecific entry. Otherwise, select the c heck bo x in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Remove Click the Remove button to remove the selected cluster member switch(es) from the
cluster.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 47 Cluster Management
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
396
47.4 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
47.4.1 Cluster Member Switch Management
Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select
an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch's web
configurator home page. Th is cluster member web configurator home page and the home page that
you'd see if you accessed it directly are different.
Figure 280 Cluster Management: Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen
47.4.1.1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch
Y o u can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch
as shown in the following example.
example
example
Chapter 47 Cluster Management
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
397
Figure 281 Example: Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch
The following table explains some of the FTP parameters.
C:\>ftp 192.168.1.1
Connected to 192.168.1.1.
220 Switch FTP version 1.0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00:58:46 1970
User (192.168.0.1:(none)): admin
331 Enter PASS command
Password:
230 Logged in
ftp> ls
200 Port command okay
150 Opening data connection for LIST
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 3042210 Jul 01 12:00 ras
-rw-rw-rw- 1 owner group 393216 Jul 01 12:00 config
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
-rw-rw-rw- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 config-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
226 File sent OK
ftp: 297 bytes received in 0.00Seconds 297000.00Kbytes/sec.
ftp> bin
200 Type I OK
ftp> put 430AAHW0.bin fw-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
200 Port command okay
150 Opening data connection for STOR fw-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
226 File received OK
ftp: 262144 bytes sent in 0.63Seconds 415.44Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
Table 200 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example
FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
User Enter “admin”.
Password The web configurator password default is 1234.
ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster membe r switch’s firmware
and configuration file.
430AAHW0.bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster
member switch.
fw-00-a0-c5-01-23-46 This is the cluster member switch’s firmware name as seen in the cluster
manager switch.
config-00-a0-c5-01-23-46 This is the cluster member switch’s configuration file name as seen in the
cluster manager switch.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
398
CHAPTER 48
MAC Table
48.1 MAC Table Overview
This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen.
The MAC Table screen (a MAC table is also known as a filtering database) shows how frames are
forwarded or filtered across the Switch’s ports. It shows what device MAC address, belonging to
what VLAN group (if any) is forwarded to which port(s) and whether the MAC address is dynamic
(learned by the Switch) or static (manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).
48.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the MAC Table screen (Section 48 .2 on page 399) to check whether the MAC address is
dynamic or static.
48.1.2 What You Need to Know
The Switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames. See the following figure.
1The Switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came.
2The Switch checks to see if the frame's destination MAC address matches a source MAC address
already learned in the MAC table.
• If the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, then it forwards the frame to
that port.
• If the Switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address, then the frame is flooded to
all ports. Too much port flooding leads to network congestion.
• If the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, but the destination port is the
same as the port it came in on, then it filters the frame.
Chapter 48 MAC Table
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
399
Figure 282 MAC Table Flowchart
48.2 Viewing the MAC Table
Use this screen to check whether the MAC address is dynamic or static.
Click Management > MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen.
Figure 283 Management > MAC Table
Chapter 48 MAC Table
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
400
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 201 Management > MAC Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Condition Se lect one of the buttons and click Search to only display the data which m a tches the
criteria you specified.
Select All to display any entry in the MAC table of the Switch.
Select Static to display the MAC entries manually configured on the Switch.
Select MAC and enter a MAC address in the field provided to display a specified MAC entry.
Select VID and enter a VLAN ID in the field provided to display the MAC entries belonging to
the specified VLAN.
Select Port and enter a port number in the field provided to display the MAC addresses
which are forwarded on the specified port.
Sort by Define how the Switch displays and arranges the data in the summary table below.
Select MAC to display and arrange the data according to MAC address.
Select VID to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group.
Select PORT to display and arrange the data according to port number.
Transfer Type Select Dynamic to MAC forwarding and click the Transfer button to change all
dynamically learned MAC address entries in the summary table be low into static entries.
They also display in the Static MAC Forwarding screen.
Select Dynamic to MAC filtering and click the Transfer button to change all dynamically
learned MAC address entries in the summary table below into MAC filtering entries. These
entries will then display only in the Filtering screen and the default filtering action is
Discard source.
Cancel Click Cancel to change the fields back to their last saved values.
Index This is the incoming frame index number.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came.
VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs.
Port This is the port where the above MAC address is forwarded.
Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by the Switch) or static
(manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
401
CHAPTER 49
ARP Table
49.1 Overview
This chapter introduces ARP Table.
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP
address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on
the local area network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The
ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address.
49.1.1 What You Can Do
Use the ARP Table screen (Section 49.2 on page 401) to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s).
49.1.2 What You Need to Know
When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch,
the Switch's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address, it sends it to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN.
The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP
address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the Switch puts all ones in the
target MAC field (FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is
either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the
broadcast address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts
the answer directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference
and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied.
49.2 Viewing the ARP Table
Use the ARP table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s) and remove specific dynamic ARP entries.
Click Management > ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen.
Chapter 49 ARP Table
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
402
Figure 284 Management > ARP Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 202 Management > ARP Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Condition Specify how you want the Switch to remove ARP entries when you click Flush.
Select All to remove all of the dynamic entries from the ARP table.
Select IP Address and enter an IP address to remove the dynamic entries learned with the
specified IP address.
Select Port and enter a port number to remove the dynamic entries learned on the specified
port.
Flush Click Flush to remove the ARP entries according to the condition you specified.
Cancel Click Cancel to return the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the ARP table entry number.
IP Address This is the IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with the corresponding MAC
address below.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the corresponding IP address above.
VID This field displays the VLAN to which the device belongs.
Port This field displays the port to which the de vice connects. CPU means this IP address is the
Switch’s management IP address.
Age(s) This field displays how long (in seconds) an entry can still remain in the ARP table before it
ages out and needs to be relearned. This shows 0 for a static entry.
Type This shows whether the IP address i s dynamic (learned by the Switch ) or static (manually
configured in the Basic Setting > IP Setup or IP Appl ication > ARP S etup > Static ARP
screen).
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
403
CHAPTER 50
Path MTU Table
50.1 Path MTU Overview
This chapter introduces the IPv6 Path MTU table.
The largest size (in bytes) of a packet that can be transferred over a data link is called the
maximum transmission unit (MTU). The Switch uses Path MTU Discovery to discover Path MTU
(PMTU), that is, the minimum link MTU of all the links in a path to the destination. If the Switch
receives an ICMPv6 Packet Too Big error message after sending a packet, it fragments the next
packet according to the suggested MTU in the error message.
50.2 Viewing the Path MTU Table
Use this screen to view IPv6 path MTU information on the Switch. Click Management > Path MTU
Table in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 285 Management > Path MTU Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 203 Management > Path MTU Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Path M TU
aging ti me This field dis plays how long a n entry remain s in the Path MTU table before it ages out and
needs to be relearned .
Index This field displays the index number of each entry in the table.
Destination
Address This field displays the destination IPv6 address of each path/entry.
MTU This field displays the maximum transmission unit of the links in the path.
Expire This field displays how long (in minutes) an entry can still remain in the Path MTU table before
it ages out and needs to be relearned.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
404
CHAPTER 51
Configure Clone
51.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports.
51.2 Configure Clone
Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port
or ports. Click Management > Configure Clone to open the following screen.
Chapter 51 Configure Clone
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
405
Figure 286 Management > Configure Clone
Chapter 51 Configure Clone
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
406
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 204 Management > Configure Clone
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Source/
Destination
Port
Enter the source port under the Source label. This port’s attributes are copied.
Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label. These are the ports which
are going to have the same attributes as the source port. You can enter individual ports
separated by a comma or a range of ports by using a dash.
Example:
2, 4, 6 indicates that ports 2, 4 and 6 are the destination ports.
2-6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports.
Basic Setting Select which port settings (you configured in the Basic Setting menus) should be copied to
the destination port(s).
Advanced
Application Select whic h port settings (you configured in the Advanced Application menus) should be
copied to the destination ports.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation pane l to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
407
CHAPTER 52
IPv6 Neighbor Table
52.1 IPv6 Neighbor Table Overview
This chapter introduces the IPv6 neighbor table.
An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor table. If there is an address to be resolved or verified,
the Switch sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the Switch receives a neighbor
advertisement in response, it stores the neighbor’ s link -layer address in the neighbor table. You can
also manually create a static IPv6 neighbor entry using the Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6
Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Setup screen.
When the Switch needs to send a packet, it first consults other table to determine the next hop.
Once the next hop IPv6 address is known, the Switch looks into the neighbor table to get the link-
layer address and sends the packet when the neighbor is reachable. If the Switch cannot find an
entry in the neighbor table or the state for the neighbor is not reachable, it starts the address
resolution process. This helps reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages.
52.2 Viewing the IPv6 Neighbor Table
Use this screen to view IPv6 neighbor information on the Switch. Click Management > IPv6
Neighbor Table in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 287 Management > IPv6 Neighbor Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 205 Management > IPv6 Neighbor Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number of each entry in the table.
Interfac e This field d ispla ys the ID number of the IPv6 interface on which the IP v6 address is created or
through which the neighboring device can be reached.
Neighbor
Address This field displays the IPv6 address of the Switch or a neighboring devic e.
MAC This field displays the MAC address of the IPv6 interface on which the IPv6 address is
configured or the MAC address of the neighboring device.
Chapter 52 IPv6 Neighbor Table
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
408
Status This field dis p lays whether the neighbor IPv6 interface is reachable. In IPv6, “reachable”
means an IPv6 packet can be correctl y forwarde d to a neighbor node (host or router) and the
neighbor can successfully receive and handle the packet. The available options in this field
are:
• reachable (R): The interface of the neighboring device is reachable. (The Switch has
received a response to the initial request.)
• stale (S): The last reachable time has expired and the Switch is waiting for a response to
another init ial request. The field di splays this also when the Switch receives an
unrequested response from the neighbor’s interface.
• delay (D): The neighboring interface is no longer known to be reachable, and traffic has
been sent to the ne ighbor re cent ly. The Switch delays sendi ng reque st pack et s for a short
to give upper-layer protocols a chance to determine reachability.
• probe (P): The Switch is sending request packets and waiting for the neighbor’s response.
• invalid (IV): The neighbor address is with an invalid IPv6 address.
• unknown (?): The s tat us of the neighboring interface can not be determined for some
reason.
• incomplete (I): Address resolution is in progress and the li nk -layer address of the neighbor
has not yet been determined. The interface of the neighboring device did not give a
complete response.
Type This field displays the type of an address mapping to a neighbor interface. The available
options in this field are:
• other (O): none of the following type.
• local (L): A Switch interface is using the address.
• dynamic (D): The IP address to MAC address can be successful ly res olved using IPv6
Neighbor Discovery protocol. Is it similar as IPv4 ARP (Address Resolution protocol).
• static (S): The interface address is statically configured.
Table 205 Management > IPv6 Neighbor Table (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
409
CHAPTER 53
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential
problems are divided into the following categories.
•Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
•Switch Access and Login
•Switch Configuration
53.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The Switch does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
1Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Switch.
2Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Switch and plugged in to an appropriate
power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
3Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch.
4If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
The ALM LED is on.
1Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch.
2If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
1Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 3.3 on page 31.
2Check the hardware connections. See Section 53.1 on page 409.
3Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
Chapter 53 Troubleshooting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
410
4Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch.
5If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
53.2 Switch Access and Login
I forgot the IP address for the Switch.
1The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.
2Use the console port to log in to the Switch.
3If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 4.6 on page
40.
I forgot the username and/or password.
1The default username is admin and the default password is 1234.
2If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 4.6 on page
40.
I cannot see or access th e Login screen in the web configurator.
1Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.
• If you changed the IP address, use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and hav e forgotten it, see the troubleshooting su ggestions for I
forgot the IP address for the Switch.
2Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See Section
3.3 on page 31.
3Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java
enabled.
4Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch. (If you know that there are routers
between your computer and the Switch, skip this step.)
5Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the Switch with the default IP address.
See Section 4.6 on page 40.
Chapter 53 Troubleshooting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
411
6If the problem continues, contact the vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• Try to access the Switch using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the Switch,
check the remote management settings to find out why the Switch does not respond to HTTP.
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the Switch.
1Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly. The default user name is
admin, and the default password is 1234. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps
Lock] is not on.
2You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions. Close other Telnet
session(s) or try connecting again later.
Check that you have enabled logins for HTTP or Telnet. If you have configured a secured client IP
address, your computer’s IP address must match it. Refer to the chapter on access control for
details.
3Disconnect and re-connect the cord to the Switch.
4If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 4.6 on page
40.
Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Jav a pe rmission s (en a bled by default).
I cannot see some of Advanced Application submenus at the bottom of the navigation
panel.
The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. Adjust the value in your computer and
then you should see the rest of Advanced Application submenus at the bottom of the navigation
panel.
There is unauthorized access to my Switch via telnet, HTTP and SSH.
Chapter 53 Troubleshooting
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
412
Click the Display button in the System Log field in the Management > Diagnostic screen to
check for unauthorized access to your Switch. To avoid unauthorized access, configu re the secured
client setting in the Management > Access Control > Remote Management screen for telnet,
HTTP and SSH (see Section 43.6 on page 370). Computers not belonging to the secured client set
cannot get permission to access the Switch.
53.3 Switch Configuration
I lost my configuration settings after I restart the Switch.
Make sure you save your configuration into the Switch’s
nonvolatile memory each time you make changes. Click Save
at the top right corner of the web configurator to save the
configuration permanently. See also Section 42.5 on page 357 for more information about how to
save your configuration.
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
413
APPENDIX A
Customer Support
In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your
vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you
bought the device. Regional websites are listed below.
See also http://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml.
Please have the following information ready when you contact an office.
Required Information
• Product model and serial number.
• Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)
Taiwan
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com
Asia
China
• ZyXEL Communications (Shanghai) Corp.
ZyXEL Communications (Beijing) Corp.
ZyXEL Communications (Tianjin) Corp.
• http://www.zyxel.cn
India
• ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd
• http://www.zyxel.in
Kazakhstan
•ZyXEL Kazakhstan
• http://www.zyxel.kz
Appendix A Customer Support
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
414
Korea
• ZyXEL Korea Corp.
• http://www.zyxel.kr
Malaysia
• ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.my
Pakistan
• ZyXEL Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.pk
Philippines
• ZyXEL Philippines
• http://www.zyxel.com.ph
Singapore
• ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.sg
Taiwan
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com
Thailand
• ZyXEL Thailand Co., Ltd
• http://www.zyxel.co.th
Vietnam
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office
• http://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi
Europe
Austria
• ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH
• http://www.zyxel.de
Belarus
•ZyXEL BY
• http://www.zyxel.by
Appendix A Customer Support
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
415
Belgium
• ZyXEL Communications B.V.
• http://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/
Bulgaria
•ZyXEL България
• http://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/
Czech Republic
• ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o
• http://www.zyxel.cz
Denmark
• ZyXEL Communications A/S
• http://www.zyxel.dk
Estonia
•ZyXEL Estonia
• http://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/
Finland
• ZyXEL Communications
• http://www.zyxel.fi
France
•ZyXEL France
• http://www.zyxel.fr
Germany
• ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH
• http://www.zyxel.de
Hungary
• ZyXEL Hungary & SEE
• http://www.zyxel.hu
Latvia
•ZyXEL Latvia
• http://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/homepage.shtml
Appendix A Customer Support
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
416
Lithuania
• ZyXEL Lithuania
• http://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/homepage.shtml
Netherlands
•ZyXEL Benelux
• http://www.zyxel.nl
Norway
• ZyXEL Communications
• http://www.zyxel.no
Poland
• ZyXEL Communications Poland
• http://www.zyxel.pl
Romania
•ZyXEL Romania
• http://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro
Russia
• ZyXEL Russia
• http://www.zyxel.ru
Slovakia
• ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka
• http://www.zyxel.sk
Spain
•ZyXEL Spain
• http://www.zyxel.es
Sweden
• ZyXEL Communications
• http://www.zyxel.se
Switzerland
•Studerus AG
• http://www.zyxel.ch/
Appendix A Customer Support
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
417
Turkey
•ZyXEL Turkey A.S.
• http://www.zyxel.com.tr
UK
• ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.co.uk
Ukraine
•ZyXEL Ukraine
• http://www.ua.zyxel.com
Latin America
Argentina
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/
Ecuador
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/
Middle East
Israel
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://il.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml
Middle East
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/me/en
North America
USA
• ZyXEL Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters
• http://www.us.zyxel.com/
Appendix A Customer Support
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
418
Oceania
Australia
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/au/en/
Africa
South Africa
• Nology (Pty) Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.co.za
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
419
APPENDIX B
Common Services
The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port
numbers. For a comprehensive list of port numbers, ICMP type/code numbers and services, visit
the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) web site.
•Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a
different one, if you like.
•Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service
uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is User-Defined, the Port(s) is the IP
protocol number, not the port number.
•Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information
about port numbers.
•If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number.
•If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.
•Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations
in which this service is used.
Table 206 Commonly Used Services
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined 51 The IPSEC AH (Authen tication Header)
tunneling protocol uses this service.
AIM/New-ICQ TCP 5190 AOL’s Internet Messenger service. It is also
used as a listening port by ICQ.
AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers.
BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME TCP
UDP
7648
24032
A popular videoconferencing solution from
White Pines Software.
DNS TCP/UDP 53 Domain Name Server, a service that matches
web names (for example www.zyxel.com) to IP
numbers.
ESP (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security
Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service.
FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command
that can be used to find out if a user is logged
on.
FTP TCP
TCP
20
21
File Transfer Program, a progr am to enable fast
transfer of files, including large files that may
not be possible by e-mail.
H.323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol.
Appendix B Common Services
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
420
HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/server
protocol for the world wide web.
HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in
e-commerce.
ICMP User-Defined 1Internet Control Message Protocol is often
used for diagnostic or routing purposes.
ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program.
IGMP (MULTICAST) User-Defined 2Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when
sending packets to a specific group of hosts.
IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used
for key distribution and management.
IRC TCP/UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program.
MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks’ messenger service uses
this protocol.
NEW-ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program.
NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups.
NFS UDP 2049 Network File System - NFS is a client/server
distributed file service that provid es
transparent file sharing for network
environments.
NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the
delivery mechanism for the USENET
newsgroup service.
PING User-Defined 1Packet IN ternet Groper is a protocol t hat sends
out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not
a remote host is reachable.
POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a cl ient
computer get e-mail from a POP3 server
through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or
other).
PPTP TCP 1723 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables
secure transfer of data over public networks.
This is the control channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE) User-Defined 47 PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
enables secure transfer of data over public
networks. This is the data channel.
RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real
time sound over the web.
REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login.
RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet.
RTSP TCP/UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming (media control)
Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for
multimedia on the Internet.
SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol.
Table 206 Commonly Used Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
Appendix B Common Services
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
421
SMTP TCP 25 Simp le Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-
exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP
enables you to move messages from one e-
mail server to another.
SNMP TCP/UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program.
SNMP-TRAPS TCP/UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).
SQL-NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to
access data on many different types of
database systems , including mainframes,
midrange systems, UNIX systems and network
servers.
SSH TCP/UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol.
SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a
UNIX server.
TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access
Controller Access Control System).
TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation
protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX
environments. It operates over TCP/IP
networks. Its primary func tion is to allow users
to log into remote host systems.
TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file
transfer protocol similar to FTP, but uses the
UDP (User Datagr am Protocol ) rath er than T CP
(Transmission Control Protocol).
VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution.
Table 206 Commonly Used Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
422
APPENDIX C
IPv6
Overview
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The
increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP
addresses.
IPv6 Addressing
The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This
is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can
be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutiv e blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can
only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be
written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
Prefix and Prefix Length
Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An
IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address
compose the network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For
example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet pre fi x.
Link-local Address
A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a
“private IP address” in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a
device. A link-local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast
address format is as follows.
Table 207 Link-local Unicast Address Format
1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID
10 bits 54 bits 64 bits
Appendix C IPv6
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
423
Global Address
A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a “public IP address” in
IPv4. A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3.
Unspecified Address
An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does
not have its own address. It is similar to “0.0.0.0” in IPv4.
Loopback Address
A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to
“127.0.0.1” in IPv4.
Multicast Address
In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses.
Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts
in a multicast group.
Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a
predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast
addresses.
The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned
to a multicast group.
Table 208 Predefined Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local node.
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local node.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local connected link.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local connec ted link.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local site .
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3 All DHCP severs on a local site.
Table 209 Reserved Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS
FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Appendix C IPv6
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
424
Subnet Masking
Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided
into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each
character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each block’s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal
characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000.
Interface ID
In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an
Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One
interface should have a unique interface ID.
EUI-64
The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-b i t (6-
byte) Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and
fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC
address. See the following example.
Stateless Autoconfiguration
With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6, addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated.
Unlike DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six) which is used in IPv6 stateful
autoconfiguration, the owner and status of addresses don’t need to be maintained by a DHCP
server. Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when
IPv6 is initiated on its interface. It combines the prefix and the interface ID (generated from its own
Ethernet MAC address, see Interface ID and EUI-64) to form a complete IPv6 address.
When IPv6 is enabled on a device, its interface automatically generates a link-local address
(beginning with fe80).
When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the Switch is set to automatically
obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface, it generates 3another address which
FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Table 209 Reserved Multicast Address (continued)
MULTICAST ADDRESS
Table 210
MAC 00 : 13 : 49 : 12 : 34 : 56
Ta ble 211
EUI-64 02: 13 : 49 : FF : FE : 12 : 34 : 56
Appendix C IPv6
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
425
combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router. This is a
routable global IP address.
DHCPv6
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6, RFC 3315) is a server-client protocol
that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses, prefixes and other
configuration information to DHCP clients. DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages
using UDP.
Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID), which is used for
identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages. The DUID is generated from the MAC
address, time, vendor assigned ID and/or the vendor's private enterprise number registered with
the IANA. It should not change over time even after you reboot the device.
Identity Association
An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which
the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with
exactly one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration
from a DHCP server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP
information.
The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an
identity association for non-temporary addresses an d IA_T A is an identity association for temporary
addresses. An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The
DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to
extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client
sends the server (S1) (from which the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If
the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any
available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's
discretion.
DHCP Relay Agent
A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages
between the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-
known multicast address to locate a DHCP serv er on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent
to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network.
The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID
option to the Rela y-F orward DHCPv6 messages. The remote- ID option carries a user-defined string,
3. In IPv6, all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses.
T1
T2
Renew Rebind
Rebind
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
to S2
to S2
Appendix C IPv6
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
426
such as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the
VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay -Reply
messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the
interface-ID option from the Re lay-Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to
the relay agent. The interface-ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts.
Prefix Delegation
Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the
ISP (or a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The Switch uses the received IPv6 prefix (for
example, 2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending R outer Advertisements
(RAs) regularly by multicast, the Switch passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The
hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses.
ICMPv6
Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443.
ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify
ICMP for IPv4. ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors
encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping".
Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)
The Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) is a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices and track
neighbor’s reachability in a network. An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types:
• Neighbor solicitation: A request from a host to determine a neighbor’s link-layer address (MAC
address) and detect if the neighbor is still reachable. A neighbor being “reachable” means it
responds to a neighbor solicitation message (from the host) with a neighbor advertisement
message.
• Neighbor advertisement: A response from a node to announce its link-layer address.
• Router solicitation: A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and
forward packets.
• Router adv ertisement: A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement
from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters.
IPv6 Cache
An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache, destination cache, prefix list and default router
list. The Switch maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from
response messages. In IPv6, the Switch configures a link-local address automatically, and then
sends a neighbor solicitation message to check if the address is unique. If there is an address to be
resolved or verified, the Switch also sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the Switch
receives a neighbor advertisement in response, it stores the neighbor’s link-layer address in the
neighbor cache. When the Switch uses a router solicitation message to query for a router and
receives a router advertisement message, it adds the router’ s information to the neighbor cache,
prefix list and destination cache. The Switch creates an entry in the default router list cache if the
router can be used as a default router.
When the Switch needs to send a packet, it first consults the destination cache to determine the
next hop. If there is no matching entry in the destination cache, the Switch uses the prefix list to
Appendix C IPv6
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
427
determine whether the destination address is on-link and can be reached directly without passing
through a router. If the address is onlink, the address is considered as the next hop. Otherw ise, the
Switch determines the next-hop from the default router list or routing table. Once the next hop IP
address is known, the Switch looks into the neighbor cache to get the link -lay er address and sends
the packet when the neighbor is reachable. If the S witch cannot find an en try in the neighbor cache
or the state for the neighbor is not reachable, it starts the address resolution process. This helps
reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages.
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista
By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the
ipv6 install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the
ipconfig command to see auto-generated IP addresses.
IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check
your automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available
for the interface on your computer.
Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP
Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment,
you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use
static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore
this section.)
This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:
1Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer.
2After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-DHCPv6 > Client
Install as service.
3Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
C:\>ipv6 install
Installing...
Succeeded.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.46
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.254
Appendix C IPv6
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
428
4Double click Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client.
5Click Start and then OK.
6Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server.
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7
Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also en abled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7
computer.
To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:
1Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection.
2Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it.
3Click OK to save the change.
Appendix C IPv6
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
429
4Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen.
5Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
6Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global
address (2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IPv6 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 2001:b021:2d::1000
Link-local IPv6 Address . . . . . : fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11
IPv4 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 172.16.100.61
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11
172.16.100.254
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
430
APPENDIX D
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2015 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into
any language, or tr ansmitted in any form or by an y means, elec tronic, mec hanical, mag netic, o ptical, che mical, phot ocopying , manual, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it
convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any
products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Trademarks
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) and ZON (ZyXEL One Network)are registered trademarks of ZyXEL Communications, Inc.
Other tr ademar ks men tioned i n thi s public ation ar e used for ide ntific ation p urposes only an d ma y be p roperti es of their r espect iv e owners.
Regulatory Notice and Statement
United States of America
The following information applies if you use the product within USA area.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) EMC Statement
• This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations.
• Changes or modificat ions not exp ressly appro ved by the pa rty responsi ble for compl iance coul d void the use r’s autho rity to ope rate the
equipment.
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
Canada
The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area
Industry Canada ICES statement
CAN ICES-3 (A)/NMB-3(A)
European Union
The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union.
Appendix D Legal Information
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
431
CE EMC statement
This is Clas s A Product. I n domestic en vironment t his product may cause r adio inte rference in wh ich case the us er may be re quired to take
adequate measures.
List of National Codes
Notices
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
APPAREIL À LASER DE CLASS 1
PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11.
PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040.10 ET 1040.11.
Safety Warnings
• Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do NOT store things on the device.
• Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Do not obstruct the device ventillation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device.
• Connect ONLY suitab le accessories to th e device.
• Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY
qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the corre ct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Use ONL Y an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North
America or 230V AC in Europe).
• DO NOT remove the plug and connect it to a power ou tlet by itself; alw ays attach the plug to the power adaptor first before connecting
it to a power outlet.
• Use ONLY power wires of the appropriate wire gauge for your device. Connect it to a power supply of the correct voltage.
• Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power
adaptor or cord.
• Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.
• If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source.
• Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
• Fuse Warning! Replace a fuse only with a fuse of the same type and rating.
• The POE (Power over Ethernet) devices that supply or receive power and their connected Ethernet cables must all be completely
indoors.
• DO NOT use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY (on the motherboard) IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED
BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and
electronic equipment. For detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your household
waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product.
The following warning statements apply , where the disconnect device is not incorporated in the equipment or where the plug on the powe r
supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnect device,
• For PERMANENTLY CONNECTED EQUIPMENT, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the equipment;
• For PLUGGABLE EQUIPMENT, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE
Austria AT Liechtenstein LI
Belgium BE Lithuania LT
Bulgaria BG Luxembourg LU
Croatia HR Malta MT
Cyprus CY Netherlands NL
Czech Republic CR Norway NO
Denmark DK Poland PL
Estonia EE Portugal PT
Finland FI Romania RO
France FR Serbia RS
Germany DE Slovakia SK
Greece GR Slovenia SI
Hungary HU Spain ES
Iceland IS Sweden SE
Ireland IE Switzerland CH
Italy IT Turkey TR
Latvia LV United Kingdom GB
Appendix D Legal Information
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
432
Environment Statment
European Union - Disposal and Recycling Information
WEEE Directive
The symbol belo w means that ac cording to local regulat ions y our product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from domestic
waste. If this product is end of life, take it to a recycling station designated by local authorities. At the time of disposal, the separate
collection of your product and/or its battery will help save natural resources and ensure that the environment is sustainable development .
Die folgende Symbol bedeutet, dass Ihr Produkt und/oder seine Batterie gemäß den örtlichen Bestimmungen getrennt vom Hausmüll
entsorgt werden muss. Wenden Sie sich an eine Recyclingstation, wenn dieses Produkt das Ende seiner Lebensdauer erreicht hat. Zum
Zeitpunkt der Entsorgung wird die getrennte Sammlung von Produkt und/oder seiner Batterie dazu beitragen, natürliche Ressourcen zu
sparen und die Umwelt und die menschliche Gesundheit zu schützen.
El símbolo de abajo indica que según las regulaciones locales, su producto y/o su batería deberán depositarse como basura separada de la
doméstica. Cuando este producto alcance el final de su vida útil, llévelo a un punto limpio. Cuando llegue el momento de desechar el
producto, la recogida por separado éste y/o su batería ayudará a salvar los recursos naturales y a pr oteger la salud humana y
medioambiental.
Le symbole ci-dessous signifie que selon les réglementations locales votre produit et/ou sa batterie doivent être éliminés séparément des
ordures ménagères. Lorsque ce produit atteint sa fin de vie, amenez-le à un centre de recyclage. Au moment de la mise au rebut, la
collecte sép arée de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie aidera à économiser les ressources naturelles et protéger l'environnement et la
santé humaine.
Il simbolo sotto significa che secondo i regolamenti locali il vostro prodotto e/o batteria deve essere smaltito separatamente dai rifiuti
domestici. Quando questo prodotto raggiunge la fine della vita di servizio portarlo a una stazione di riciclaggio. Al momento dello
smaltimento, la raccolta separata del vostro prodotto e/o della sua batteria aiuta a risparmiare risorse naturali e a proteggere l'ambiente
e la salute umana.
Symbolen innebär att enligt lokal lagstiftning ska produkten och/eller dess batteri kastas separat från hushållsavfallet. När den här
produkten når slutet av sin livslängd ska du ta den till en återvinningsstation. Vid tiden för kasseringen bidrar du till en bättre miljö och
mänsklig hälsa genom att göra dig av med den på ett återvinningsställe.
Appendix D Legal Information
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
433
Environmental Product Declaration
Appendix D Legal Information
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
434
台灣
以下訊息僅適用於產品銷售至台灣地區
這是甲類的資訊產品，在居住的環境中使用時，可能會造成射頻干擾，在這種情況下，使用者會被要求採取某些適當的對策。
Viewing Certifications
Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this product’s documentation and certifications.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific
period (the Warranty Period) from the date o f purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the
authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of
purchase , should the prod uct have indi cations of failu re due to faulty workmanshi p and/or material s, Zy XEL will, at its disc retion, repair or
replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to
restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally
equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has
been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other
warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. Z yXEL shall in
no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought
the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at
www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.
Trademarks
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) and ZON (ZyXEL One Network)are registered trademarks of ZyXEL Communications, Inc.
Other tr ademar ks men tioned i n thi s public ation ar e used for ide ntific ation p urposes only an d ma y be p roperti es of their r espect iv e owners.
Open Source Licenses
This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are
provided with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. To obtain the source code covered under
those Licenses, please contact support@zyxel.com.tw to get it.
Index
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
435
Index
Numerics
802.1P priority 74
A
AAA 211
accounting 212
authentication 211
authorization 211
external server 211
RADIUS 211
TACACS+ 211
AAA (Authentication, Authorization and Accounting)
211
access control
limitations 362
login account 368
remote management 370
service port 369
SNMP 372
accounting
setup 216
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) 349, 401, 404, 406
administrator password 368
aging time 69
airflow 31
anti-arpscan 309
blocked hosts 310
host threshold 312, 313
port threshold 313
status 310
trusted hosts 311
applications
backbone 20
bridging 21
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN 22
switched workgroup 21
ARP
how it works 349
learning mode 349
overview 349
setup 351
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) 401
ARP inspection 223, 255
ARP scan 309
ARP-Reply 349
ARP-Request 350
authentication
setup 216
authentication, authorization and accounting 211
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting, see
AAA 211
authorization
privilege levels 217
setup 216
auto-crossover 28
automatic VLAN registration 94
B
back up, configuration file 357
bandwidth control 142
egress rate 143
ingress rate 143
setup 142
basic settings 64
basic setup tutorial 46
binding 222
binding table 222
building 223
BPDU 315
BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) 315
BPDU guard 315
and Errdisable Recovery 315
port status 315
BPDUs 122
Bridge Protocol Data Units 315
Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) 122
broadcast storm control 144
Index
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
436
C
CDP 263
certifications
notices 431
viewing 434
CFI 94
CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) 94
changing the password 39
Cisco Discovery Protocol, see CDP
CIST 141
Class of Service 333
classifier 170
and QoS 170
editing 175
example 177
logging 176
match order 176
overview 170
setup 171, 175
status 170
viewing 175
cloning a port See port cloning
cluster management 392
and switch passwords 395
cluster manager 392, 395
cluster member 392, 395
cluster member firmware upgrade 396
network example 392
setup 394
specification 392
status 393
switch models 392
VID 395
web configurator 396
cluster manager 392
cluster member 392
Common and Internal Spanning Tree, See CIST 141
configuration 330
change running config 355
saving 39
configuration file 40
backup 357
restore 40, 357
saving 355
console port 31
contact information 413
copying port settings, See port cloning
copyright 430
CoS 333
CPU management port 109
CPU protection 273
current date 67
current time 67
customer support 413
D
daylight saving time 68
default Ethernet settings 28
default IP 34, 71
DHCP
configuration options 337
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 337
modes 337
Relay Agent Information format 339
setup 338
DHCP relay option 82 254
DHCP snooping 46, 223, 253
configuring 255
DHCP relay option 82 254
trusted ports 253
untrusted ports 253
DHCP snooping database 254
DHCPv4
global relay 341
global relay example 343
Option 82 339
option 82 profiles 340
Relay Agent Information 339
DHCPv4 relay 338
DHCPv6 relay 347
interface-ID 347
remote-ID 347
diagnostics 385
Ethernet port test 386
ping 386
Differentiated Service (DiffServ) 333
Differentiated Services 333
DiffServ 333
activate 334
DS field 333
Index
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
437
DSCP 333
network example 334
PHB 334
service level 333
DiffServ Code Points 333
disclaimer 430
DNS 92
DNS (Domain Name System) 92
Domain Name System 92
DS (Differentiated Services) 333
DSCP 333
what it does 334
dual firmware images 355
dynamic link aggregation 148
E
egress port 112
egress rate, and bandwidth control 143
errdisable status 276
error disable 273
control packets 276
CPU protection 276
detect 278
recovery 278
status 274
error-disable recovery 273
Ethernet broadcast address 349, 401
Ethernet MAC 65
Ethernet OAM 318
Ethernet port test 386
external authentication server 212
F
FCC interference statement 430
file transfer using FTP
command example 360
filename convention, configuration
configuration
file names 360
filtering 119
rules 119
filtering database, MAC table 398
firmware 65
upgrade 356, 396
flow control
back pressure 74
IEEE802.3x 74
forwarding
delay 134
frames
tagged 101
untagged 101
front panel 27
FTP 359
file transfer procedure 360
restrictions over WAN 361
G
GARP 94
GARP (Generic Attribute Registration Protocol) 94
GARP timer 69, 94
general setup 66
getting help 41
Gigabit ports 27
GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) 68
gratuitous ARP 350
green Ethernet 282
and uplink port 282
auto power down 282
EEE 282
short reach 282
GVRP 94, 101
and port assignment 101
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) 94
H
hardware installation 24
hardware monitor 65
hardware overview 27
hello time 134
high power 74
HTTPS 380
Index
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
438
certificates 380
implementation 380
public keys, private keys 380
HTTPS example 380
I
IEEE 802.1x
activate 159
port authentication 157
reauthentication 160
IEEE 802.3at 74
IEEE 802.3az 282
IGMP filtering
profile 195
IGMP leave timeout
fast 193
mormal 192
IGMP snooping 187
MVR 188
IGMP throttling 193
ingress port 112
ingress rate, and bandwidth control 143
initial setup 42
installation
desktop 24
precautions 24
rack-mounting 24
transceivers 29
installation scenarios 24
Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6
IP address 72
IP setup 70
IP source guard 222
ARP inspection 223, 255
DHCP snooping 223, 253
static bindings 223
IP subnet mask 72
IPv4 source guard 222
IPv6 422
addressing 422
EUI-64 424
global address 423
interface ID 424
link-local address 422
Neighbor Discovery Protocol 422
neighbor table 407
ping 422
prefix 422
prefix length 422
stateless autoconfiguration 424
unspecified address 423
IPv6 interface 79
DHCPv6 client 90
enable 85
global address 87
global unicast address 83
link-local address 86
link-local IP 82
neighbor discovery 88
neighbor table 89
stateless autoconfiguration 85
status 81
IPv6 multicast
196
status 196
IPv6 neighbor table 407
IPv6 source guard 222, 244
IPv6 static binding 245
L
L2PT 261
access port 262
CDP 261
configuration 262
encapsulation 261
example 261
LACP 261
MAC address 261, 263
mode 262
overview 261
PAgP 261
point to point 261
STP 261
tunnel port 262
UDLD 261
VTP 261
LACP 148, 264
system priority 155
timeout 155
Layer 2 protocol tunneling, see L2PT
Index
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
439
LEDs 31
link aggregation 148
dynamic 148
ID information 149
setup 151
traffic distribution algorithm 151
traffic distribution type 153
trunk group 148
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) 148
Link Layer Discovery Protocol 284
LLDP 284
Basic TLV 300
global settings 298
local port status 288
organization-specific TLV 301
status of remote device 292
TLV 284
LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) 284
LLDP-MED 285
classes of endpoint devices 285
example 285
lockout 40
log message 388
login 34
password 39
login account
Administrator 368
non-administrator 368
login accounts 368
configuring via web configurator 368
multiple 368
number of 368
login password 369
loop guard 257
examples 258
port shut down 259
setup 259
vs. STP 257
M
MAC 65
MAC (Media Access Control) 65
MAC address 65, 401
maximum number per port 167
MAC address learning 69, 167
specify limit 167
MAC freeze 166
MAC table 398
display criteria 400
how it works 398
sorting criteria 400
transfer type 400
viewing 399
MAC - b ase d VLAN 107
maintanence
configuration backup 357
firmware 356
restoring configuration 357
maintenance 353
current configuration 354
main screen 354
Management Information Base (MIB) 372
management IP address 71
management port 112
managing the device
good habits 23
using FTP. See FTP. 23
using Telnet. See command interface. 23
using the command interface. See command
interface. 23
man-in-the-middle attacks 255
maximum transmission unit 403
Mbuf 359
Mbuf (Memory Buffer) 359
MDIX (Media Dependent Interface Crossover) 28
Media Access Control 65
Memory Buffer 359
MIB
and SNMP 372
supported MIBs 373
MIB (Management Information Base) 372
mirroring ports 146
MLD filtering profile 203
MLD snooping-proxy 197
filtering 201
filtering profile 203
port role 199
VLAN ID 198
monitor port 146
mounting brackets 25
Index
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
440
MRSTP
configuration 129
status 131
MST Instance, See MSTI 141
MST region 140
MSTI 134, 141
MSTI (Multiple Spanning Tree Instance) 134
MSTP 121, 123
bridge ID 138
configuration digest 138
forwarding delay 134
Hello Time 138
hello time 134
Max Age 134, 138
maximum hops 134
revision level 134
status 137
MTU 403
MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 68
multicast
IGMP throttling 193
IP addresses 186
setup 190
multicast group 195
multicast MAC address 116
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol, See MSTP 121, 123
Multiple STP 123
Multi-Tenant Unit 68
MVR 188
configuration 204
network example 188
MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration) 188
N
network applications 20
network management system (NMS) 372
NTP (RFC-1305) 67
O
OAM 318
details 320
discovery 318
discovery state 322
packets statistics 322
PDU size 321
port configuration 318
port operational state 319
remote loopback 318
remote-loopback 324
one-time schedule 168
Operations, Administration and Maintenance 318
Option 82 339
P
PAGP 264
password 39
administrator 368
Path MTU 403
Path MTU Disco very 403
Per-Hop Behavior 334
PHB 334
ping, test connection 386
PoE
PD priority 79
power managemen t mode 78
power-up mode 77
schedule 76
PoE Plus 74
policy 179
and classifier 179
and DiffServ 179
configuration 179
example 182
overview 179
rules 179
Port Aggregation Protocol, see PAgP
port authentication 157
guest VLAN 160
IEEE802.1x 159
MAC authentication 162
method 159
port cloning 404, 406
advanced settings 404, 406
basic settings 404, 406
port details 61
Index
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
441
port mirroring 146
port redundancy 148
port security 165
limit MAC address learning 167
MAC address learning 165
overview 165
setup 165
port setup 72
port status 59
port details 61
port VLAN ID, see PVID 101
port VLAN trunking 95
port-based VLAN 109
all connected 112
port isolation 112
settings wizard 112
ports
diagnostics 386, 387
mirroring 146
speed/duplex 74
standby 149
power
voltage 66
power connector 31
power status 66
PPPoE IA 265
agent sub-options 267
configuration 267
drop PPPoE packets 269
port state 267
sub-option format 266
tag format 265
trusted ports 267
untrusted ports 267
VLAN 271
PPPoE Intermediate Agent 265
priority level 70
priority queue assignment 70
private VLAN 280
configuration 280
isolated port 280
overview 280
promiscuous port 280
product registration 434
protocol based VLAN 104
and IEEE 802.1Q tagging 104
application example 104
configuration example 112
isolate traffic 104
priority 105
setup 104
un-tagged packets 104
PVID 94
Q
QoS 333
and classifier 170
Quality of Service 333
queue weight 184
queuing 183
SPQ 183
WRR 183
queuing method 183, 185
R
rack-mounting 24
RADIUS 212
advantages 212
and tunnel protocol attribute 220
setup 213
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, See RSTP. 121
rear panel connections 31
reboot
load configuration 355
reboot system 355
recurring schedule 168
registration
product 434
remote management 370
service 371
trusted computers 371
resetting 40, 354
to factory default settings 354
restoring configuration 40, 357
RFC 3164 389
Round Robin Scheduling 183
RSTP 121
configuration 125
Index
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
442
status 127
running configuration 354
erase 354
reset 354
S
save configuration 39, 355
schedule
one-time 168
recurring 168
type 169
Secure Shell See SSH
service access control 369
service port 370
Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP
Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) 28
SNMP 372
agent 372
and MIB 372
authentication 367
communities 363
management model 372
manager 372
MIB 373
network components 372
object variables 372
protocol operations 372
security 367
setup 363
traps 364
users 366
version 3 and security 372
versions supported 372
SNMP traps 373
supported 373, 378
Spanning Tr ee Protocol, See STP. 121
SPQ (Strict Priority Queuing) 183
SSH
encryption methods 379
how it works 378
implementation 379
SSH (Secure Shell) 378
SSL (Secure Socket Layer) 380
standby ports 149
static bindings 223
static MAC address 114
static MAC forwarding 114
static multicast address 116
static multicast forwarding 116
static route
enable 331
metric 332
static routes 330
static VLAN 98
control 99
tagging 99
status 35, 55
MRSTP 131
MSTP 137
port 59
power 66
RSTP 127
VLAN 96
STP 121, 264
bridge ID 127, 131
bridge priority 126, 130
designated bridge 122
edge port 126, 130
forwarding delay 126
Hello BPDU 122
Hello Time 126, 127, 130, 131
how it works 122
Max Age 126, 128, 130, 131
path cost 122, 127, 130
port priority 127, 130
port role 128, 132
port state 123, 128, 132
root guard 126, 130
root port 122
status 124
terminology 122
vs. loop guard 257
subnet based VLAN
and DHCP VLAN 103
priority 103
setup 102
subnet based VLANs 101
switch lockout 40
switch reset 40
switch setup 69
syslog 389
protocol 389
settings 389
Index
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
443
setup 389
severity levels 389
system information 64
system reboot 355
T
TACACS+ 211, 212
advantages 212
setup 214
tagged VLAN 93
Tech-Support 358
log enhancement 358
temperature indicator 65
Terminal Access Controller Access-Control System
Plus 211
terminal emulation 31
time
current 67
Time (RFC-868) 67
time range 168
time server 67
time service protocol 67
format 67
ToS 333
trademarks 430, 434
transceiver MultiSource Agreement (MSA) 28
transceivers 28
installation 29
removal 29
traps
destination 364
trunk group 148
trunking 148
trusted ports
DHCP snooping 253
PPPoE IA 267
tunnel protocol attribute
and RADIUS 220
tutorials 46
DHCP snooping 46
Type of Serivce 333
U
UDLD 264
UniDirectional Link Detection, see UDLD
untrusted ports
DHCP snooping 253
PPPoE IA 267
user name 34
default 34
user profiles 212
V
Vendor Specific Attribute, See VSA 219
ventilation 24
VID 97
number of possible VIDs 94
priority frame 94
VID (VLAN Identifier) 94
Virtual Local Area Network 68
VLAN 68
acceptable frame type 101
automatic registration 94
ID 93
ingress filtering 101
introduction 68, 93
number of VLANs 96
port number 97
port settings 100
port-based VLAN 109
port-based, all connected 112
port-based, isolation 112
port-based, wizard 112
PVID 101
static VLAN 98
status 96, 97
subnet based 101
tagged 93
terminology 95
trunking 95, 101
type 69, 95
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) 68
VLAN ID 72, 93
VLAN terminology 95
VLAN trunking 101
Index
GS2210 Series User’s Guide
444
VLAN Trunking Protocol, see VTP
VLAN, protocol based, See protocol based VLAN 104
Voice VLAN 106
VSA 219
VT100 31
VTP 264
W
warranty 434
note 434
web configurator
getting help 41
home 35
login 34
logout 41
navigation panel 36
weight, queuing 184
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR) 184
WRR (Weighted Round Robin Scheduling) 183
Z
ZDP 57
ZON neighbor mana gement 58
ZON Utility 57
ZULD 326
and Error Disable 327
example 326
mode 329
probe time 328
status 327
ZULD (ZyXEL Unidirectional Link Detection) 326
Z y NOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) 360
ZyXEL Discovery Protocol 57
ZyXEL Unidirectional Link Detection 326
ZyXEL Unidirectional Link Detection (ZULD) 326